HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL-SPECIFICATIONSst w 1
WAWA
Ston
Prima Vista I
CUHACI &
Project Manual
Including
Specifications
For
OD MARKETS
#5220 FLO
& Floresta Dr., Port St. Lucie
ULJI�S
ON ARCHITECTS, LLC
25 Prospect Ave.
riando, FL 32814
(407) 661-9100
W) 661-9101 (fax)
January 30, 2017
rsion 17.01
F8. ,, F85FB, F110, F110v2
WAWA
Project Manual
Including
Specifications
For
OOD MARKETS
Stor& #5220 FLO
Prima Vista
& Floresta Dr., Port St. Lucie
LJLJI�J
CUHACI & PETERSON ARCHITECTS, LLC
1�925 Prospect Ave.
Orlando, Fl- 32814
(407) 661-9100
(407) 661-9101 (fax)
January
Versio
n
30, 2017
17.01
F85,IF85FB, F110, F110v2
ABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01001 Instruction to Bidders
01002 Modifications to the General Condition
01003 Supplement to the General Con itions
01004 Cleaning
01400 Quality Control
DIVISION 2 — SITE REQUIREMENTS
02001
Earthwork, Clearing, and Gradii
02002
Sitework
02282
Soil Treatment
02530
Sanitary Sewerage
02531
Plumbing Sitework
02810
Irrigation
02900
Landscaping
DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE
03301 Cast -In -Place Concrete Building
03302 Cast -In -Place Concrete Site
DIVISION 4 — MASONRY
04200 Unit Masonry
04223 Pre -Cast Concrete Wall Base
04720 Cultured Stone
DIVISION 5 — METALS
05001
Miscellaneous Metal
05120
Structural Steel
05210
Steel Joists
05310
Steel Deck
05400
Cold -formed Metal Framing
05720
Decorative Metal
DIVISION 6 —WOOD AND PLASTICS
06001 Carpentry and Millwork
06100 Rough Carpentry
DIVISION 7 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE P
07001
Thermal and Moisture Protectii
07210
Building Insulation
07250
Weather Barrier
07260
Underslab Vapor_Barrier,
07410
Standing Seam Metal Roofing
07461
Siding
07530
Membrane Sheet Roofing; A
07620
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07720
Roof Accessories
07840
Firestopping
07920
Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 — DOORS AND WINDOWS
08001 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
084126 Storefront Glazing
08700 Hardware
i
DIVISION 9 — FINISHES
09221
Non -Structural Metal Framing
09240
Stucco Wall System
09250
Gypsum Board
09300
Ceramic Tile
09390 _ _ _'
SaniE GLAZ
09500
Acoustical Tile Ceilings
August 26, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)
DIVISION 9 — FINISHES (cont'd)
09600
Flooring
09700
Wall Finishes
09900
Painting
09960
Coatings for Steel
DIVISION 10 — SPECIALITIES
10200 Specialties
DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT
11400 Equipment
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15001 Plumbing
15002 Everpure Water Treatment (CSR Unit)
15003 HVAC
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16001 Electrical
16500 Lighting
APPENDIX A
ADA Building Review Form
APPENDIX B
BAS Master Specs
August 26, 2016
01001-01 WORK
01.1 The Contractor shall sul
apparatus, energy, scE
completion of the Work.
local Building Code, ADj
ordinances which apply.
01001-02 SITE VISIT
02.1 All Bidders submitting
thereon. All Proposals
under the Contract.
necessity to provide V
to Wawa.
01001-03 BIDFORM
SECTION 01001
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
ly all labor, materials, permits, fees, transportation, equipment,
)Iding, tools, and all else necessary for the entire proper
%II Work shall conform to the requirements of the Zoning laws,
rules and regulations of the local Board of Health, and all other
:)osals for this Work shall first examine site and all conditions
II take into consideration all such conditions as may affect work
ure to examine site will not relieve successful bidder from
that may be required to complete Work without additional cost
03.1 Bidding shall include the following items: store number (if available), location, date, latest
revision date on plans, addenda, base bid, alternate additions and deductions, total bid,
and acknowledgment thaI� the bidder has received the proposed Contract Documents,
including any Addenda, and has visited the Site.
03.2 Contractors are required I to use the Contractors Cost Itemization Form supplied by
Wawa, or Bid will not be a cepted.
04.1 Bids should be se_ nt I via e-mail to thomas.w.bryden(cD-wawa.com, and copy
, lorri.krushinski(a-)wawa.com, & kathleen.donithan(abwawa.com. If
all parties listed are not copied, your bid will not be opened.
Proposals shall be identifii d with the store number and location, and the bidder's name
and address.
05.1 All references to "Owner" in these Specifications shall be read as "Wawa, Inc."
05.2 The term "furnish" shall mean to obtain and supply to the job site. The term "install" shall
mean to fix in position and connect for use. The term "provide" shall mean to furnish and
install.
01001-06 RFI PROCESS
06.1 Bid RFI's should be sent to thomas.w.bryden(cDwawa.com . No RFI's shall be sent within
48 hours (2 business days) of bid due date.
END OF SECTION 01001
01-1
October 2Z 2012
01.1 Standard "General Con
shall be considered part
Construction Observatio
Document A-201 shall t
may be examined at of
request only.
01002-02 OSHA
02.1 The General Contractoi
responsibility to, and are
regulations of the latest i
explanatory or related re
construction operations ,
between these regulatior
Wawa Project Manager's
02.2 The Hard Hat Safety Polic
New Stores: ALL pers
occupancy is obtained
exist.
Remodels: ALL person.
Store Operations. Hard
electrical hazards exist.
Parking Lot Additions: H
SECTION 01002
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS'
ions of Contract for Construction," AIA A-201, latest edition,
these Specifications. The Architect has not been retained for
unless informed otherwise. All reference to 'Architect" in AIA
read as "Wawa Project Manager. A copy of this document
e of Wawa, Inc., or at the Architect's office. Copies sent on
and all Subcontractors are herewith reminded of their
required under this contract to conform to, all the governing
dition of the Occupational Safety and Health Act and to any
lulations issued since the Act was passed. This applies to
rid all permanent construction. Any discrepancy regulation
s and the Drawings or specifications shall be brought to the
ttention before proceeding.
shall be as follows:
I on site shall wear hard hats until a temporary certificate of
stantial completion) and no overhead or electrical hazards
on site shall wear hard hats until the store is turned over to
is shall continue to be worn at that point if overhead or
hats shall be worn until all work is completed.
Hard Hat Area Signs arel to be posted and maintained throughout construction at the
construction entrance. he General Contractor, Project Superintendent and Wawa
Project Manager shall as anyone not following OSHA regulations to leave the site until
such a time that they are in compliance.
01002-03 LIENS
03.1 The General Contractor shall, without cost to the Wawa, Inc., obtain prompt discharge of
any lien or liens that may be filed against the building or property arising out of this
Contract.
03.2 Waiver of Liens shall be filed by the Contractor in accordance with local legal practice,
prior to the commencemenit of any Work on the Project.
03.3 Release of Liens shall be submitted within thirty days of completion of Work. The General
Contractor shall affix to his release, the names of all Subcontractors and prime suppliers.
They, in turn, shall subrpit individual notarized Release of Liens. Contractor shall
resubmit the Subcontractors list.
04.1 The Work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced after notice to
proceed has been given by Wawa, Inc., which shall not be earlier than either (1) the time
Wawa, Inc. shall have received permits required to commence construction, which may
be prior to a building permit being issued, or (2) the filing of a waiver of liens. The work
shall be completed with I diligence and in a good, and workmanlike manner after
01-2
October 4, 2016
SECTION 01002
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
commencement thereof. Completion of Punch List will be done within two weeks of date
f
of Punch Walk, or prior to store opening.
01002-05 INSURANCE
05.1 Contractor shall submit insurance certificate to Wawa indicating the following coverages:
(A) General Liability Insurance
Bodily Injury and Property Damage
1,000,000 Per Occurrence Limit
$2,000,000 General Aggregate Limit
$2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate
Personal Injury and Advertising Injury Insurance - $1,000,000 per occurrence
(B) Automobile Liability Insurance
Bodily Injury and Property Damage-$1,000,000 Combined Single Limit
(C) Workers Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance
$1,000,000 per accident, bodily injury by accident
$1,000,000 each person, bodily injury by disease
$1,000,000 policy limit, bodily injury by disease
(D) Umbrella Liability Insurance
Bodily Injury and Property Damage
Per occurrence - $4,000,000
General Aggregate Limit - $4,000,000
Personal Injury and Advertising Injury - Included in Policy Limit
01002-06 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
06.1 These Specifications are comprehensive for use with many types of Wawa Stores,
including but not limited to prototype buildings, leased spaces, and Remodel Stores.
06.2 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to identify all items in the Specifications
required to complete the Work shown in the Drawings.
01002-07 PERMITS
07.1 Contractor will secure building Permits if required by Wawa with the exception of those
permits which must be secured by respective Subcontractors as the local regulations
require (i.e. plumbing, electrical, etc.). Refer to STANDARDS & CODES. Local Licenses
will be paid for by the Contractor.
01002-08 STANDARDS AND CODES
08.1 The Architectural Drawings and Specifications are standardized and intended for
adaptation and use in any locality. As local codes and conditions may vary and the
Architect has limited Construction Observation responsibility, it is important that the
Contractor verify the application of both local and state codes and applicable
requirements to these Drawings and Specifications. Changes required must be reported
to Wawa's Representative for his written approval before proceeding with the Work.
08.2 Workmanship must conform to applicable codes and regulations (see drawings for list)
and American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) as well as published trade and
manufacturers standards for each material or item of equipment installed. Where any
01-3
October 4, 2016
standard seems in cc
Manager for direction
SECTION 01002
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
with the Drawings and Specifications, notify the Wawa Project
re proceeding.
01002-09 MEASUREMENTS
09.1 Before ordering any material or doing any Work, the Contractor shall verify all
measurements at the building and site and shall be responsible for correctness of same.
No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual
dimensions and the measurements indicated on the Drawing; any difference which may
be found shall be submjtted to the Wawa Project Manager for consideration, before
proceeding with the Work
01002-10 GUARANTEES
10.1 General Contractor: Prov�de Written Guarantee upon substantial completion of work.
10.2 Subcontractors: In the case of work performed by Subcontractors and where written
guarantees are required the Contractor shall secure these from said Subcontractors
addressed to and in favo of Wawa, Inc.; and deliver copies of same to the Wawa, Inc.
upon completion of the Zrk, countersigned by the General Contractor.
10.3 Terms: Written guarantee(s) shall state that all Work executed under the respective
contract(s) will be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period (see 10.4)
and that the Contractor v�lll, at his own expense, repair and replace all such defective
work during the term of the guarantee -Warranty.
10.4 Time Period: The guaran ee period(s) shall be for a period of one year from the date of
Substantial Completion a determined by Wawa, unless longer periods are specifically
called for. The Contractor shall not submit any guarantees until he has verified the date
of the beginning of the gu;rantee period with the Wawa Project Manager.
10.5 Construction Closing
Table 01002-10-10.5.
shall be provided by the General Contractor per
01-4
October 4, 2016
SECTION 01002
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
01002-10-10.5 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Construction Closing Documentation from General Contractor
Wawa Food Market #
TAB # I DESCRIPTION
1.
Copies of all Building related permits
2.
Copy of the signed off Final SUbmittal
Release Check list from Architect
3.
Copy of the ;Carboline 7-year paint
Warranty
4.
Copy of the 20-year Roof Warranty
for the Standing Seam main roof and Single -Ply flat
roof
5.
Copy of the signed off Irri ation
Inspection Report
6.
Copy of the Sewer As -Built Drawings
from the Site Engineer per Wawa specs
7.
2 hard copies and one scanned set of the Site As -Built Drawings showing electric (primary
& secondary), water, gas, sewer, irrigation, telephone and all other conduits that cross the
parking lot. Conduits and Utilitjes to be shown with dimensions and depths for locating in
the future.
8.
2 hard copies and one scanned set of Architectural As-Builts — As -built only required if
there are changes from the co p struction set. If changes occur only to specific installs;
electric for example, than the "E" sheets will only be necessary, not a full set. At the
completion of the job, before the punch list walk, a full set must be placed in the drawing
tube along with As -built Site Dr�,awings, including landscape sprinkler system layout.
These can temporarily be the superintendents set in order to have drawings in store at all
times from the time of GC's completion.
9.
Include the potable drinking water well (Drillers Log) to the close out package. This is
only applicable to stores that a ie not provided with water from the municipality and have a
drinkingwater well on -site.
10.
Manager to sign -off on receipt f 1 set of Maintenance and Operating Manuals for all the
contractor -supplied equip ment.
11.
Verification of cleaning of all underground piping signed by the Contractor with a copy of
invoice from cleaning contractor.
12.
Manager to sign -off for keys to the store. (All keys are to be tagged and presented to
Store Manager)
13.
Manager to sign -off on instruction of the Landscape Irrigation System.
14.
1 copy of the Certificate of Occu anc : original should go to the store
15. 1
Sub -contractor listing with Release of Liens
16.
Signed -off punch list by Post Construction Project Manager.
17.
Include all warranties in accordance with section 01002-10 of, the project manual.
18.
Include all product data, maintenance and operations information concerning all
equipment ands stems.
19.
Include all letters of certification! i.e. fuel station equipment systems etc.
20.
Include all applicable product approvals and NOA's.
21.
Include building power grounding test certification.
22.
Two (2) copies of the Approved (Certified Air Balance eport:
_R_A_ pproved report shall
_ f
include the Architect/Engineers review stamp.,_
All of the above closing documentation .is to be submitted on CD along with this checklist to the Wawa
Construction Project Manager within 60 days of the Punch list Walk. The final $10,000 payment will be
held until all documents are received.
10.6 Architect's Final Submittal Release Checklist shall be obtained by Contractor: Table
01002-10-10.6.
01-5
October 4, 2016
ARCHITECTURAL
❑
All requested submittals have bee
received.
❑
All submittals to be resubmitted h
received.
❑
Final punch walk has been compl
❑
ADA punch walk has been comp)
❑
Final punch list issues have been
addressed
❑
All applicable NOA's and Product
Approvals have been sent to G.0
OUTSTANDING ISSUES:
STRUCTURAL
❑
All requested submittals have b
received.
❑
All submittals to be resubmitted
received.
❑
Final site observation visit has t
completed.
❑
Final SOR issues have been ad
OUTSTANDING ISSUES:
SECTION 01002
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
Store Number:
been Store Address:
been
MECHANICAL/PLUMBING/ELECTRICAL
❑ All requested submittal have been
received.
❑ All submittals to be resubmitted have been
received.
❑ Final punch walk has been completed.
❑ Balance reports have been completed and
accepted
❑ Final punch list issues have been
addressed.
OUTSTANDING ISSUES:
General Contractor:
Wawa's Project Manager:
C-P's Project Arch:
Date: , 2012
Wawa's Project Manager Sign -Off
Approved By:
Date:
01-6
October 4, 2016
SECTION 01002
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
11.1 The General Contractor Ohall employ a competent Contractor Superintendent who will be
at the project site at all times while work is in progress. The Superintendent shall
represent the Contractor hand all communications given to the Superintendent shall be as
binding as if given to the iContractor. All important communications shall be confirmed in
writing.
01002-12 SUBCONTRACTORS
12.1 Prior to the start of Construction, the General Contractor shall submit a complete list of
Subcontractors for Wawais records, review, and approval.
12.2 No change in SubcontrOctor shall be made during the course of the construction
operation without notifying the Wawa Project Manager and receiving his approval.
13.1 General Contractor to provide on -site telephone from beginning of construction until
completion of all Work.
13.2 General Contractor to provide "office -trailer' at all new store construction sites.
X,
14.1 Shop Drawings are Drawi gs, diagrams schedules and other data specially prepared for
the Work by the Contrac or or a Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to
' illustrate some portion oft a Work.
14.2 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Architect, five (5) sets total
of Shop Drawings and sir ilar submittal required by the Contract Documents within two
weeks of awarding of the project and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work
or in the activities of V 12, Inc. or of separate Contractors. Hardware schedules are to
be submitted in the format provided by the Door & Hardware Institute. Electronic
submission is acceptable.
14.3 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of
Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and approved by the
Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittal.
14.4 By submitting and/or approving Shop Drawings, the Contractor represents that the
Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field
construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the
information contained within such submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the
Contract Documents.
14.5 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of
the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings unless the
Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time
of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The
Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Drawings, or similar submittal by the Architect's approval thereof.
14.6 The Architect will review Contractor's submittal such as Shop Drawings, but only for the
limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design
concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review of such submittal is not
�- conducted for the purpose I 6f determining the accuracy and completeness of other details
01-7
October 4, 2016
SECTION 01002
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions of
any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures.
01002-15 CHANGE ORDERS
15.1 Whenever a change is required a Change Order request must be filed immediately.
15.2 A Change Order request can be initiated by either the Contractor or the Wawa Project
Manager.
15.3 A Change Order request initiated by the General Contractor should be completely priced,
if initiated by the Wawa Project Manager it will be sent to the Contractor for pricing and
shall be returned to the Wawa Project Manager as soon as possible.
15.4 Change Order Request Forms shall be per AIA.
15.5 When work is completed the Contractor will invoice for the Change Order amount and bill
on an AIA Request for Payment Form.
15.6 Change Orders are to be submitted on the Wawa Change Order request form to the
Wawa Project Manager for approval prior to commencing of work and submittal for
payment. All sub -Contractor and/or supplier invoices are to be attached, including labor
and material cost break downs. Overhead and Profit for change orders will be 8%.
01002-16 GENERAL
16.1 General Contractor Superintendent and the Subcontractor Foreman will be required to
sign a copy of the specification section(s) pertaining to the Subcontractor the first day the
Subcontractor is on site to start work. A copy of this is to be kept on site in a three ring
binder for the Wawa Project Manager.
16.2 New Stores Only: Invoices for Payment shall be submitted on AIA forms G702 and
G703. Column B (Description of Work) on form G703 to be broken down exactly as the
cost itemization form submitted for bidding. For Remodels: Invoices for Payment shall
be submitted as per the contract breakdown. For All Stores: A cover letter with the
amount of payment requested to be attached. The first payment will not be paid until a
copy of the building permit is received by Wawa from the General Contractor.
16.3 An AIA Release of Liens form shall be attached to the request for final payment. All
Project close-out materials (including one [1] set of As -Built Drawings) shall be turned
over to the Wawa Project Manager prior to request for final payment. A copy of the
Certificate of Occupancy must be submitted to Wawa prior to final payment.
16.4 Punch Lists will be performed by the Architects and Engineers as listed on the Project's
Construction Documentation Cover Sheet, by Wawa's Operations and Facilities
Departments' Representatives, and by Wawa's Construction Department's Senior Project
Manager. All Punch List items must be signed off by the Wawa's Project Manager and
Wawa's Facilities Department Representative. If the Punch List items are not completed
by the Time Frame given, Wawa reserves the right to hire a third party to complete the
work. The cost of this will then be deducted from the General Contractor's Final Draw.
This will not impact or invalidate the One Year Warranty provided by the General
Contractor. In addition the General Contractor will be back -charged for any return trips
required by the Architects, Engineers, Wawa's Project Manager and/or Wawa's Facilities
Department Representative to follow up on any Punch List items that were not completed
upon the Punch List Completion Inspection.
01-8
October 4, 2016
END OF SECTION 01002
SECTION 01002
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
01-9
October 4, 2016
SECTION 01003
SUPPLEMENT TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
01.1 These Specifications are1 comprehensive for use with many types of Wawa Stores,
including but not limited to prototype buildings, leased spaces, and Remodel Stores.
01.2 All items relating to Site ork, including, but not limited to Section 2, are noted in the
Specifications as requested by Wawa's Construction Department. All Site Work for all
projects to be as per Wawa's Project Civil Engineers latest Plans and Specifications.
01.3 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to identify all items in the Specifications
required to complete the Work shown in the Drawings.
01003-02 BUILDINGS
02.1 Building Plans are intended for adaptation to a variety of Site Conditions, and may
require modifications in accordance, but not limited to, the following:
(A) For use within fire limits, the building must be modified in accordance with
applicable building code requirements for fire resistance ratings of exterior walls.
(B) An Engineer -approved Footing and Foundation Plan must be submitted to Wawa's
Representative for approval prior to proceeding if soil bearing conditions are not as
required by the Architect's Construction Drawings.
(C) Sidewalk dimensions, extent and details shown in Construction Drawings are for
general information only and are not to be used for construction purposes. For all
information regarding�side walks and all sitework including storm drainage see latest
Site Engineering Dra ings.
(D) Connections to all uti ities shall be modified in accordance with latest Site Drawings
by others. Enginee -approved building systems designs shall be submitted to
Wawa's Representative for approval prior to proceeding if modifications must be
made to accommodate Site Conditions.
ARCHITECTURAL
❑ Hardware
• Storefront
• Metal doors and frames
• Rest Room Accessories
❑ Terrazzo
❑ Stucco/Manufactured Stone
❑ Roof Materials
❑ Cement Fiber Siding
STRUCTURAL
❑ Structural Steel Shop Drawings (Store)
• Erection Drawings
• Piece Drawings
• Metal Deck Drawings
• Prep procedure and priming (material
• Current Welder's certifications
❑ Structural Steel Shop Drawings (Building and Gas Canopy)
01-10
October 4, 2016
SECTION 01003
SUPPLEMENT TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
• Erection Drawings
• Piece Drawings
• Metal Deck Drawings
• Prep procedure and priming material
• Current Welder's certifications
❑ Concrete
• Mix design
• Material certificates
• Historical testing background
❑ Masonry
• Material certification
• ASTM test documentation
❑ Concrete Reinforcing Shop Drawings (Store & Canopy)
• Placement Drawings
• Fabrication and Bending Details
❑ Light Gage Metal Framing
• Manufacturer's Cut Sheet for Studs & Track
MECHANICAL
❑ Air Conditioning Units and Controls
❑ Air Balancing Report
❑ Exhaust Fans
❑ Smoke Detectors and Keypads
❑ Grilles, Registers and Diffusers
❑ Duct Layout Shop Drawings
❑ Masterbilt Unit
PLUMBING
❑ Rest Room Fixtures
❑ Grease Interceptor
❑ Water Heater
❑ Water Meters
❑ Backflow Preventors
❑ Drains, Floor Sinks, Etc.
ELECTRICAL
❑ Circuit Breaker Panels
❑ Devices and Fixtures
❑ Lighting Contractor Panel
❑ Emergency Shutoff Contactor Panel
END OF SECTION 01003
01-11
October 4, 2016
SECTION 01004
CLEANING
01004-01 FINAL CLEAN-UP
01.1 The General Contractor hall, in addition to any other cleaning specified to be done by
him, at his own cost and expense, do the following special cleaning for all Contractors
and trades before the fina completion of the Work:
(A) Clean and polish all finishing hardware.
(B) Remove all spots, sold and waste paint from all floors.
(C) Clean properties of a�l debris and dirt.
(D) Clean and polish both surfaces of all glazing and mirrors.
(E) All trash removal up until turnover to Wawa Store Operations.
(F) All New Stores and Remodels require cleaning to be done by a professional
cleaner. I
(G) Remove screws, nails and all construction debris from roof and tower element.
01.2 Cleaning Schedules
(A) Prior to shelving installation.
(B) Prior to Wawa set-up crew arrival / DOA Inspections.
(C) Prior to Punch Walk.
01.3 Third Party Floor Cleaning
(A) 24_hours prior to cabinet_ installation. To -be scheduled by Wawa.
01004-02 DAILY CLEANUP
02.1 Clean up daily and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris
and waste material. Remove all such items to the place designated for their storage by
the Wawa Project Managed.
01004-03 PROTECTION
03.1 The Contractor shall maintain all the necessary safeguards such as barriers, barricades,
signs, etc., to protect the work crew and public during the construction periods.
03.2 Verify all utility locations at site.
03.3 Protect all existing utilities, monitoring wells, structures, trees, and plantings not marked
for removal. Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement of damaged
aforementioned items.
03.4 Report any unforeseen conditions to Wawa Project Manager before proceeding with the
Work.
1004-04 POWER WASHING
he entire exterior of the building and canopy area, including
04.1 At the completion of all Work, t
01-12
October 4, 2016
concrete walls, sidewalks, and paved areas, shall be power washed.
END OF SECTION 01004
SECTION 01004
CLEANING
01-13
October 4, 2016
01400-01 QUALITY CONTROL
01.1 Related Documents:
and Supplementary C
01.2 Summary
(A) This Section incl
services.
01.3
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
ngs and general provisions of the Contract, including General
administrative and procedural requirements for quality -control
(B) Quality -control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including
reports performed dy Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing
authorities. They o not include contract enforcement activities performed by
Architect.
(C) Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
(D) Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation
procedures, not produl, ction of standard products.
Specific quality -a
specified in the
Sections may also
Specified inspectic
control procedur
requirements.
Requirements for
Architect, Wawa,
provisions of this 14
Responsibilities
introl requirements for individual construction activities are
actions that specify those activities. Requirements in those
cover production of standard products.
ns, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-
:s that facilitate compliance with Contract Document
Contractor to provide quality -control services specified by
Inc., or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
Iction.
(A) Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and
other quality -control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall
employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality -control
services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
(B) Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and
other quality -control services are Wawa, Inc.'s responsibility, Wawa, Inc. will employ
and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. Where
Wawa, Inc. has engaged a testing agency for testing and inspecting part of the
Work, and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or related
element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by Wawa, Inc.
(C) Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections,
tests, or other quality -control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate
noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the
original test was Contractor's responsibility. The cost of retesting construction,
revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where
required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with
Contract Document requirements.
(A) Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests
01400-1
8/2/2012
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Provide access to the Work.
2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require
testing or assist the agency in taking samples.
4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
6. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials
mixes that require control by the testing agency.
(B) Regardless of whoever hires the 3rd party or retains the services of the testing
agency, the General Contractor will be responsible for coordinating and scheduling
the testing.
END SECTION 01400
01400-2
8/2/2012
02001-01 POLICY
01.1 The following Specificatii
and grading from cont
inconsistent site work.
requirements and it is 1
ensure. that the plans a
local regulations require
to give approval prior to
02001-02 SITE CLEARING
02.1 Project Conditions
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
s are to insure that Wawa receives uniform earthwork, clearing
ctors in order to minimize future site deficiencies due to
These Specifications are to be used as minimum design
responsibility of the Civil Engineer preparing the plans to
Iress all municipal requirements and regulations. Should any
aviation from these Specifications, Wawa's Project Engineer is
bmittal.
(A) Traffic: Conduct site! clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads,
streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or
obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from
authorities having jurisdiction.
(B) Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent
damage to existing improvements indicted to remain in place.
1. Protect impro' ements on adjoining properties and on Wawa's property.
2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to
Wawa Representative.
(C)
Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other
vegetation indicated Ito remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or
skinning of roots, sk nning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling
construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or
vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to
protect trees and vegetation to be left standing.
1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as
required to maintain their health during course of construction operations.
2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in diameter that are cut
during constructi n operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or
other acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged tissues. Temporarily
cover exposed ro is with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with
earth as soon as possible.
3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by
construction operations in a manner acceptable to Wawa Representative.
Employ a licensed Arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs.
4. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as
determined by Arborist.
(D)
Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing removal and
alteration work on property adjoining Wawa's property will be obtained by Wawa
prior to award of contract. Extent of work on adjacent property is indicated on
Drawings.
(E)
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store
on Wawa's premises here indicated or directed.
02.2 Existing Utilities
-� (A)
General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before
02001-1
July, 2011
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
commencing Work.
(B) Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services.
Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this
Work.
(C) Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines
and capping locations on Project Record Documents.
02.3 Site Clearing
(A) General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or
obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar
items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes
digging out and off -site disposal of stumps and roots. Cut minor roots and branches
of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and
branches obstruct installation of new construction.
(B) Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not
less than 4 inches (100 mm). Depth of existing topsoil to be verified in Geotechnical
Report. If Site Plan specifies sod to be used on site, topsoil shall be 2 inches in
depth. If Site Plan specifies hydroseeding on site, topsoil shall be 4 inches to 6
inches in depth. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps,
stones, and other objects over 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter, and without weeds,
roots, and other objectionable material. If imported from off -site, topsoil shall be
screened and free of debris.
1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent
intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove
heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. Hand rake topsoil to remove
all debris. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in
place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system.
2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct
storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if
required, to prevent wind erosion.
3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste
material.
(C) Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for
those indicated to be left standing.
1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground
surface.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain.
3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil
material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in
horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) loose depth, and thoroughly
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
(D) Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade
improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.
Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated
on Mechanical or Electrical Drawings and is included under work of related Division
15 and 16 Sections. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits
interfering with construction is included under this Section.
02001-2
July, 2011
ram.
03.1 Quality Assurance
(A) Tree Service Qual
successfully compli
this Project.
(B) Tree Pruning 11
Standards for
indicated.
03.2 Preparation
(A) Temporary Protecti
guards located ou
remaining trees and
(B) Protect tree root
or spillage while
systems from fl
operation.
(C) Do not allow fires
03.3 Excavation Near Trees
(A) Do not excavate
(B) Where excavation
excavate to minimiz
comb soil to expose
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
ions: Engage an experienced. tree service firm that has
tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for
: Comply with the National Arborist Association's "Pruning
Trees" except where more stringent requirements are
Provide temporary fencing, barricades, or other suitable
the drip line (outer perimeter of branches) to protect
plants from damage.
ems from damage due to noxious materials caused by run-off
:ing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root
ng, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering
or adjacent to remaining trees or other plants.
tree drip line, unless otherwise indicated.
r new construction is required within tree drip lines, hand
damage to root systems. Use narrow -tine spading forks and
1. Relocate roots in ackfill areas wherever possible. If encountering large, main
lateral roots, expose beyond excavation limits as required to bend and relocate
without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new
construction and relocation is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75
mm) back from ne�v construction.
2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide
temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and
maintain in a mo It condition and temporarily support and protect roots from
damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with earth.
(C) Where utilities trenches are required within tree drip lines, tunnel under or around
the roots by drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand. Root pruning:
Do not cut main lateral roots or tap roots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of new woi k. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or
chop.
03.4 Regrading Around Trees
(A) Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around
trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by Arborist. Root Pruning:
Prune tree roots exposed during grade lowering. Do not cut main lateral roots or tap
roots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break
or chop.
02001-3
July, 2011
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
(B) Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches (150 mm) or less below elevation of
finish grade shown, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and
hand grade to required finish elevations.
(C) Moderate Fill: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches (150 mm) but less than
12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade elevation, place a layer of drainage fill, filter
fabric, and a final layer of topsoil on existing grade.
1. Carefully place drainage fill against tree trunk approximately 2 inches (50 mm)
above finish grade elevation and extend not less than 18 inches (450 mm) from
tree trunk on all sides. For balance of area within drip -line perimeter, place
drainage fill to an elevation 6 inches (150 mm) below grade.
2. Place filter fabric with overlapping edges of 6 inches (150 mm) minimum.
3. Place fill layer of topsoil to finish grade. Do not compact drainage fill or topsoil.
Hand grade to required finish elevations.
03.5 Tree Pruning
(A) Prune remaining trees affected by temporary and new construction.
(B) Prune remaining trees to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting
root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during the Contract period as
recommended by Arborist.
(C) Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to the National Arborist Association's
"Pruning Standards for Shade Trees".
1. Class II: Standard pruning.
2. Class III: Hazard pruning.
3. Class IV: Crown -reduction pruning.
(D) Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
(E) Chip branches removed from trees. Spread material where indicated or as directed
by Wawa Representative.
03.6 Tree Repair and Replacement
(A) Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations to prevent progressive
deterioration.
(B) Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that the Arborist determines to be
incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern.
1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced. Plant and
maintain as specified under Division 2 Section "Trees and Shrubs."
2. Provide new trees of 6 inch (150 mm) caliper size and of a species selected by
Site Engineer when trees over 6 inches (150 mm) in caliper, measured 12 inches
(300 mm) above grade, are required to be replaced.
02001-04 EARTHWORK
04.1 Summary: This Section includes the following:
(A) Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, pavements, and
landscaping.
02001-4
July, 2011
(B) Excavating and
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
filling for buildings and structures.
(C) Drainage and moisture -control fill course for slabs -on -grade.
(D) Subbase course for alks and pavements.
(E) Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
(F) Excavation and back filling trenches within building lines.
(G) Excavating and bac�Cfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and
appurtenances. Confirm conformance with "Site Sewer Specifications".
04.2 Definitions
(A) Excavation consists bf removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and
the reuse of disposal lof materials removed.
(B) Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
(C) Borrow: Soil material obtained off -site when sufficient approved soil material is not
available from excavations.
(D) Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and base course in a
paving system or the layer placed between the subgrade and surface of a pavement
or walk.
(E) Base Course: The I�yer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a
paving system.
(F) Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab -on -grade placed
to cut off upward capillary flow of pore water.
(G) Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions without direction by the Site Engineer. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Site Engineer, shall be at the
contractor's expense.
(H) Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below ground surface.
(1) Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as
underground services within building lines.
04.3 Test Reports
(A) Supplied by Owner: In addition to test reports required under field quality control,
submit the following:
1. To the Soils Engineer:
a. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill from on -
site borrow sources.
b. One optimum moisture- maximum density curve for each soil material.
� 02001-5
July, 2011
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
2. To the Structural Engineer: For footings and foundations submit report of actual
unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each stratum
tested.
(B) Blasting plan approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
04.4 Quality Assurance
(A) Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
(B) Testing and Inspection Service: General Contractor will employ a qualified
independent Geotechnical Engineering testing agency to classify proposed on -site
and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to
perform required field and laboratory testing for all contractors performing work at
the site.
(C) Preconstruction Meeting: To be coordinated by the Wawa Construction Project
Manager and to be held at Project site. Before commencing earthwork, meet with
representatives of the governing authorities, Wawa Representative, Architect,
consultants, Geotechnical Engineer, independent testing agency, and other
concerned entities. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including
testing and inspection procedures and requirements. Notify participants at least one
week (5 business days prior to convening conference. Architect responsible for a
final report, including all disciplines, and for recording discussions and agreements
and furnishing a copy to each participant.
04.5 Project Conditions
(A) Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by
Wawa or others except when permitted in writing by Wawa and then only after
acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. Provide a minimum 48-
hours notice to the Wawa Representative and receive written notice to proceed
before interrupting any utility.
(B) Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to
be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
04.6 Soil Materials
(A) General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off -site when sufficient
approved soil materials are not available from excavations.
(B) Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM,
SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
(C) Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML,
MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT.
(D) Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials.
(E) Subbase and Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or
crushed gravel and crushed stone, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a
1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (75
micrometer) sieve.
02001-6
July, 2011
(F) Engineered Fill: S
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
of base materials.
(G) Bedding Material: Sbbase of base materials with 100 percent passing a 1 inch (25
mm) sieve and not ore than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (75 micrometer) sieve.
(H) Drainage Fill: Wasted, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or
uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent
passing a 1 '/2" (38 mm) sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36
mm) sieve.
(1) Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed
stone and natural sa l d, with 100 percent passing a 1 '/z inch (38 mm) sieve and 0 to
5 percent passing a No. 50 (300 micrometer) sieve.
(J) Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense
state.
(K) Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven pervious geotextile fabric of
polypropylene, nylon or polyester fibers, or a combination. Verify with Site Engineer
and see Site Plans for exact specifications. Provide filter fabrics that meet or
exceed the listed minimum physical properties determined according to ASTM D
4759 and the referenced standard test method in parentheses:
1. Grab Tensile Str(
2. Apparent Openir
sieve.
3. Permeability (AS
m).
04.7 Preparation
ith (ASTM D 4632): 100 Ib (45 kg).
Size (ASTM D 4751): #100 US Standard (150 micrometer)
D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per sq. ft. (102 L/s per sq.
(A) Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
(B) Protect subgrades a d foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost.
Provide protective ins lating materials as necessary.
(C) Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and
discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
04.8 Dewatering
(A) Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations,
from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and
surrounding area.
(B) Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water
accumulation. I
04.9 Excavation
(A) Explosives: Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before
bringing explosives to the site or using explosives on the site. Do not damage
adjacent structures, property, or site improvements or weaken the bearing capacity
02001-7
July, 2011
I
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
of rock subgrade when using explosives.
(B) Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to
required subgrade elevations regardless of the character of materials and
obstructions encountered.
(C) Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified and includes excavation to required
subgrade elevations. Excavation will be classified as earth excavation or rock
excavation as follows:
1. Earth excavation includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions visible
on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be
demolished and removed; together with soil and other materials encountered that
are not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. Intermittent drilling,
blasting, or ripping to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation
of material encountered will be classified as earth excavation.
2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock material and obstructions
encountered that cannot be removed by the following heavy-duty excavating
equipment without systematic drilling, blasting, or ripping. Rock material includes
boulders '/2 cu. Yd. (0.38 cu. M.) or more in volume and rock in beds, ledges,
unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits.
3. Rock excavating equipment for footings, trenches, and pits shall be equivalent to
Caterpillar Model No. 215D LC track -mounted hydraulic excavator, equipped with
a 42 inch (1050 mm) wide short -tip radius rock bucket, rated at not less than 120
hp (89 kW) flywheel power with bucket -curling force of not less than 25,000 lb
(111 kN) and stick -crowd force of not less than 18,7000 lb (83 kN), measured
according to SAE Standard A 179.
4. Rock excavating equipment for open excavations shall be equivalent to
Caterpillar Model No. 973, heavy-duty, track -mounted leader, rated at not less
than 210 hp (157 kW) flywheel power and developing minimum of 45,000 lb (200
kN) breakout force, measured according to SAE Standard J732x-69.
Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in
either length or width are defined as open excavations.
5. Rock excavation will be paid by unit prices included in the Contract Documents.
6. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross -sectioned by Soils
Engineer.
04.10 Stability of Excavations: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations.
04.11 Excavation for Structures: Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a
tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches (30 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance
from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other
construction, and for inspections. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Excavate
to required depth and if needed tamp footing bottom and test for proper compaction.
04.12 Excavation for Utility Trenches
(A) Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations. Beyond
building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost
line.
(B) Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of
pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches
(300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. Clearance:
12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.
02001-8
July, 2011
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
(C) Trench Bottoms: Eiccavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing
and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support
for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
Remove stones and Oharp objects to avoid point loading.
1. For pipes or con
bottomed, multip
pipe and conduit
2. For pipes and cc
bottom of trend
depressions with
3. Where encounte
excavation 6 inct
04.13 Approval of Subgrade
(A) Notify onsite testing
iit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flat -
duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support
i an undisturbed subgrade.
luit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape
to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill
mped sand backfill.
ig rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench
(150 mm) below invert elevation to receive bedding course.
when excavations have reached required subgrade.
(B) When testing agent' determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present,
continue excavation �_nd replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
Under footings = 250psi concrete; under floor slabs = fill shall be organic granular
material, well grade with no pieces larger than 4 inches and not more than 30
percent passing a #200 sieve. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement
material will be paid 4ccording to the Contract provisions for changes in Work.
(C) Reconstruct subgrad�s damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated
water, or construction activities, as directed by the Wawa Representative.
04.14 Unauthorized Excavation
by extending bottom ele,
without altering required 1
to proper position when
unauthorized excavatior
Engineer/Testing Agent.
04.15 Storage of Soil Materials:
soil materials, including s
intermixing. Place, grade,
wind-blown dust. Stockpil
within drip line remaining ti
04.16 Backfill: Backfill excavatio
(A) Acceptance of
dampproofing, v
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings
ition of concrete foundations or footing to excavation bottom,
p elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations
acceptable to the Project Civil Engineer/Testing Agent. Fill
under other construction directed by the Project Civil
Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill
-eptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without
nd shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store
promptly, but not before completing the following:
i below finish grade including, where applicable,
, and perimeter insulation.
(B) Surveying locations of, underground utilities for record documents.
(C) Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities.
(D) Concrete formwork removal.
(E) Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
(F) Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
�- (G) Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported orted walls.
02001-9
July, 2011
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
�I
04.17 Utility Trench Backfill (See test requirements in "Sewer Site Specifications")
(A) Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces
and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous
support for bells, joints and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of
conduits.
(B) Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
(C) Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is
removed.
(D) New Stores: Backfill parking lot trenches with 3/ inch crushed stone and tamp.
Remodel Stores: Backfill all trenches, inside and outside, with % inch crushed stone
and tamp. Verify with Site Engineer.
(E) Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
04.18 Fill
(A) Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet and unsatisfactory soil
material, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing
fills. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal
so fill material will bond with existing surface.
(B) Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below:
1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory
excavated or borrow soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material.
4. Under building slabs, use drainage fill material.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
04.19 Moisture Control: Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or
backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
(A) Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
(B) Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet
to compact to specified density. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet
satisfactory soil material.
04.20 Compaction
(A) Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth.
(B) Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required
elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure.
(C) Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than
the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, buildings slabs, steps, and pavements, compact the top 12
inches (300 mm) below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 -
02001-10
July, 2011
percent maximu
2. Under walkway:
layer of backfill i
3. Under lawn or
subgrade and e
density.
04.21 Grading
(A) General: Uniforn
changes. Comply
and elevations ind
1. Provide a sn
2. Cut out soft
surface toles
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
i dry density.
compact the top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and each
fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
inpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches (150mm) below
ch layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry
grade areas to smooth surface, free from irregular surface
h compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines,
transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.
s, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required
(+/-0. V).
(B) Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent
ponding.
(C) Smooth roll construction traffic areas on a daily basis to prevent ponding.
04.22 Subbase and Base Cou
(A) Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared
subgrades. Place base course material over subbases to pavements.
1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required
grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM
D 4254 relative density.
2. Shape subbase an, d base to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades.
3. When thickness of compacted subbase of base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or
less, place materials in a single layer.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150
mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm)
thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.
(B) Pavement Shoulders:i Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to
prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide of
acceptable soil mater als and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base
layer.
04.23 Filed Quality Control
Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and
each fill or backfill layer. Testing agent will be on site at all times when earthwork is
being completed. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work
verify compliance with) requirements.
1. Perform field in -place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone
method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder
method), as applicable.
a. Field in -place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method
according to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically
checked and �djusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556.
=` With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished
02001-11
July, 2011
SECTION 02001
EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING
with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017.
b. When field in -place density tests are performed using nuclear methods,
make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of
work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as
directed by the Architect.
2. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, perform at least one test of each soil
stratum to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval
of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of each
subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the testing agency.
3. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and
backfill layer, perform at least one field in -place density test for every 2000 sq. ft.
(186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three
tests.
4. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one
field in -place density test for each 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no
fewer than two tests along a wall face.
5. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least
one field in -place density test for each 150 feet (45 m) or less of trench, but no
fewer than two tests.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density,
scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required,
recompact and retest until required density is obtained.
04.24 Protection
(A) Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and
erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
(B) Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to
subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. Scarify or remove and
replace material to depth directed by the Wawa Representative; reshape and
recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density.
(C) Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct
surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
04.25 Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste
material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off
Wawa's property.
END OF SECTION 02001
02001-12
July, 2011
02002-01 RELATED WORK
01.1 Refer to the latest set of
for the extent of Site V1
provisions, including tern
SECTION 02002
SITEWORK
Engineering Drawing(s) and related notes and specifications
Soil Erosion, Landscaping and Storm Water Management
ry controls.
01.2 Verify all Site Work requirements not specified herein with Wawa Project Manager.
01.3 "Drawings" in this section refers to Site Engineering Drawings furnished by Wawa.
01.4 Any patching of asphalt in the Parking Lot should be tacked at the seams.
01.5 All line, grade, and stake -out will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Work to be
performed by a Registered Professional Land Surveyor in the state where the work is
done, and be recommended by the Site Engineer.
01.6 Wawa will be responsible) for establishing property corners. Corners to be maintained by
Contractor during the course of construction.
02002-02 CONCRETE
02.1 Policy
(A) The following specification is to be used for all exterior concrete work; canopy and
tank mats, on -site curbing, and sidewalks, excluding footers and foundations. (Refer
to building plans and specifications for all footers and foundations.) A control joint
detail for sidewalks, oanopy and tank mat is to be provided by civil engineer on all
site plans.
(B) Civil Engineer is to review geotech report provided by Wawa and shall provide
direction for strengthening the sub -base should conditions warrant, CBR values
below 3.5. Refer to CI 330R-92, minimum acceptable M value is 600 PSI. Notify
Wawa Project Engineer should additional strengthening be required.
(C) The following specification is to be used for all concrete curbing inside and outside
the property line unless a more stringent specification is specifically required by a
municipality for curbing outside the property line.
(D)
1. All work is to be in conformance with ACI 330R-92, Guide for Design and
Construction of ioncrete Parking Lots and ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete
Construction.
2. Concrete sidewalk is to be a minimum 4" concrete with 4" 2A Modified stone
base, compacted with vibratory plate tamper. Building curbing and sidewalks
are to be separate structures.
3. Concrete curbing can be either machine formed or poured in place in
accordance with attached curbing detail. All curbing is to 8" x 18" with a
chamfered finished face.
4. Concrete tank mat is to be minimum 8" concrete with 6" stone base outside
perimeter of tank excavation. Stone base is to be tank backfill material.
5. Concrete canopy mat is to be 6" thick mat, with 6" 2B Modified stone base.
6. Control joints in curbing are to be spaced at a maximum of 15'. Control joints
are to be hand tooled or saw cut, minimum depth: 25% of finished thickness, 2"
for 8" thick mats, I '/2" for 6" thick mats. Joints are to be sealed with petroleum
resistant sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant Specification below.
02002-1
July, 2013
SECTION 02002
SITEWORK
7. Control joints in tank and canopy mats shall be provided at equal distances of
not more than 20' and isolation joints are to be provide at all inlet and
/structures. Isolation joints are to be full depth '/2", pre -molded asphalt
impregnated joint material. Joint material is to be'/4' below finished surface with
'/2' maximum hand -tooled radius.
8. Control joints in sidewalks are to be hand -tooled, minimum 1" depth, (slab
thickness/4), spaced every 8', 1/2" maximum radius on hand -tooled joint.
9. Construction joints are to be keywayed with a minimum '/2" x 1" trapezoidal
metal keyway, or a leave in place metal keyway, hand -tool joint to match control
joints, in accordance with ACI 330R-92, Section 2.7 and appendix C.3a. Leave
in place metal keyways are to be minimum of/" below finished surface. Seal
joints with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant
Specification below.
10. Isolation joints are to be used at: canopy columns, gas islands, inlet structures
and at the meeting of any other structures. Isolation joint is to be full depth, '/2"
pre -molded asphalt impregnated or rubber joint material with 1/" Sealtight Snap
Cap. Use '/2" x 6" "sill sealer', with '/z" tear away, to form isolation joint around
curved surfaces. Seal all isolation joints in flat work with petroleum resistant
sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant Specification below. Joint material is to
be '/4" below finished surface with a '/2" maximum hand -tooled radius to match
control joints.
11. Sealant Specification:
a. Sikaflex 1 CSL — in 10 or 32 oz. cartridges
b. Sikaflex 2CSL (Limestone base color) — two part, pourable sealant.
12. Material Specification:
a. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for
Portland cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595.
b. Concrete for tank and canopy mats shall have a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 4000 PSI. Concrete for curbing and sidewalks shall
have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3500 PSI. Concrete shall
be manufactured and delivered in accordance with the latest revised
Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94.
c. Minimum cement content is to be 560 lb. per cubic yard.
d. Concrete is to be Fibermesh MD reinforced. (a.k.a. Fibermesh Enforce E3)
Fibermesh MD is to be added at a rate of 1 '/2 Ibs/cu. yard. Contractor to
submit to Wawa Construction Manager a Concrete Supplier Certificate
stating approved Fibermesh material, at the minimum rate added to each
batch of concrete delivered to the project site. Each certificate shall be
accompanied by one copy of each batch delivery ticket indicating the trade
name, manufacturer's name and amount per cubic yard of reinforcement
material added to each batch of concrete.
e. Welded wire fabric may be substituted for use of Fibermesh only with prior
approval by Wawa's Construction manager. If approved, welded wire is to
be 6x6 W2.9xW2.9, ASTM A-185. Welded wire is to be positioned in the
slab below the finished surface at: h/4 +1", h = thickness of slab. (3" for 8"
slab 2 '/2' for 6" slap). Welded wire is not be cut when saw cutting control
joints. Welded wire is to be positioned on chairs or precast blocks and is to
be physically checked and adjusted for depth during concrete placement.
Overlap individual sections of welded wire 6" and securely fasten to prevent
separation during concrete placement.
f. Maximum allowable concrete slump shall be 4 inches.
g. Minimum aggregate size is 3/8" with 7.5% air entrainment.
h. Maximum aggregate size is 1" with 6% air entrainment. (Within 1%
02002-2
July, 2013
tolerance, %
13. Use of membra
After finishing ai
after free water
membrane-curin
coverage of 200
14. Finish is to be sl
slip surface finisl
15. Quality Assuran(
a. Testing Age
and inspecti
b. Defective C
the Wawa F
repaired an(
c. Sampling a
include the i
d. MSampling
comply with
e. Slump: ASl
day's pour
consistency
taken.
f. Air Content:
concrete; A:
each day's K
g. Compressio
for each
used for
C31.
h. ComDre:
exceeding 5
m) more thar
any one day
days, and on
!. When freque
given class o
batches or fr(
j. When streng,
laboratory-cu
corrective prc
k. Strength leve
of three coi
compressive
specified con
I. Test results v
mix Producei
of compressi
and number,
concrete type
compressive
for both 7-da)
m. Non -destruct!
destructive d(
for acceptanc
n. Additional Te
SECTION 02002
SITEWORK
y volume, conforming to ASTM C260).
e-curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required.
d texturing operations have been completed and immediately
has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated with
1 compound, applied with a pressure sprayer, maximum
>q. ft.
;el troweled and then light broomed, to provide a uniform, non -
icy: Wawa, Inc. shall engage a qualified independent testing
g agency. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
ncrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by
oject Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be
patched to Owner's approval.
d testing for quality control during concrete placement will
sh concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to
TM C94.
C143; minimum of one test at point of discharge for each
each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete
ems to have changed and whenever strength samples are
►ST C173, volumetric method for Lightweight or normal weight
M C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for
ur of each type of air -entrained concrete.
Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders
pressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Cylinders
!ptance shall be cured in accordance with section 9 of ASTM
Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day's pour
:u. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu.
the first 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in
one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28
specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
icy of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a
concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected
m each batch if fewer than five are used.
i of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
ed cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide
-edures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete.
of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets
secutive strength test results equal or exceed specified
strength and no individual strength test result falls below
pressive strength by more than 500 PSI (3.4 MPa).
ill be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Ready -
and General Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports
,e strength tests shall contain the Project identification name
late of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service,
and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design
strength at 28 days, compressive strength and type of break
and 28-day tests.
fe Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non -
vice may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis
or rejection.
sts: The testing agency will make additional tests of in -place
02002-3
July, 2013
SECTION 02002
SITEWORK
N,
concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other
characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by
Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of
concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods
as directed.
02002-03 TOPSOIL
03.1 Refer to Drawing requirements for any special soil depths or treatment for Landscaping.
03.2 Where indicated, place 4" of topsoil, providing any additional soil as required to bring
grades 1" above those shown to allow for settlement.
03.3 Clean up, hand rake, and remove any debris, gravel and stones greater than '/2", and
leave in good clean condition for fine grading and seeding.
03.4 Contractor to provide and fine grade all areas ready to be accepted for all landscaping
work by Wawa.
02002-04 ASPHALT
04.1 Policy
(A) The following specification is to be used for all on -site paving. This paving
specification is based on a paving study performed by R.J. Collins & Associates and
on a pavement evaluation prepared by Whitestone Associates. For paving outside
the property line, the paving specification required by the approving authority shall
be used unless that specification is of less depth than the specification below. In
that case, Wawa's on -site paving specification is to be utilized.
(B) A paving detail and specification is to be prepared by the civil engineer and included
on all site plans, based on the specifications below. Paving Specification/Notes,
Section D, are to be included verbatim in the paving details.
(C) Paving Specification, 04.2(A) is to be the default specification for all projects with a
CBR value of greater than 5.00. Civil engineer is to have a detailed discussion and
get approval from Wawa's Project Engineer for use of all other paving sections.
04.1 Paving Sections
(A) Clay and silty sub -grades capable of achieving a California Bearing Ratio (CBR)
value of 5 to 7: (SN number of 3.04):
1. 2.0" surface course
2. 4.0" base course
3. 6.0" sub -base course
(B) Sandy and gravel sub -grades capable of achieving a California Bearing Ratio (CBR)
value of 8 or greater: (SN number of 2.60). (use only with approval of Wawa's
Project Engineer):
1. 1.5" surface course
2. 2.5" base course
3. 6.0" sub -base course
02002-4
July, 2013
(C)
SECTION 02002
SITEWORK
Sub grades capable of achieving a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of less than 5 will
require a site specific sub -base and paving section. The civil engineer is to refer to
the geotech report �nd shall prepare a paving specification to attain a structural
number (SN) of 3. 0, based on the AASHTO Road Test Equation. SN of 3.30
should be achieved by strengthening the sub -grade, sub -base, base and surface
course. Design may include use of geogrid reinforcement and stabilized aggregate
base.
1. 1.5" to 2.0" surface course
2. 2.5" to 4.0" base course
3. 6.0 to _" dense graded aggregate or stabilized aggregate
04.3 AASHTO ROAD TEST EQUATION
A. SN = Al D1 + A2D2 � A3D3
1. SN = Structural Number
2. Al, A2 & A3 are the structural coefficient or equivalency value for each layer of
pavement.
Al = Asphalt wearing course: 0.44
A2 = Asphalt base course: 0.44
A3 = Dense graded aggregate: 0.14
A3 = Stabilized aggregate: 0.30
3. D1, D2 & D3 are the thickness of the respective course.
04.4 Materials Specification: Paving sections are to specify materials as shown on the
following table for the respective state:
Layer
Delaware
Maryland
New Jersey
Penn.
Virginia
Surface
DELDOT
MDOT —
NJDOT
PENNDOT
VDOT
Type C Surface
SC
1-4 Surface
ID-2
SM-2A
Surface
Surface
Course
Course
Base
DELDOT Type
MDOT —
NJDOT
PENNDOT
VDOT
B Base
BC
1-2
Base Course
SM-2A
Base course
Sub -base
DELDOT
MDOT —
NJDOT
PENNDOT
VDOT 21A
Type B Base
DGA
DGA
2a Modified
Crushed
Course
Stone
Aggregate
Aggregate
Base
04.5 Paving Specification/Notes The following paving specification is to be included
verbatim with all paving details:
(A) Asphalt paving for driveways and parking areas shall consist of hot -laid plant -mix
bituminous concrete paving material containing a blend of coarse aggregate, fine
aggregate, mineral filler and asphalt cement binder. Although gradation
requirements are provided for different types or courses of asphalt paving mixes, it
is intended that applicable provisions from the specifications of the Department of
Transportation (DOT) of the state where the project site is locate shall govern.
(B) At least two (2) week's prior to paving, the contractor shall submit to Wawa Inc. a
copy of the state DOT approved job mix formula for each paving mix proposed for
use on the project. Each job mix formula must indicate the sources and proportions
of the mix components; the resultant mix gradation range and the Marshall stability,
+ flow and air voids test results. Approval of each job mix formula must be obtained
' 02002-5
July, 2013
SECTION 02002
SITEWORK
from Wawa Inc. before ordering materials.
(C) Contractor to submit Ito Wawa Construction Manager, all delivery tickets for asphalt
material, indicating formula mix approved as described above in Section 3.D.
(D) For pavements containing a dense graded aggregate base or a stabilized aggregate
base, asphalt -paving) layers shall consist of a binder course and a wearing surface.
For full -depth asphalt pavements, the paving layers shall consist of an asphalt base
course, together with a binder course and wearing surface. The thickness and
locations of the respective courses of asphalt paving shall be in accordance with the
approved site plan for the project.
(E). Placement of asphalt paving shall commence after all grading and utility work has
been completed and approved. For full -depth asphalt paving, the asphalt base
course shall be placed on the prepared sub grade, provided the sub -grade is not
frozen, muddy, or o6rly wet. When full depth asphalt paving is not used, the
asphalt binder course shall be placed on a properly compacted base, consisting of
either dense graded aggregate or stabilized aggregate.
(F) All utility fittings (inlet grates, manhole covers, valve boxes) shall be in place and at
the correct elevatioq at the start of paving. During paving operations, adequate
protection must belprovided against all traffic by means of temporary barriers,
flashing lights, etc. until the completion and approval of the finished pavement.
Remove all barriers as soon as the paving work has been completed and approved.
All paving work sh II be performed in compliance with applicable State DOT
specifications.
(G) For full -depth aspha t pavements, the prepared sub -grade shall be treated with a
bituminous prime coat applied at a rate of 0.3 to 0.5 gallons per square yard prior to
placement of the base course. For asphalt pavements placed on a dense graded or
stabilized aggregate base course, the surface of the base course shall be treated
with a bituminous prime coat applied at a rate of 0.2 gallons per square yard. Prime
coat shall be either hot liquid asphalt or rapid setting emulsified asphalt. The prime
coat shall be uniformly applied by means of a pressure distributor with the
temperature range specified by applicable State DOT specifications.
(H) All layers of asphalt paving shall be placed by means of a self-propelled paving
machine. Paving material shall be placed at sufficient loose thickness to assure the
specified finished layer thickness after rolling. When the required finished thickness
of the base course or binder course exceeds 3 inches, the paving material for that
course must be placed and compacted in two separate and equal layers. Wawa
Inc. requires the collection of all delivery slips of paving material and also reserves
the right to take core specimens to verify the finished pavement thickness prior to
making final pavement.
(1) All asphalt paving materials shall be placed within a temperature range of 3000 to
3200 F, or not more than 150 F below the minimum temperature shown on the
material supplier's bill of lading. Do not place paving material during periods of
precipitation, on wed surfaces or when the air temperature is less than 400 F. All
paving material for 'each course of pavement shall be of uniform appearance and
surface texture throughout. Correct any irregularities in the surface of the paving
material, particularly the wearing surface, directly behind the paver and prior to
compaction. Avoid broadcasting of the paving material.
(J) Commence rolling ias soon as the paving material can be compacted without
displacement. Rolling must be done while the paving material is within 150 to 250 F
02002-6
July, 2013
SECTION 02002
SITEWORK
of the temperature o`F the material when delivered. Compact all paving material to a
minimum of 95 percgnt of maximum Marshall Density, as determined at the hot mix
plant. Final compaction shall be accomplished using either a minimum 10 ton steel
wheeled static roller or a steel, smooth drum vibratory roller with a minimum 10 ton
vibratory rating. Final rolling shall remove all indentations or irregularities in the
pavement surface.
(K) All paving work sha I be performed with utmost care and in accordance with all
industry accepted standards of good practice. The contractor shall avoid any
damage or staining to curbs, sidewalks, aprons, shrubbery or other work. All paving
edges must be sealed using rubberized asphalt hot poured sealing material, applied
by squeegee to a minimum 6-inch width.
(L) Where asphalt pavement is being placed after November 1, the binder course shall
be used as a surface until the following spring. At that time, any irregularities,
potholes or other sign, s of distress in the binder course shall be repaired or replaced.
The finished wearing surface shall then be applied at the direction of a Wawa
representative.
(M) Graduation Requirements: Asphalt paving mixtures for driveways and parking areas
shall comply with the following particle size distribution requirements as applicable:
Percent by Weiaht Passing
Sieve Size
Base Course
Binder Course
Wearing Surface
2"
100
1
-
-
1 '/2"
95 —100
100
-
1"
-
1
90 — 100
-
%11
60 — 100
75 — 95
-
'/2 "
-
1
50 — 80
100
3/8"
40 — 70
1
45 — 75
80 —100
#4
-
1
30 — 60
45 — 80
#8
15-40
1
15-45
30-60
#16
-
10 — 30
20 — 45
#30
8-24
8-24
10-35
#50
5-20
5-20
5-30
#100
4-10
4-10
4-14
#200
2-8
2-8
3-10
02002-05 TRAFFIC PAINTING
05.1 Provide for parking and drive areas as noted on Drawings.
05.2 Paint shall be Benjamin Moore. (See Section 09900-03.8.)
02002-06 FENCING
06.1 When required, shall be 6'-0" high cedar, stockade shadow box type. Unless otherwise
noted.
07.1 Provide base at a height of 6" above ground for Site Lighting and Pole Sign. Locate
minimum of T-0" away from edge of curbs and at a depth of 1'-0" in ground for every 5'-
0" above ground.
02002-7
July, 2013
02282-1 SUMMARY
01.1 Work required for subterranean
02282-2 SUBMITTALS
control treatment
02.1 Submit product technical data including Material Safety Data Sheets, copy of
termiticide label and detailed application instructions.
02.2 Submit certification that products
Agency (EPA) regulations
02.3 Submit sample of the form of g
02282-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 02282
SOIL TREATMENT
comply with U.S. Environmental Protection
03.1 Qualifications of Applicator: Materials shall be installed by bonded exterminator,
licensed in the State of Florida for lapplication of soil treatment solutions, and showing
evidence of 5 years of continuous business operation under the current name
03.2 Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for
preparation of substrates.
03.3 Application: Perform application incompliance with Florida Statutes, Chapter 482
and 100-55, and other state and federal laws.
02282-4 WARRANTY
04.1 Provide a written service agreement stating that soil treatment will prevent subterranean termites
from attacking the building and its contents for a period of not less than five (5) years, from date
of Substantial Completion. The soil treatment firm shall also inspect the structure(s) annually and
retreat as necessary. The service e greement shall cover any damage during the warranted period
and repairs to damaged surfaces u D to 25,000 dollars
04.2 The Owner shall be offered an
02282-5 MATERIALS
renewal contract of the services for the same terms.
05.1 Soil Treatment: The termiticide solution shall be currently registered by the EPA.
Provide one of the following:
1. ProBuild TC
2. Premise
3. Dragnet
05.2 Label chemical container, indicating types and percentages of toxicants (chemicals) used, and
precautions to be observed in their use, Deliver chemicals to site in sealed containers as supplied
by manufacturer. Deliver additional copies of MSDS with the chemical containers.
05.3 Add a dye solution for visual measurement of the solution.
02282-1
December 8, 2011
SECTION 02282
SOIL TREATMENT
02282-06 APPLICATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
06.1 Treatment shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications as currently applies to treatment of
commercial buildings under construction/renovation.
06.2 Solution mix and application method shall be in accordance with the termiticide Specimen Label
as required for subterranean termites. Solution shall be mixed on site.
02282-07 TIME OF APPLICATION
07.1 Begin soil poisoning after all foundation and slab preparations have been made and prior to the
placement of any vapor barriers (or any other barriers).
07.2 Do not apply treatment when surface water is present or if inclement weather is expected which
would disturb final placement
02282-08 APPLICATION RATES
08.1 Comply with manufacturer's concentration and application rates.
08.2 Treatment shall be performed in a manner that will not introduce termiticide into any existing or
new drainage system.
02282-09 SIGNS
09.1 Post signs in areas of application indicating that soil termiticide treatment has been applied.
Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction.
02282-10 RE -TREATMENT
10.1 Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading,
or other activities following application.
END SECTION 02282
02282-2
December 8, 2011
02530-01 POLICY
01.1 The following speci
which minimize the
of maintenance.
01.2 These specifications ar
responsibility of the Civil
all municipal requireme
deviation from these spi
submittal.
01.3 All sanitary designs are
as the specifications in t
02.1 Exterior sanitary waste
02.2 Exterior sanitary waste
specifically required by i
provided.
02.3 Exterior sanitary waste ai
pipe slope of 1/8" per fo
Project Engineer prior to
from the above shall be a
packaged sewage pump
02.4 Under no circumstance sl
foot.
02.5 Changes in direction of i
standard cleanout configu
slope shall be made using
SECTION 02530
SANITARY SEWERAGE
are to insure that Wawa receives uniform sanitary designs,
for possible backups and line failures and provide for ease
to be used as minimum design requirements and it this
ngineer preparing the plans to ensure that the plans address
s and regulations. Should any local regulations require
fications, the Wawa Project Engineer is to approve prior to
be in compliance with Wawa Specifications Manual as well
document.
grease waste piping shall be 4".
id grease waste piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Where
approving authority, standard or extra heavy cast iron shall be
grease waste piping shall be designed at'/" per foot slope. A
shall be an exception and require approval from the Wawa
e development of the Site Drawings. Pipe slopes that differ
ided. Where the slopes listed above cannot be met, provide a
I sanitary piping be designed with a slope greater than %" per
piping using %" per foot slope shall be made using a
Changes in direction of waste piping using 1/8" per foot
02.6 Provide a "two-way" cleanout on the sanitary and grease waste piping within five feet of
leaving the building. Cleariout cover plates shall be independently supported off of the
piping system to allow for grade movement.
02.7 Exterior Grease Interceptor, shall be a two (2) compartment concrete basin, with a liquid
holding capacity of 1250 gallons. The grease interceptor shall be installed in the rear of
the building to minimize parking lot obstructions during cleaning. Construction of the
interceptor and manholes shall be rated for highway traffic loads. Cleanouts shall be
provided on both the inlet and discharge piping. For alternate location, in particular
Remodel projects, verify with Wawa Project Engineer.
03.1 Where building sewage piping inverts, as listed above cannot be met, provide a
packaged sewage pump system.
03.2 Provide a complete packagied sewage pump station including but not limited to: duplex
grinder pumps, fiberglass sump basin, control devices, control wiring and alarms. The
Contractor shall provide complete installation, including the hiring of an Electrical Sub -
September 9, 2015
SECTION 02530
SANITARY SEWERAGE
contractor.
03.3 Sewage pump station and equipment shall be Environmental/One model number
"GP2014" with model "MOD 206" duplex control panel. Manufacturer and equipment
substitutions shall not be accepted.
03.4 Preferred location of the pump station shall be in a grassy, non -traffic area. When located
in traffic areas the sump basin and covers shall be rated for highway loading.
03.5 The pump station control panel shall be located on the exterior wall of the store, rear or
side walls only. Where the distance from the pump station to the building exceeds 75',
the control panel shall be located at the pump. The control panel shall include the
following options:
(A) High water alarm
(B) Alarm light
(C) Alarm bell with silencer
(D) Auxiliary contact for audible alarm in Manager's Office.
03.6 Sewage pump station model numbers and control panel options shall be listed on the
Site Engineers Drawings. Upon completion of system installation, the contractor shall
provide to the Wawa Project Manager three (3) complete operation manuals.
03.7 Pump manufacturers representative and installer shall provide a complete 2 year
warranty to include all parts and labor. Service calls shall be answered within 4 hours, 24
hours a day, 7 days a week. At the end of the two (2) year warranty period, a yearly
maintenance agreement shall be offered. This shall not be added to the Site Drawings.
02530-04 REQUIRED NOTES ON PLANS/DETAILS
04.1 Wawa, Inc. shall employ an independent soils inspector for 100% continuous inspection
of the bedding and backfill operation. Compaction tests shall be taken at the bottom of
trench and at each lift of backfill.
04.2 General Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to record as -built top of pipe
elevations taken when bedding operation is 75% complete. These elevations shall be
taken at points of connection, changes in direction and at minimum 20' intervals along the
length of the pipe. These elevations shall be recorded as as -built dimensions on a site
plan for review by the Project Civil Engineer.
04.3 All sanitary lines are to be flushed prior to Contractor turn -over of the facility. Written
verification shall be supplied in closing documents
END SECTION 02530
September 9, 2015
02531-01 SCOPE
01.1 The work under this sect
necessary for and incide
to the plumbing and dra
the Drawings and these,,
(A) It is the intent of the:
the Site Engineers.
set forth by the local
with no exception.
(B) Refer to Plumbing
SECTION 02531
PLUMBING SITEWORK
shall include all labor, materials, appliances, and services
to the proper completion of site utility services as related
to systems. Including work shown, implied or required by
specifications to supplement the specifications produced by
iese specifications do not include special requirements as
ithorities. Requirements of the local authorities shall be met
cation Section 15001 for additional requirements.
(C) Work includes, but is not limited to, all sanitary and grease waste services,
domestic water services, storm water services, fire protection water services, and
testing and adjusting of all systems.
(D) Work not specifically covered or having minor details 'obviously omitted, but
necessary to complete any part of the plumbing services installation, shall be
provided by the Contractor without additional cost to Wawa.
(E) As -Built Drawings: The Plumbing Contractor shall keep one set of the latest issue
of Site Drawings which reflects the actual installed conditions and connections of
all equipment, devices and any changes. These Drawings shall be included in the
closing documents.
02.1 All Work under this section' shall be provided in strict accordance with local municipality,
state, and federal, codes and requirements. Where differences may exist, the code
shall govern. Additional requirements shall be met at no extra cost to Wawa.
02.2 Contractor shall obtain all
required by the municipa
the local authority, as re
codes.
02531-03 WATER DISTRIBUTION
:essary permits and approvals and pay all related fees as
Contractor shall obtain a "Certificate of Inspection" from
ad, indicating satisfactory compliance with all governing
03.1 Regulatory Requirements Comply with the requirements of the utility company
supplying water, including tapping of water mains, backflow preventors, piping
materials, and testing and disinfection.
03.2 Verify disconnection and removal of existing services _with the water utility. Where
required, provide a temporary service at the beginning, of the projecf.
03.3 Water service piping shall be one of the following materials:
(A) PE (polyethylene)
(B) Type "K" copper to
(C) Ductile -Iron Pipe N
g, with insert fittings.
ught copper fittings. Solder shall be lead free.
joints and fittings and rubber gaskets.
September 9, 2015
SECTION 02531
PLUMBING SITEWORK
03.4 Curb boxes, shut-off valves, tapping assemblies, and water meters shall be provided in }
strict accordance with water utility requirements. -
03.5 Provide a complete packaged sewage pump station including but not limited to: duplex
grinder pumps, fiberglass sump basin, control devices, control wiring and alarms.
Sewage pump station and equipment shall be Environmental/One model number
"GP2014" with model "MOD 206" duplex control panel. Manufacturer and equipment
substitutions shall not be accepted.
03.6 The pump station control panel shall be located on the exterior wall of the store, rear or
side walls only. Where the distance from the pump station to the building exceeds 75',
the control panel shall be located at the pump. The control panel shall include the
following options:
(A) High water alarm
(B) Alarm light
(C) Alarm bell with silencer
(D) Auxiliary contact for future connection to the Johnson Controls "ACT-2" panel
03.7 Installation of packaged system shall be in strict accordance with written manufacturers
requirements.
03.8 Adjust pump and accessory settings, controls and safety and alarm devices.
Commissioning of system shall be provided by a manufacturers certified installer.
03.9 Clean dirt and debris from wet pits, pumps, and piping.
03.10 Train Wawa employee on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.
03.11 Review data in the operations and maintenance manual.
03.12 Schedule training with Wawa employee with at least seven (7) days notice
02531-04 SANITARY SEWERAGE AND GREASE WASTE
04.1 Sanitary sewer and grease waste piping shall be one of the following materials:
(A) PVC sewer pipe and fittings for gasketed joints.
(B) Hub -and -Spigot, cast iron soil pipe and fittings for gasketed joints.
Where specifically required by the approving authority, standard or extra heavy cast
iron shall be provided.
04.2 Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with
unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets,
seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturers' written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag line,
and pull past each joint as it is completed.
04.3 Changes in direction of waste piping using '/" per foot slope shall be made using a
standard cleanout configuration. Changes in direction of waste piping using 1/8" per
September 9, 2015
SECTION 02531
PLUMBING SITEWORK
foot slope shall be made using manholes.
04.4 Provide a "two-way" clea out on the sanitary and grease waste piping within five (5)
feet of leaving the building. Cleanout cover plates shall be independently supported off
of the piping system to allow for grade movement.
04.5 Exterior sanitary waste add grease waste piping shall be designed at'/4" per foot slope.
A pipe slope of 1/8" per foot shall be an exception and require approval from the Wawa
Project Engineer prior to the development of the Site Drawings.
04.6 Under no circumstance sl
slope greater than %" per
1-05 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBI
05.1 Comply with requirement,,
main.
05.2 Comply with NFPA-54, "N
installations, testing and p
sanitary waste or grease waste piping be designed with a
of utility supplying natural gas and coordinate connection to
Fuel Gas Code" for gas piping materials, components,
05.3 Gas piping shall be schedule 40 black steel, with malleable iron screwed fittings.
05.4 Meters and devices shall be provided in accordance with utility requirements.
05.5 Install buried gas piping a inimum of 36" below finished grade.
05.6 Paint exposed pipe, fitting, valves, threads, and supports with a rust -proof paint.
02531-06 STORM DRAINAGE
06.1 Storm drainage piping shall be one of the following materials:
(A) PVC sewer pipe and fittings for gasketed joints.
(B) Hub -and -Spigot, cast iron soil pipe and fittings for gasketed joints.
06.2 Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with
unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets,
seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturers written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag line,
and pull past each joint as it is completed.
02531-07 PACKAGED SEWAGE PUMP STATIONS (moved to 02530-03)
END SECTION 02531
September 9, 2015
SECTION 02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-01 PROCEDURE
01.1 All land development and landscape plans for new sites are to include Rain Bird
automatic irrigation syste . Irrigation designer will prepare Irrigation Design Drawings
that are to be included wit i land development construction plan sets.
01.2 Civil Engineer is forward I via e-mail, copy of landscape plan to the irrigation designer,
which will be used as base plan for preparation of irrigation plan. Forward landscape
plan to:
Michael Haener
88 Main Avenue
Ocean Grove, NJ 07756
Phone: 732-988-8349
Email: Irrig8r@msn.com
Lead-time for receiving copleted irrigation plans is three weeks.
The irrigation designer wi I e-mail irrigation plans back to Civil Engineer. It is the Civil
Engineers responsibility tc confirm that the designer has received copy of the landscape
plan that they can work with and to track receipt of finished irrigation plan.
02810-02 SPECIFICATIONS
02.1 All irrigation supply, lateral water lines and sprinkler heads are to located a minimum of 3'
behind curb line on entran8e and exit radius.
02.2 Minimum burial depth for all supply and laterals is 18".
02.3 All landscape area adjac
irrigated by drip systems.
02.4 Lawn areas outside of
to irrigate at off-peak hi
to buildings and parking areas around buildings are to be
meter sidewalks are to be design and controller programmed
02.5 Sprinkler heads are to be the following:
(A) Rain Bird 5000 series
(B) Rain Bird 1804
(C) Rain Bird 1812
02.6 Drip systems are to be
02.7 Irrigation controller is to
mechanical room of build
02.8 No substitutions or deviation
Dripline, 18"x 18" spacing w/.9GPH emitters.
Rain Bird, ESP-16LX, Automatic Controller, located in
Irrigation Plan will be allow.
02.9 Irrigation systems are to be warranted by installing Contractor for a period of one year
from the date of Certificate of Occupancy. Irrigation Contractor is to provide all
maintenance, adjustment, programming and winterization during the first year warranty.
END SECTION 02810
September 9, 2015
02900-01 PROCEDURE
01.1 The objective of de,
balanced landscape
should be placed on
well as the neighbor
hardiness of plants sE
goals, the landscape
and regulations.
01.2 The plan should make us
and ground covers chos,
should also concur with
chosen taking into consid
walkways and parking a
practical and permissible,
reduce the maintenance r
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING
ling the landscaping plan is to produce an attractive, well -
In, which is both aesthetic and functional. The primary focus
ucing a design which compliments the building and its use, as
, with strong emphasis placed on site visibility, maintenance,
A, and future growth of the landscaping. Notwithstanding these
gn should also address all municipal landscape requirements
of riverbed stone, mulch areas, and a variety of shrubs, trees,
i from the list of Acceptable Plant Material. Plant selection
y municipal planting requirements. Plants should be carefully
ation local climate, sun conditions, soil conditions, proximity to
as. Turf shall be proposed over septic field areas. When
rass areas on the site should be kept to a minimum in order to
auired for the site.
01.3 Visibility of the building, Wgnage, and entrance driveways is of critical importance in
landscape design. As a �esult, plant selection in these areas should be limited to low
growing shrubs (1' - 3' mature height) and groundcovers. When local ordinances require
the planting of taller shrubs or trees along street frontages, they should be selected and
placed to reduce negative impacts on site visibility.
01.4 The landscape plan should be designed under the supervision of a Landscape Architect
licensed, or certified, to practice in the state where the property is located.
02900-02 SPECIFICATIONS
(The following fourteen items are t l be included verbatim on notes on all Landscape Plans)
02.1 All topsoil shall be a minimum 4" and shall be approved by Wawa Construction
Representative prior to insi,allation.
02.2 All landscape and grass areas are to be hand raked and left clear of all: stones, rock,
construction debris and any unsuitable materials.
02.3 New Stores Only: All landscape and grass areas are to be irrigated by automatic
sprinkler system. (See Irrigation Specification.)
02.4 Landscape Contractor will locate all underground utilities prior to any excavation and
planting installation.
02.5 All areas to be landscaped) or covered with stone must be treated with a pre -emergence
herbicide (surflan, dactal or approved equal) in accordance with applicable federal, state
regulations and the manufacturer's instructions.
02.6 Landscape Contractor to slupply and install a pervious weed barrier (Dewitt, DuPont or
approved equal) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions within all landscapes,
including stone and mulch) beds. All weed barrier will be overlapped a minimum of 6
inches at all seams. At plant locations, barrier should be cut in an "X" pattern so to
accommodate root ball and replaced after plant has been installed.
02.7 Weed barrier shall not be (visible in areas designated for stone mulch. When stone is
called for adjacent to curb or sidewalks, it shall be feathered down to curb level from a
distance 24" from the curb.
3-7
July, 2012
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING
i
02.8 All proposed landscaping to be nursery grown, typical of their species or variety. They are
to have normal vigorous root systems, free from defects and infections and in accordance
with ANSI Z60.1.
02.9 All proposed plantings shall be installed per "standards of the American Association of
Nurserymen" with regard to planting, pit size, backfill mixture, staking and guying.
02.10 All planting containers and baskets shall be removed during planting. All plants shall be
set plumb and positioned so that the top of the root collar matches, or is no more than
two (2") inches above, finished grade. Replace amended backfill in 6 inch layers and
compact backfill to eliminate voids. Contractor shall provide a four inch high earthen
watering saucer along the perimeter of each planting pit. Contractor shall water newly
planted vegetation prior to mulching planting pit. All voids shall be filled and settling
mitigated as required. Aluminum edging shall be installed around all planting areas to
delineate between different landscape materials. Aluminum edging shall be flush with
freshly mowed lawn and mulch.
02.11 After initial watering and prior to mulching, Contractor shall apply herbicides and pre -
emergent herbicides as required to eliminate any weed seeds or plants present on root
ball.
02.12 All planting beds and pits shall be mulched with double ground hardwood mulch at a
minimum depth of 3".
02.13 Seedbed Preparation:
(A) Apply limestone and fertilizer according to soil tests or fertilizer may be applied at
the rate of 500 pounds per acre or 11 pounds per 1000 square feet using 10-20-10
or equivalent. In addition, 300 pounds 38-0-0 per acre or equivalent of slow
release nitrogen may be used in lieu of topdressing.
(B) Work lime and fertilizer into the soil as practical to a depth of 4 inches with a disc,
springtooth harrow or other suitable equipment. The final harrowing or discing
operation should parallel to the general contour. Continue tillage until a
reasonable uniform, fine seedbed is prepared. All but clay or silty soils and coarse
sands should be rolled to firm the seedbed wherever feasible.
(C) Inspect seedbed just before seeding. If traffic has left the soil compacted, the area
must be retilled and firmed as outlined below.
(D) Grass seeding mixture and application rate:
Percentage of Application Rate Minimum Germination
total weight Seed Type Allowed
60% 5-7 Ibs/1000 s.f."REBEL" Tall Fescue 90 - 97
35% "YORKTOWN" Perennial Rye 90 - 98
5% "STREEKER" Redtop 90 - 92
(E) In areas designated as sod, fescue sod is to be installed on minimum 4" topsoil.
Areas to be sodded are to be prepared as noted above for seeded areas.
02.14 Plant material shall be guaranteed for one year from the date of substantial
3-8
July, 2012
completeness. Plants, d
and/or foliage shall be re
at the end of the guarai
understood that Wawa P
material and lawn area
substantial completenes,,
END SECTION 02900
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING
, unhealthy, dying or damaged through loss of branches
:ed by the Contractor. Lawns that are not in good condition
period shall be repaired until a good lawn results. It is
agement shall assume responsibility for watering all plant
rond the guarantee period commencing with the date of
3-9
July, 2012
03301-01 GENERAL
01.1
01.2
SECTION 03301
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING
Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following for each concrete mix
according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:
(A) Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtu les, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing
compounds, dry -shake finish materials, and others if requested by Wawa
Representative.
(B) Shop Drawings detailing fabrication, bending, and placement. Submit one (1)
electronic set of the Shop Drawings for review. Allow 10 business days for review of
submittals for the first submission, 7 business days for review of the second
submission, and 5 business days for any submission thereafter.
(C) Material certificates signed by product manufacturers certifying that product complies
with requirements.
(D) Samples of materials' as requested by Wawa Project Manager, including names,
sources, descriptions for Color Finishes.
(E) Laboratory test report's for concrete materials and mix design test. Concrete mixes
shall be proportioned per Section 3.9 of ACI-301. Certified historical test data shall
serve as a basis for each mix design. Deviations shall be substantiated with
additional certified tria� mix testing and results. Submit mix design, historical test data
or trial mix results for approval prior to proceeding with work.
Quality Assurance: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," and
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
(A) Installer Qualifications f An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
(B) Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed
concrete products corI plying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities
and equipment. T
(C) Concrete shall be reirjforced, detailed and constructed in accordance with the ACI
301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings" and ACI 318 `Building Code
Requirements for Structural Concrete (latest editions), and the Manual of Standard
Practice. Placing of concrete shall not start until the placement of reinforcing has
been approved by the independent testing agency.
03301-02 PRODUCTS
02.1 Steel Reinforcement:
(A) Reinforcing Bars:
(B) Plain -Steel Welded
02.2 Concrete Materials: As
A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
Fabric: ASTM A185, flat sheets.
(A) Portland Cement: AST C150, Type I.
03301-1
September 9, 2015
SECTION 03301
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING
(B) Aggregate: ASTM C33, uniformly graded, from a single source.
(C) Water: ASTM C94.
(D) All admixtures shall contain less than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
(E) Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260 for exterior exposed concrete and foundations
exposed to freeze -thaw.
(F) Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A for placement and workability
(G) High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: Super Plasticizer: ASTM C494, Type F or
G for placement and workability.
(H) Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type for placement and
workability.
(1) Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D for placement and
workability
02.3 Related Materials: As follows:
(A) Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 0.7620
(B) Non -slip Aggregate Finish: Fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery.
(C) Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class A.
(D) Water -Based Acrylic membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B.
(E) Evaporation Control Compound: Monomolecular film -forming compound.
(F) Underlayment Compound: Free -flowing, self -leveling cement -based compound.
(G) Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752,
cork or self -expanding cork.
(1) Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059, Type 11, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
(J) Epoxy -Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two -component epoxy resin, of type, class,
and grade to suit requirements.
02.4 Curing Materials: As follows:
(A) Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
(B) Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9oz./sq. yd. dry.
(C) Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -
polyethylene sheet.
02.5 Concrete Mixes: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and
ACI 301, with the following properties:
03301-2
September 9, 2015
SECTION 03301
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING
(A) Compressive Strengt 1 (28 Days) as follows:
Footings 4,000 psi
Piers & Walls 4,000 psi
Slabs 4,000 psi
(B) Air Entrainment: 6%± ( '/2% in all exposed concrete.
02.6 Ready -Mixed Concrete: I Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.
03301-03 EXECUTION
03.1 Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be
applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.
03.2 Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use Setting Drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
03.3 Leave formwork, for beani, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of
concrete in place until concrete has achieved 28-day design compressive strength.
03.4 Comply with ACI318, �Cl301, and recommendations in ACI347R for design,
installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
03.5 Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor -retarder sheets according to ASTM
E1643.
03.6 Steel Reinforcement: Coply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating,
placing, and supporting reinforcement. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair
damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
03.7 Joints: Locate and install I construction, isolation, and contraction joints as noted on the
plans, maximum spacing in each direction 10 feet, maximum length to width dimension
2-1.
03.8 Concrete Placement: Depbsit concrete continuously and avoid segregation.
(A) Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.
(B) Screed and initial -float concrete floors and slabs using bull floats or darbies to form
a uniform and open -textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess
moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces
before starting finishing operations.
(C) Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 306 when cold -weather
conditions exist.
(D) Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R when hot -weather
conditions exist.
03.9 Finish formed surfaces as follows:
03301-3
September 9, 2015
SECTION 03301
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING
(A) Apply rough -formed finish, defined in ACI 301, to concrete surfaces indicated or not
exposed to public view.
(B) Apply smooth -formed finish, defined in ACI 301, to concrete surfaces indicated and
exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied
directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting.
03.10 Finishing Floors and Slabs: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 R for screeding,
restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces.
(A) Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish, defined in ACI 301, to surfaces indicated and to
surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry
tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.
(B) Float Finish: Apply float finish, defined in ACI 301, to surfaces indicated, to surfaces
to receive trowel finish, and to surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet
waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo.
(C) Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with
resilient flooring, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or
another thin film -finish coating system. After applying float finish, apply first trowel
finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling
passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture
and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.
(D) Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second
troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be
installed by either thickset or thin -set method. Immediately after second troweling,
and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
(E) Broom Finish: Apply a non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete, brooming with fiber -
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route, to platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
03.11 Floor Flatness and Levelness Tolerances
(A) Subfloors Under Materials Such as Concrete Toppings, Ceramic Tile and Sand Bed
Terrazzo: ACI 302.1 R and ASTM E 1155, overall floor flatness (Ff) of 18, floor
levelness (FI) of 15, with minimum local values of floor flatness (Ff) of 13, and floor
levelness (FI) of 10.
(B) Subfloors Under Materials Such as Vinyl Tile, Epoxy Toppings, and Paint: ACI
302.1 R and ASTM E 1155, overall floor flatness (Ff) of 30, floor levelness (FI) of 20,
with minimum local values of floor flatness (Ff) of 24, and floor levelness (FI) of 15.
(C) Tolerance test shall be performed prior to terrazzo pour. PM shall verify levelness
within 1%; flat within +- 1/4" as measured in 10'-0".
03.12 Concrete Protection and Curing: Protect concrete from excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and with
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing.
(A) Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause excessive moisture loss.
(B) Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from
concrete surface.
03301-4
September 9, 2015
(C) Cure formed and
moisture-retaininc
SECTION 03301
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING
ied concrete for at least seven days by moisture curing or
curing. No cure compound for any slab receiving terrazzo.
03301-04 QUALITY CONTROL
04.1 Testing Agency: Wawa, }nc. shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete
placement. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
04.1 Defective Concrete: Re air and patch defective areas when approved by the Wawa
Project Manager. Rer e and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to
Owner's approval.
04.3 Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement will include the
following:
(A) Sampling fresh concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C94.
(B) Slump: ASTM C143;I minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day's pour
of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have
changed and whenever strength samples are taken.
(D) Air Content: AST 0173, volumetric method for Lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each
day's pour of each tybe of air -entrained concrete.
(E) Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive -strength test, unless otherwise directed. Cylinders used for
acceptance shall be cured in accordance with section 9 of ASTM C31.
(F) Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5
cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plugs additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the
first 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one
specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen
retained in reserve fo later testing if required.
(G) Requires certification of proper curing of concrete in footings, piers, etc. For steel
columns as per OSHA Steel Erection Standards.
04.4 When frequency of testin�. will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of
concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch
if fewer than five are used.
04.5 When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory -
cured cylinders, evaluate) current operations and provide corrective procedures for
protecting and curing the in -place concrete.
04.6 Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no
individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than
500 psi (3.4 MPa).
04.7 Test results will be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Architect,
Structural Engineer, Ready -mix Producer, and General Contractor within 24 hours
after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification
name and number, date iof concrete placement, name of concrete testing service,
"Fl concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive
03301-5
September 9, 2015
SECTION 03301
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING
strength at 28 days, compressive strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day
tests.
04.8 Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive device
may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection
04.9 Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in -place concrete when
test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been
attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to
determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by
other methods as directed.
END SECTION 03301
03301-6
September 9, 2015
03302-01 GENERAL
01.1 Policy:
(A) The following specii
tank mats, on -site
(Refer to building ply
joint detail for sidew
all site plans.
SECTION 03302
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE — SITE
Lion is to be used for all exterior concrete work; canopy and
rbing, and sidewalks, excluding footers and foundations.
and specifications for all footers and foundations.) A control
>, canopy and tank mat is to be provided by Civil Engineer on
(B) Testing Agency is to review geotech report provided by Wawa and shall provide
direction for strengthening the sub -base should conditions warrant, CBR values
below 3.5. Refer to ACI 330R-92, minimum acceptable M value is 600 PSI. Notify
Wawa Project Engineer should additional strengthening be required.
(C) The following specification is to be used for all concrete curbing inside and outside
the property line unless a more stringent specification is specifically required by a
municipality for curbing outside the property line.
01.2 All work is to be in conform) ance with ACI 330R-92, Guide for Design and Construction of
Concrete Parking Lots and ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete Construction.
01.3 Concrete pads are to be u ed at Refrigerated Delivery, Trash Compound, Air Machine,
Tank Field, Perimeter Parling, and Clean Out Tops (see Wawa Site Specifications,
Section 20, MiscellaneouslDetails).
01.4 Concrete sidewalk is to beta minimum 4" concrete, compacted with vibratory plate
tamper. Building curbing and sidewalks are to be separate structures.
01.5 Concrete curbing can be either machine formed or poured in place in accordance with
attached curbing detail. Al curbing is to 8" x 18" with a chamfered finished face.
01.6 Concrete tank mat is to be minimum 8" concrete with 6" stone base outside perimeter of
tank excavation. Stone base is to be tank backfill material.
01.7 Concrete canopy mat is to be 6" thick mat, with 6" 2B Modified stone base.
01.8 Control joints in curbing are to be spaced at a maximum of 15'. Control joints are to be
hand tooled or saw cut, mi I imum depth: 25% of finished thickness, 2" for 8" thick mats, 1
%" for 6" thick mats. Joints are to be sealed with petroleum resistant sealant after curing
- Refer to Sealant Specification below.
01.9 Control joints in tank and canopy mats shall be provided a equal distances of not more
than 20' and isolation joints are to be provide at all inlet and /structures. Isolation joints
are to be full depth'/z', pre -molded asphalt impregnated joint material. Joint material is to
be %" below finished surface with'/Z' maximum hand -tooled radius.
01.10 Control joints in sidewalks are to be hand -tooled, minimum 1" depth, (slab thickness/4),
spaced every 8', %" maximum radius on hand -tooled joint.
01.11 Construction joints are to be keywayed with a minimum'/z" x 1" trapezoidal metal keyway,
or a leave in place metal keyway, hand -tool joint to match control joints, in accordance
with ACI 330R-92, Section 2.7 and appendix C.3a. Leave in place metal keyways are to
be minimum of %2' below finished surface. Seal joints with petroleum resistant sealant
after curing - Refer to Sealnt Specification below.
03302-1
August 2, 2011
SECTION 03302
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE — SITE
01.12 Use concrete up to asphalt transition detail (see Wawa Site Specifications, Section 20,
Miscellaneous Details) at all concrete to asphalt joints with the exception of the tank mat.
01.13 Isolation joints are to be used at: canopy columns, gas islands, inlet structures and at the
meeting of any other structures. Isolation joint is to be full depth,'/2" pre -molded asphalt
impregnated or rubber joint material with'/2" Sealtight Snap Cap. Use'/2" x 6" "sill
sealer", with'/2" tear away, to form isolation joint around curved surfaces. Seal all
isolation joints in flat work with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant
Specification below. Joint material is to be'/4" below finished surface with a'/z" maximum
hand -tooled radius to match control joints.
01.14 Sealant Specification:
A. Sikaflex 1 CSL — in 10 or 32 oz. cartridges
B. Sikaflex 2CSL (Limestone base color) — two part, pourable sealant.
01.15 Material Specification:
A. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland
cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595.
B. Concrete for tank and canopy mats shall have a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 4000 PSI. Concrete for curbing and sidewalks shall have a minimum 28-
day compressive strength of 4000 PSI. Concrete shall be manufactured and
delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard Specification for Ready
Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94.
C. Minimum cement content is to be 560 lb. per cubic yard.
D. Concrete is to be Fibermesh MD reinforced. (a.k.a. Fibermesh Enforce E3)
Fibermesh MD is to be added at a rate of 1 '/2 Ibs/cu. yard. Contractor to submit to
Wawa Construction Manager a Concrete Supplier Certificate stating approved
Fibermesh material, at the minimum rate added to each batch of concrete delivered
to the project site. Each certificate shall be accompanied by one copy of each batch
delivery ticket indicating the trade name, manufacturer's name and amount per cubic
yard of reinforcement material added to each batch of concrete.
E. Welded wire fabric may be substituted for use of Fibermesh only with prior approval
by Wawa's Construction Manager. If approved, welded wire is to be 6x6 W2.9xW2.9,
ASTM A-185. Welded wire is to be positioned in the slab below the finished surface
at: h/4 +1", h = thickness of slab. (3" for 8" slab 2'/2" for 6" slap). Welded wire is not
be cut when saw cutting control joints. Welded wire is to be positioned on chairs or
precast blocks and is to be physically checked and adjusted for depth during
concrete placement. Overlap individual sections of welded wire 6" and securely
fasten to prevent separation during concrete placement.
F. Maximum allowable concrete slump shall be 4 inches.
G. Minimum aggregate size is 3/8" with 7.5% air entrainment.
H. Maximum aggregate size is 1" with 6% air entrainment. (Within 1 % tolerance, % by
volume, conforming to ASTM C260).
01.16 Use of membrane -curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After
finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water
03302-2
August 2, 2011
has evaporated, the sui
applied with a pressure
01.17 Finish is to be steel
surface finish.
01.18 Quality Assurance:
SECTION 03302
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE — SITE
is to be uniformly coated with membrane -curing compound,
der, maximum coverage of 200 sq. ft.
and then light broomed, to provide a uniform, non -slip
A. Testing Agency: awa, Inc. shall engage a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during
concrete placement. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
B. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by the Wawa
Project Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and
patched to Owner's approval.
C. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement will include the
following:
D. MSampling fresh concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C94.
E. Slump: ASTM C143;I minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day's pour
of each type of conc fete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have
changed and whenever strength samples are taken.
Air Content: AST C173, volumetric method for Lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each
day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete.
G. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive -strength test, unless otherwise directed. Cylinders used for
acceptance shall be cured in accordance with section 9 of ASTM C31.
H. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5
cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the
first 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one
specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen
retained in reserve for later testing if required.
I. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given
class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
J. When strength of fileld-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete.
K. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength
and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 PSI (3'4 MPa).
L. Test results will be rl ported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Ready -mix
Producer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of
compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number,
date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and
03302-3
August 2, 2011
SECTION 03302
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE — SITE
class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28
days, compressive strength and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests. -
M. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive
device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or
rejection.
N. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in -place concrete
when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics
have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying
with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed.
03302-02 CONCRETE CURBING
02.1 Policy: The following specification is to be used for all concrete curbing inside and outside
the property line unless a more stringent specification is specifically required by a
municipality for curbing outside the property line.
02.1 Concrete curbing can be either machine formed or poured in place in accordance with
attached curbing detail. All curbing is to 8" x 18" with a chamfered finished face.
02.3 Control joints shall be provided a equal distances of not more than 20' and isolation joints
are to be provide at all inlet and /structures. Isolation joints are to be full depth '/2", pre -
molded asphalt impregnated joint material. Joint material is to be W below finished
surface with'/V maximum hand -tooled radius.
02.1 Control joints in formed and poured curbing are following the isolation joint specification
above.
02.2 Control joints in machine formed curbing are to be created by saw cutting within 24 hours
of forming; minimum 2" deep, maximum 4" deep or the above isolation joint specification
can be followed.
02.3 Curbing shall be temporarily backfilled to finished grade with soil behind and stone on the
site side as soon as concrete has attained sufficient supporting strength - maximum of 24
hours.
02.4 Material Specification:
A. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland
cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595.
B. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3500 PSI. Concrete
shall be manufactured and delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard
Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94.
C. Minimum cement content is to be 560 lb. per cubic yard.
D. Concrete is to be Fibermesh MD reinforced. (a.k.a. Fibermesh Enforce E3)
Fibermesh MD is to be added at a rate of 1 '/2 Ibs/cu. yard. Contractor to submit to
Wawa Construction Manager a Concrete Supplier Certificate stating approved
Fibermesh material, at the minimum rate added to each batch of concrete delivered
to the project site. Each certificate shall be accompanied by one copy of each batch
delivery ticket indicating the trade name, manufacturer's name and amount per cubic - 4
yard of reinforcement material added to each batch of concrete.
03302-4
August 2, 2011
E. Maximum allowable c
Minimum aggregate
Maximum aggregate
volume, conforming t(
SECTION 03302
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE — SITE
)ncrete slump shall be 4 inches.
ze is 3/8" with 7.5% air entrainment.
>ize is V with 6% air entrainment. (Within 1 % tolerance, % by
ASTM C260).
02.8 Use of membrane -curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After
finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water
has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated with membrane -curing compound,
applied with a pressure sprayer, maximum coverage of 200 sq. ft.
02.9 Finish is to be steel troweled and then light-broomed to provide a uniform, non -slip
surface finish.
03.1 Policy: The following specification is to be used for all building and site sidewalks.
Building sidewalks and curbing are to be separate structures — See Section 03302-02
Curbing Specification.
03.2 Concrete sidewalk is to be a minimum 4" concrete, compacted with vibratory plate
tamper. Separate 6"x 18" curbing.
03.3 Material Specification:
A. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland
cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595.
B. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3500 PSI. Concrete
shall be manufactured and delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard
Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94.
C. Minimum cement content is to be 560 lb. per cubic yard.
D. Concrete is to be (Fibermesh MD reinforced. (a.k.a. Fibermesh Enforce E3)
Fibermesh MD is to be added at a rate of 1 '/2 Ibs/cu. yard. Contractor to submit to
Wawa Construction Manager a Concrete Supplier Certificate stating approved
Fibermesh material, at the minimum rate added to each batch of concrete delivered
to the project site. Each certificate shall be accompanied by one copy of each
batch delivery ticket indicating the trade name, manufacturer's name and
amount per cubic yard of reinforcement material added to each batch of concrete.
E. Welded wire fabric, \1.W.F., may be substituted for use of Fibermesh only with prior
approval by Wawa's Construction manager. If approved, welded wire is to be 6x6
W2.9xW2.9, ASTM IA-185. Welded wire is to be positioned in the slab 2" below
the finished surface on chairs or precast blocks and is be physically checked and
adjusted for depth during installation. Overlap individual sections of welded wire 6".
F. Maximum allowable cl ncrete slump shall be 4 inches.
G. Minimum aggregate size is 3/8" with 7.5% air entrainment.
Maximum aggregate size is 1" with 6% air entrainment. (Within 1% tolerance, % by
volume, conforming to ASTM C260).
03.4 Use of membrane -curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After
finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water
- has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated with membrane -curing compound,
03302-5
August 2, 2011
SECTION 03302
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE — SITE
applied with a pressure sprayer, maximum coverage of 200 sq. ft.
03.5 Finish is to be steel troweled and then light broomed to provide a uniform, non -slip
surface finish.
03.6 Control joints are to be hand -tooled, minimum 1" depth, (slab thickness/4), spaced every
8', 1/2" maximum radius on hand -tooled joint.
03.7 Isolation joints are to be used at the meeting of all structures, where sidewalk abuts
building and between sidewalk and curb. Isolation joint is to be full depth;'/2" pre -molded
asphalt impregnated joint material. Joint material is to be'/4" below finished surface with
a %2' maximum hand -tooled radius to match control joints, conforming to ASTM D1752.
03.2 Construction joints are to be formed with '/2" x 1" trapezoidal metal keyways, hand -tool
joint to match control joints, in accordance with ACI 330R-92, Section 2.7 and appendix
C.3a. Seal joint with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant
Specification below.
03.3 Sealant Specification
A. Sikaflex 1 CSL — in 10 or 32 oz. cartridges
B. Sikaflex 2CSL (Limestone base color) — two part, pourable sealant.
03302-04 TANK AND CANOPY MATS
04.1 Policy: The following specification is to be used for both the canopy and tank mat
specification. A control joint detail for sidewalks, canopy, and tank mat is to be provided
by Civil Engineer on all Site Plans.
Civil Engineer is to review geotech report provided by Wawa and shall provide direction
for strengthening the sub -base should conditions warrant, CBR values below 3.5. Refer
to ACI 330R-92, minimum acceptable M value is 600 PSI. Notify Wawa Project Engineer
should additional strengthening be required.
04.2 All work is to be in conformance with ACI 330R-92, Guide for Design and Construction of
Concrete Parking Lots and ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete Construction.
04.3 Tank mat is to be 8" thick mat; canopy mat is to be 6" thick mat, with 6" stone sub -base.
Sub -base for canopy mat is to be modified 2B stone.
04.4 Control joints are to be spaced at a maximum of 15'. Control joints are to be hand tooled
or saw cut, minimum depth: 25% of finished thickness, 2" for 8" thick mats, 1 '/2" for 6"
thick mats. Joints are to be sealed with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to
Sealant Specification below.
04.5 Construction joints are to be formed with '/2" x 1" trapezoidal metal keyways, hand -tool
joint to match control joints, in accordance with ACI 330R-92, Section 2.7 and appendix
C.3a. Seal joint with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant
Specification below.
04.6 Isolation joints are to be used at: canopy columns, gas islands, inlet structures and at the
meeting of any other structures. Isolation joint is to be full depth, '/2' pre -molded asphalt
impregnated joint material with %2' Sealtight Snap Cap, sealed with petroleum resistant
sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant Specification below. Joint material is to be '/4"
below finished surface with a %2" maximum hand -tooled radius to match control joints. _
04.1 Sealant Specification:
03302-6
August 2, 2011
A. Sikaflex 1 CSL — in 10
B. Sikaflex 2CSL (
04.2 Material Specification:
SECTION 03302
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE — SITE
or 32 oz. cartridges
base color) — two part, pourable sealant.
A. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland
cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595.
B. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 PSI. Concrete
shall be manufacture and delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard
Specification for Read Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94.
C. Minimum cement content is to be 560 lb. per cubic yard.
D. Concrete is to be Fibermesh MD reinforced. (a.k.a. Fibermesh Enforce E3)
Fibermesh MD is to be added at a rate of 1 '/2 Ibs/cu. yard. Contractor to submit to
Wawa Construction Manager a Concrete Supplier Certificate stating approved
Fibermesh material, at the minimum rate added to each batch of concrete delivered
to the project site. Ealch certificate shall be accompanied by one copy of each batch
delivery ticket indicating the trade name, manufacturer's name and amount per cubic
yard of reinforcement 7erial added to each batch of concrete.
E. Welded wire fabric may be substituted for use of Fibermesh only with prior approval
by Wawa's Construction manager. If approved, welded wire is to be 6x6 W2.9xW2.9,
ASTM A-185. Welded wire is to be positioned in the slab below the finished surface
at: h/4 +1", h = thickness of slab. (3" for 8" slab 2'/2" for 6" slap). Welded wire is not
be cut when saw cutti�g control joints. Welded wire is to be positioned on chairs or
precast blocks and is to be physically checked and adjusted for depth during
concrete placement. Overlap individual sections of welded wire 6" and securely
fasten to prevent sepaFation during concrete placement.
F. Maximum allowable concrete slump shall be 4 inches.
G. Minimum aggregate size is 3/8" with 7.5% air entrainment.
H. Maximum aggregate size is V with 6% air entrainment (within 1 % tolerance, % by
volume, conforming toIASTM C260).
04.9 Use of membrane -curing I compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After
finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water
has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated with membrane -curing compound,
applied with a pressure sprayer, maximum coverage of 200 sq. ft.
04.10 Finish is to be steel trowl led and then light broomed, to provide a uniform, non -slip
surface finish.
04.11 Quality Assurance:
i
A. Testing Agency: Walwa, Inc. shall engage a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during
concrete placement. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
B. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by the Wawa
Project Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and
patched to Owner's approval.
03302-7
August 2, 2011
SECTION 03302
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE — SITE
C. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement will include the j
following:
D. MSampling fresh concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C94.
E. Slump: ASTM C143; minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of
each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have
changed and whenever strength samples are taken.
F. Air Content: AST C173, volumetric method for Lightweight or normal weight concrete;
ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of
each type of air -entrained concrete.
G. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive -strength test, unless otherwise directed. Cylinders used for acceptance
shall be cured in accordance with section 9 of ASTM C31.
H. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5
cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the first
25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen
tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in
reserve for later testing if required.
I. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class
of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from
each batch if fewer than five are used.
J. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete.
K. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and
no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more
than 500 PSI (3.4 MPa).
L. Test results will be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Ready -mix
Producer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of
compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number,
date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and
class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28
days, compressive strength and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests.
M. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive device
may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
N. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in -place concrete
when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have
not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may
conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed.
END OF SECTION 03302
03302-8
August 2, 2011
01.1 Submittals: In addition to
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
Data, submit the following:
(A) Shop Drawings: For 'masonry reinforcing bars detail bending and placement of unit
masonry reinforcing ars; comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement." Shor elevations of reinforced walls.
(B) Samples showing the Ifull range of colors and textures available for exposed masonry
units and colored mortars as requested by the Wawa Project Managers.
(C) Material Test Reports From a qualified testing agency, for each type of masonry unit
required, as follows:
1. Concrete Masonry' Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per
ASTM C 140
2. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, per ASTM C 1314.
3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270.
4. Grout Test: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
(D) Material Certificates: For each type of masonry unit required.
01.2 Sample Panels: If requested by the Wawa Project Manager, build sample- panels, to
verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects, for
each type of exposed unit masonry assembly in sizes approximately 48 incheslong by
48incheshigh by full thickness.
01.3 Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace
unit masonry damaged b�r frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather
construction requirements',contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
01.4 Hot -Weather Requ
90deg with a wind
48 inchesahead of r
02.1 Provide unit masonry that
28 days. Determine coma
according to ASTM C 131
For Concrete Unit Masoi
04200-03 PRODUCTS
When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or
greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than
Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
s the following net -area compressive strengths (fm) at
strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms .
:fm=1500psi (10.3MPa)
03.1 Manufactured Stone RE: 04720
03.2 Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
(A) Weight Classification:) Normal weight.
(B) Provide Type I, moist I re -controlled units.
(C) Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
(Sections 03.3 & 03.4 removed)
04200-1
August 2, 2012
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
03.5 Mortar and Grout Materials: As follows:
(A) Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -
weather construction.
(B) Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
(C) For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement or cement -lime formulation as required
to produce the color indicated.
(D) Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inchthick, use
aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16sieve.
Colored -Mortar Aggregates: Natural -colored sand or ground marble, granite, or
other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
(E) Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.(F)Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron
oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only
pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
(F) Cold -Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture
complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for
use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.
(G) Water: Potable.
03.6 Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615; orGrade 60.
03.7 Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951; mill galvanized, carbon -steel wire for interior
walls and hot -dip galvanized, carbon -steel wire for exterior walls.
(A) Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.
(B) Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inchdiameter.
(C) For single-wythe masonry, provide ladder type with single pair of side rods and
cross rods spaced not more than 16 incheso.c.
(D) For multi-wythe masonry, provide ladder type with perpendicular cross rods spaced
not more than 16 incheso.c. and one (1) side rod for each face shell of hollow
masonry units more than 4 inchesin width, plus one (1) side rod for each wythe of
masonry 4 inches or less in width.
03.8 Ties and Anchors, General: Provide ties and anchors, specified as follows - Galvanized
Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for exterior walls
and Class 1 coating for interior walls.
03.9 Bent Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide,
made from 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized steel wire.
03.10 Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Steel Frame: Provide two-piece assemblies that
allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to wall.
(A) Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, galvanized steel wire anchor section
for welding to steel.
(B) Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry
face, made from 0. 1 875-inch-diameter, galvanized steel wire.
04200-2
August 2, 2012
03.11 Anchors for Connecting t
horizontal adjustment but
Anchor Section: Dovet q
galvanized steel sheet.
03.12 Adjustable Masonry-Vene
horizontal adjustment but
attachment over sheathing
100-lbf (445-N) load in b
play in excess of 0.05 inc
consisting of a triangular
screw holes top and bottc
a slot for connection of wii
03.13 Embedded Flashing
(A) Metal Flashing:
mm) thick.
(B) Fabricate metal drip
inchesinto wall and 1
degrees.
(C) Fabricate metal flas
least 3 inches into %
metal back on itself
retaining sealant bac
(D) For flashing partly e
flashing not exposes
EDPM Flashing -
terpolymer of ethyle
(1.0 mm) thick. Coor
03.14 Miscellaneous Masonry
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
Concrete: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or
resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall.
I anchor section formed from 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm-) thick,
;r Anchors: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or
esist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall, for
to wood or metal studs, and that are capable of withstanding a
ith tension and compression without deforming or developing
1 (1.3 mm). Screw -Attached, Masonry -Veneer Anchors: Units
wire tie and a rib -stiffened, sheet metal anchor section with
n; with raised rib -stiffened strap stamped into center to provide
tie.
: As follows:
from the following metal: Stainless Steel: 0.0156inch (0.4
edges from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3
2 inch out from wall, with a hemmed outer edge bent down 30
ng terminations from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at
I and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend
)r 3/4 inch and then down into joint 3/8inchto form a stop for
er rod.
)osed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For
to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise indicated:
Manufacturer's standard flashing product formed from a
propylene diene, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch
mate with wicking and flashing details.
: As follows:
(A) Compressible Filler:) Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056,
Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene.
(B) Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber
compound complying) with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805.
(C) Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with
ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
I
(D) Round Plastic WeepNent Tubing: Medium -density polyethylene, 3/8-inch (9-mm)
OD by 4 inches (100 tnm) long.
(E) Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches
(9 by 38 by 89 mm).
(F) Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter,
in length required to produce 2-inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches
(450 mm) in cavity between wythes.
(G) Cavity Drainage Material: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, free -draining mesh; made from
polyethylene strands.
03.15 Masonry Cleaners
04200-3
August 2, 2012
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
(A) Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure
tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent
dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water.
(B) Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from
new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product
expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of
masonry units being cleaned.
03.16 Mortar and Grout Mixes: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use
calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
(A) Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Use
Type S.
(B) Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to
produce color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement
content by weight: For Portland cement -lime mortar, not more than 10 percent.
(C) Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of type (fine or
coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions
of grout spaces and pour height. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
Use grout of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
03.17 Source Quality Control: Wawa, Inc. will engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform the following source quality -control testing if the manufacturer does not provide
quality control documentation.
(A) Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated,
units will be tested according to ASTM C 140.
(B) Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according
to ASTM C67.
04200-04 EXECUTION
04.1 Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry
before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,
where possible, cut edges concealed.
04.2 Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures.
04.3 Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds30 g/30
sq.in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at the time of laying.
04.4 Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
(A) For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet,
nor 1/2 inchmaximum.
(B) For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and
reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2
inchmaximum.
04200-4
August 2, 2012
04.5 Lay out walls in advance
thicknesses and for acc
offsets. Avoid using les:
possible, at other locatior
04.6 Bond Pattern for Expos(
not use units with less
jambs.
04.7 Built-in Work: As
Sections of the Sr
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
e location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and
an -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in a running bond pattern; do
ian nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or
ction progresses, build in items specified under this and other
)ns. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
04.8 Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inchesunder bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
04.9 Lay hollow masonry units ;as follows:
(A) With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
(B) Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,
columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities are to be filled with
grout.
04.10 Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the
joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
04.11 Keep cavities clean of
Use wood strips tern
progresses, remove st
04.12 Provide continuous ma;
inchon exterior side of
inches. Provide contini
and "T" sections.
ar droppings and other materials during construction.
rily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work
clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
y joint reinforcement. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8
Ils, % inchelsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6
at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L"
04.13 Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural
members to comply with the following:
(A) Provide an open space not less than 1 inchin width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated.
(B) Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry
joints and attached tolstructure.
04.14 Anchor masonry veneers to wall framingwith masonry -veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements: i
(A) Fasten each anchor � section through sheathing to wall framing with two metal
fasteners of type indicated.
(B) Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 incheso.c. vertically and 24
incheso.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area.
Install additional anchors within 12 inchesof openings and at intervals, not
exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.
i
04200-5
August 2, 2012
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
04.15 Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, 1
texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to -
support loads indicated.
04.16 Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
(A) Extend flashing 4 inchesat ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inchesto form a
pan.
(B) Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing '/2
inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge.
(C) Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flashing % inchback from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal
flashing termination.
04.17 Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
(A) Use round plastic tubing to form weep holes.
(B) Space weep holes 16 incheso.c.
(C) Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar
has set.
04.18 Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
04.19 Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. Comply with requirements of
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum
grout space and maximum pour height.
04200-05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
05.1 Wawa, Inc. will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
following testing if manufacturer of the products cannot provide quality control
documentation. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be
done at Contractor's expense.
(A) Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed
during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m.) of wall area or portion thereof
(B) Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780.
(C) Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
(D) Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each typed of concrete masonry unit indicated,
units will be tested according to ASTM C 140 if prism test fails.
(E) Prism -Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms
will be tested per ASTM C 1314, and as follows: Prepare 1 set of prisms for testing
at 7 days and 1 set for testing at 28 days.
05.2 Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as follows:
04200-6
August 2, 2012
(A) By dry brushing to
progresses.
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as work
(B) After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison liurposes.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners
promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean brick by the bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes No. 20, using job -mixed detergent solution.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
05.3 Masonry Waste Disposal] Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry
units, waste mortar, and excess or soil -contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with
fill material as fill is placeb. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inchesof
finished grade. Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
Masonry waste shall not be located beneath any landscaped areas.
END SECTION 04200
04200-7
August 2, 2012
01.1-- . -.. Samples:_ If requE
SECTION 04223
PRE -CAST CONCRETE WALL BASE
the Wawa Project Manager, submit samples.
01.1_ _ _Unit dormpressive Streng h: Minimum net area compressive strength of 2,000 psi.
04223 3 PRODUCTS
03.1 Pre -Cast Concrete 1Nall base with 1" x 1" chamfer at top edge. _ Refer to Construction
Documents for sizes. Corners shall be mitred.
03.2 Manufacturer:
_Italian Cast Stone
Contact: Ricardo Padro_
Phone: 813-902-8900
,Color: ICS-LS-Wawa-Sal
,Finish: 'Light Smooth'
Alternate Manufacturer:
Quality Stone Veneer Inc.
Contact: Heath Hopstet_tei
Phone: 717-786-3229
Color: Sand (MH)_
Finish: 'Siota Texture'
Name: 34x6x3" Siota be
END SECTION 04223
ise and 34x8x ' Siota beveled base
04200-1
August 2, 2012
SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cast stone masonry.
1. Owens Corning Pro -Fit Ledgesto
770-645-4531, Mobile 404-797-6
1.2 REFERENCES
manufactured by Boral Stone Products LLC Contact: Ashley Joyce @
i. Email: Ashley.Joyce@boral.com
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
2. ASTM C 39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
3. ASTM C 91 - Specification for asonry Cement.
4. ASTM C 144 -Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
5. ASTM C 150 -Specification for Portland Cement.
6. ASTM C 207 -Specification for 11 ydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide suitable wash on exterior sills, c pings, projecting courses, and pieces with exposed top surfaces.
B. Projecting Pieces: Provide drips under o.�ter edge.
C. Compressive strength of cast stone to comply with ASTM C192, C39 - 1800 psi min.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate bonding, details of anchors; inserts; joints; connections to adjacent construction and ma-
terials; and methods of installation and 7choring.
B. Samples: Furnish two of sufficient size to depict finish and texture. Pro -Fit Ledgestone, Southwest Blend PF-
8019. (No substitutions)
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Exterior and Interior applications:
1. Press each stone into the mortar setting bed firmly enough to squeeze some mortar out around stone edges.
2. Incorporate good building practices. Verify local code requirements specific to the area and check with au-
thorities local requirements. Refer to plans for details and current product approvals and NOA testing re-
spectively.
3. Complete installation instructions and recommendations are available from the manufacturer.
4. Maintain materials and ambient temperature at minimum of 40 degress (F) prior to, during and 48 hours fol-
lowing installation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect from damage and staining.
B. Store clear of the ground on non -staining planking. Cover with non -staining waterproof material.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Carefully read all installation instructions before proceeding with Cultural Stone veneer applications
04720-1
November 12, 2014
B. Observe applicable job site safety practices. NIOSH approved N95 dust respirator should be used when mechani-
cally altering this product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Mortar: ASTM C 150, Type I/II Portland. ASTM C 207 Hydrated lime type "N". Iron Oxide Pigments.
B. Watertable/Sill —Stone texture, color Taupe CSV 1375.
C. Simpson A-21 angle, galvanized finish. 301bs per ft. minimum holding capacity ... 16" O.C. spacing. Two (2) per
section minimum.
D. Dupont Tyvek Stuccowrap... Apply Stuccowrap. Follow manufactures recommendations for in-
stallation.
2.2 JOINT WIDTH
A. In order to obtain the most natural look, joints should be as narrow as possible. ''/2" max ... dry stack - fit stones as
tightly together as possible.
2.3 FINISH
A. Pro -Fit Drystack Ledgestone-Southwest Blend PF-8019.
B. Exposed Surfaces Planes: Straight or flat, as appropriate to sectional shape, 1/32 inch in one foot, maximum.
2.4 WARRANTY
A. Cultured Stone products are covered for a period of 50 years from date of purchase when used on a structure
which conforms to local building codes and when installed in accordance with building codes and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. The warranty is limited to the original purchaser and may not be transferred to any subsequent owner.
C. This warranty only covers manufacturing defects in the Cultured Stone brand products manufactured by Boral
Stone.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set each stone in full bed of mortar; vertical joints flushed full
B. When setting with mortar, drench stones with potable water just prior to setting.
C. Sponge clean each stone to remove splashed mortar or mortar smears.
D. Water table and other Areas Partially or Totally Horizontal: After setting, insert properly sized backing material or
backer rod to proper depth.. Gun in sealant. Refer to plans and details.
E. Protect set stones from splashed mortar or adjacent construction activities.
3.2 INSPECTION
A. Color and Texture Acceptance: Equal to approved sample when viewed in daylight at 10 feet.
04720-2
November 12, 2014
05001-01 GENERAL
01.1 Shop Drawings or Cuts:
do not order or fabricai
Section 01002-14.)
01.2 Painting: All ferrous
primer.
05001-02 PIPE RAILINGS
SECTION 05001
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
ibmit for review to Architect on all items specified herein and
until approved Shop Drawings have been received. (See
I shall be shop primed with a Red Oxide or Zinc Chromate
02.1 Exterior: (Also refer to Site Engineering Drawings.) if required, exterior railings shall be 2
'/z' diameter standard weight galvanized steel pipe with flush welded joints and set into
concrete. Top of rail gripping surface shall be mounted between 34" and 38" above ramp
or stair nosings. Verify Drawings for details.
03.1 Provide a 6'-0" high chain' link fence and gate around concrete pad where shown on Site
Plan with a 4'-0" access qate.
COA
04.1 Gas Canopy Decorative Column Shrouds (exposed top portion only). Color as indicated
in drawings.
04.2 Structural and non-structural Building Overhang support rods, knife plates and other
related components. Color as indicated in drawings.
04.3 Powder Coat Finish materials/process:
A. Powder Coat finish material to be Polyester TGIC Exterior Grade.
B. 2.0 mills thick minimum
C. Powder Coat application process consists of Five Stage Pretreatment: (Wash, Rinse,
Phosphate etching, Rinse, Chrome seal), with Powder Coat to be applied
electrostatically and infrared cured. Powder Coat Quality checks to include; millage
thickness measureme t, pencil hardness test, MEK rub test, adhesion peel test, and
salt spray accelerated�Iife test.
05001-05 BOLLARDS
04.1 Steel pipe bollards, 6"
covers to be furnished
G.C.
Manufacturer
Ideal Shield
Contact: Dennis Knittel
2525 Clark Street
Detroit, MI 48209
Phone:313-551-2275
gas canopy and building. Steel bollards and plastic bollard
Wawa, Inc. Bollards to be set in PVC sleeves furnished by
05001-06 INTERIOR METAL STUDS (See Section 05400.)
1
05001-07 LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING
07.1 All stud and/or joist framing members shall be of the type, size and gage as shown on
the plans and shall be manufactured by Unimast Inc. or equal. Provide X-bracing for
fire -rated walls where required by code.
I
05001-1
January, 2014
SECTION 05001
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
07.2 All galvanized studs in exterior walls to be 8"-16 gage (UNO Refer to plans) for all
stores and shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM
A446, Grade D, with a minimum yield of 50,000 psi.
07.3 Axially loaded studs shall be installed in a manner which will assure that ends of the
studs are positioned against the inside track web, prior to stud and track attachment.
07.4 Provision for structure vertical movement shall be provided using the Unimast Vertical
Slide Clip or other means.
07.5 Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is complete and all attached adjacent
framing is complete.
07.6 All exterior studs shall be laterally braced with mechanical bracing at 48" o.c.
END SECTION 05001
05001-2
January, 2014
05120-01 GENERAL
01.1 Structural Performai
Contract Documents
loadings indicated.
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
e: Engineer structural steel connections required by the
be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design
01.2 Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional
engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for
structural steel connections.
01.3 Submittals: In additioto Product Data and mill test reports on structural steel and
bolts, submit Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components,
including connections, splices, holes, welds, and bolts.
(A) Include Shop Drawings prepared under the direction of a professional engineer
who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located
and who is experienced in providing structural steel engineering services.
(B) Submit 1 reproducible set and 1 copy of the Shop Drawings for review. Allow 10
business days for review of submittals for the first submission, 7 business days
for review of the second submission, and 5 business days for any submission
thereafter.
01.4 Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
(A) AISC's "Specifica Zion for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design."
(B) ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates,
Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use."
(C) Research Council Ion Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
01.5 Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code --Steel." Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed
AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has
undergone re -certification.
01.6 Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. Store fasteners in a
protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before
use.
05120-02 PRODUCTS
02.1 Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A 992, ASTM A Grade 50 Wide Flange Beams.
Structural Steel Channel Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36, carbon steel.
02.2 Cold -Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.3
05120-2
August 28, 2014
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
02.3 Steel Pipe ASTM AS3
02.4 Anchor Rod, Nuts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55-S1 hex steel structural bolts and heavy
hex carbon -steel nuts.
02.5 High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) or ASTM A 490
(ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon -steel nuts,
and hardened carbon -steel washers, uncoated.
02.6 Electrodes for Welding: AWS Code (E70XX).
05120-03 PAINT & PROCEDURE FOR EXTERIOR STEEL
03.1 General: EXCEPT FOR ITEMS IN SECTION 05001-04, ABSOLUTELY NO
SUBSTITUTIONS FOR THE SPECIFIED PROCEDURE, PRIMER, OR FINISH PAINT
WILL BE ALLOWED.
(A)Upper portion (cap)of Gas Canopy decorative steel shrouds above the stone
base
(B)Building Overhang support rods, knife plates and other related components.
03.2 Materials
(A) Primer - Carboline Carboguard 825 Epoxy
(B) Finish - Carboline Carbothane 135 Semigloss. Color to match ATAS #2 Bone
White.
03.3 Manufacturer
Carboline
350 Hanley Industrial Court
St. Louis, MO 63144-1599
Contact: Brian McHale
Phone: 610-420-0323
03.4 Shop Application
(A) Location: Galvanized metal decking (where applicable) and exterior steel.
(B) Surface Preparation: Steam clean all surfaces to be coated using Carboline
Surface Cleaner # 3. Allow to air dry. Follow with SSPC SP-7 Bush -Off Blast
Cleaning.
(C) Primer: Carboline Carboguard 825 Epoxy applied at a rate of 4-6 mils Dry Film
Thickness.
(D) Finish: Carboline Carbothane 135 Semigloss applied at a rate of 2-3 mils Dry Film
Thickness.
03.5 Field Onsite Touchup
(A) Touchup all welds and road damaged areas using Carboguard 825 Epoxy applied at
4-6 mils dry film thickness. Allow recommended dry time. Apply Finish coat of
Carbothane 135 Semigloss Acrylic Urethane applied at a rate of 2-3 mils dry film
thickness.
05120-3
August 28, 2014
(B) The surface prepE
Transportation for
and Virginia's spe
application.
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
m being recommended matches the Department of
States of Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, Maryland,
3tion for treatment of galvanized metal prior to coatings
03.6 Warranty: Carboline will lissue a 7 year material warranty for the above galvanized metal
coatings specification.
05120-04 EXECUTION
04.1 Erect structural steel acc9.rately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC specifications referenced in this Section.
04.2 Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -
reducing materials and roLghen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean
bottom surface of base and bearing plates and set on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required. Tighten ancho� bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of base or
bearing plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates.
04.3 Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AICS's "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel buildings and Bridges."
04.4 Install and tighten high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless
indicated as slip -critical, direct -tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections.
04.5 Weld Connection: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
04.6 Fabrication: Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible.
Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and
in Shop Drawings.
(A) Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.
(B) Shop install and tighten high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. Connection Type: Slip -critical,
direct -tension, or tensloned shear/bearing connections, as indicated.
(C) Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality
of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
05120-05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05.1 Inspection Agency: Wawa; Inc. shall engage a qualified independent inspecting agency
to perform field inspections and to prepare reports. Inspection reports will be transmitted
in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Architect, Structural Engineer, and General
Contractor within 24 hoursl after inspections.
(A) Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and
test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
05120-4
August 28, 2014
I
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
i
(B) Additional testing, at contractor's expense, will be performed of determine
compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.
(C) High -strength bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
(D) In addition to visual inspection, welded connections will be inspected and tested
according to AWS D1.1 procedures, when recommended by testing agency.
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709, performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality "2-2T."
4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
END SECTION 05120
05120-5
August 28, 2014
05210-01 GENERAL
01.1 Summary: This Section
01.2 Submittals:
(A) Product Data: For
SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS
long -span steel joists and joist accessories.
type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.
(B) Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of
joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories;
splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
(C) Welding certificates.
(D) Manufacturer certificates.
(E) Mill Certificates: For bolts.
(F) Field quality -control test and inspection reports
(G) Research/Evaluation reports
01.3 Quality Assurance
(A) Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by the Steel Joist Institute
(SJI) to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load
tables.
(B) SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and
Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, SJI's "Specifications")
that are applicable to �ypes of joists indicated.
(C) Welding: Qualify
"Structural Welding
01.4 Delivery, Storage, and
SJI's "Specifications."
05210-02 PRODUCTS
02.1 Materials
;dures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
- Steel."
ndling: Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in
(A) Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel -angle chord members
(B) Carbon -Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon -steel,
hex -head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened
steel washers. Finish:Plain, uncoated.
(C) High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436
hardened carbon -steel washers. Finish: Plain.
(D) Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with
performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
05210-1
July, 2011
SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS
02.2 Long -span Steel Joists: Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for
Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's
"Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members; of joist type as follows
and end and top -chord arrangements indicated. Joist Type — LH-series steel joists.
02.3 Joist Accessories
(A) Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal and diagonal
bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist,
chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for
stability.
(B) Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's
"Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
(C) Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom -chord elements or a separate
extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to
within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.
(D) Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist installation.
02.4 Cleaning and Shop Painting: Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other
foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories. Apply 1 coat of shop primer.
05210-03 EXECUTION
03.1 Installation
(A) Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
(B) Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to
supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's
written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently
fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to
ensure that joists are stabilized during construction.
(C) Field weld joists to supporting steel framework. Coordinate welding sequence and
procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and
procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in
correcting welding work.
(D) Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high -strength structural bolts.
Comply with Research Council on Structural Connections' "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high -strength
structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
(E) Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction
loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if
terminating at walls or beams.
05210-2
July, 2011
SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS
03.2 Field Quality Control: Testing Agency -Owner will engage a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.
END SECTION 05210
05210-3
July, 2011
05310-01 GENERAL
01.1
01.2
Submittals: In addition
following.
(A) Shop Drawings sho
reinforcing channels
attachments to other
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
Product Data for each type of deck and accessory, submit the
ng layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details,
pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and
nstruction.
(B) Product certificates signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
(C) Submit one (1) reproducible set and two (2) copies of the Shop Drawings for review.
Allow 10 business days for review of submittals for the first submission, 7 business
days for review of thd second submission, and 5 business days for any submission
thereafter.
Quality Assurance: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed
Steel Structural Members"I for calculating structural characteristics of steel deck.
(A) Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel,"land AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel."
(B) Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units
identical to those steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a
testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire -Resistance F
Resistance Direc
agency.
2. Steel deck units s
and inspecting ag
(C) FM Listing: Provide
Guide, Building Mate
05310-02 PRODUCTS
02.1
02.2
02.3
Steel Roof Deck: Fabrii
"SDI Specifications and
and the following:
(A) Galvanized Steel S
zinc coating.
gs: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting
II be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing
cy.
roof deck evaluated by FM and listed in FM's "Approval
for Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.
panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with
nmentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29,
ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G90 (Z275)
I
(B) Deck Profile: Type B, wide rib.
(C) Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Accessories: Steel deck manufacturer's standard accessory materials,
mechanical fasteners, clos re strips, pour stops, and closures for deck.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
05310-1
including
July, 2011
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
05310-03 EXECUTION
03.1 Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and
commentary in SDI Publication No.29, manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
(A) Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting, frame before being permanently
fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks.
(B) Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
(C) Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to decking.
(D) Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for
strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work.
03.2 Roof Deck Accessories: Install sump pans and sump plates, finish strips, cover
plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's
written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
03.3 Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both
surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
05310-04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
04.1 Testing Agency: Wawa, Inc. shall engage in a qualified independent inspecting agency to
perform field quality control inspection and submit inspection reports.
04.2 Field welds and mechanical fasteners will be subject to inspection.
04.3 Lap distances and end bearing and span lengths will be subject to inspection.
04.4 Inspection reports will be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Architect,
Structural Engineer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.
04.5 Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
04.6 Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of correct work with special
requirements.
END SECTION 05310
05310-2
July, 2011
05400-01 GENERAL
01.1 Structural Performanc
design loads without di
(A) Exterior Load-Bei
height for Stucco
(B) Interior Load -Bea
height.
(C) Exterior Non -Los
wall height is 1/3
01.2 Submittals: In addition to
(A) Shop Drawings shorn
formed metal framinc
mechanical fasteners.
SECTION 05400
COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING
Provide cold -formed metal framing capable of withstanding
ctions greater than the following:
Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall
s, and 1 /600 of the wall height for Brick Stores.
Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall
Bearing Curtain -Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of the
for Stucco Stores and 1/600 for Brick Stores.
Data, submit the following:
ing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-
; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including
(B) Research/Evaluation �eports: Evidence of cold -formed metal framing's compliance
with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
01.3 Quality Assurance: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed
Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of cold -formed metal
framing.
(A) Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code --Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel."
(B) Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-
resistance=rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for
fire resistance per Al2TM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having juri, diction.
1.Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire
Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" or from tl�e listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
05400-02 PRODUCTS
02.1 Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, G90 zinc coating, Grade 33 (230) for
minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and less; Grade 50 (340) for
minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and greater.
02.2 Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel studs, of web depths and gauges indicated,
with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows. Track:
Manufacturer's standard IU-shaped steel track, unpunched, with straight flanges,
complying with ASTM C 955, manufacturer's standard flange width, and minimum
uncoated -steel thickness mIatching steel studs.
02.3 Joist Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths and gauges
indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows.
Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated,
05400-1
July, 2011
SECTION 05400
COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows.
Minimum Uncoated -Steel Thickness: Matching steel joists. �?
02.4 Fabricate steel -framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing
members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of manufacturer's standard
thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated.
02.5 Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to
ASTM A 123.
02.6 Anchor Rod, Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade C hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex
carbon -steel nuts; flat oversized, hardened -steel washers.
02.7 Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load.
02.8 Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to 10 times design load.
02.9 Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant -coated, self -drilling, self -threading steel drill
screws.
02.10 Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
05400-03 EXECUTION
03.1 Install cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and
with connections securely fastened, according to ASTM C 1007, manufacturer's written
recommendations, and requirements in this Section.
(A) Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
(B) Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as
standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
(C) Install framing members in one-piece lengths.
(D) Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads
comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed.
(A) Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed
joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing
work.
(F) Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of
manufacturer's standard punched openings.
03.2 Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows.
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
03.3 Load -Bearing Wall Installation: Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match
studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends. Squarely seat
05400-2
July, 2011
SECTION 05400
COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING
studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated, set plumb, align,
and fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks.
(A) Align studs vertically) where wall -framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing.
Where studs cannot ,e aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
(B) Align floor and
continuously reir
(C) Anchor studs abutt
supporting structure.
(D) Install headers over
openings as indicate
to transfer load to
stiffeners, or gusset
(E) Frame wall openings
(F) Install runner tracks
jamb studs with clip
wall studs.
(G) Install horizontal
each stud interse
framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned,
track to transfer loads.
structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to
II openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above
Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required
pporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web
not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame.
jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to
les or by welding, and space jack studs same as full -height
ng in stud system, minimum 4'-0" o.c. vertically. Fasten at
(H) Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing,
blocking, bracing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and
fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system.
03.4 Non -Load -Bearing Curt
studs. Align tracks accu
as indicated; set plumb,
indicated.
(A) Isolate non -load -be
vertical loads while
Nall Installation: Install continuous tracks sized to match
ly and securely anchor to supporting structure. Space studs
n, and fasten both flanges of studs to track, unless otherwise
steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of
ing lateral support.
(B) Install horizontal bridging in curtain -wall studs, not more than 48 inches (1219 mm)
apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
(C) Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners,
clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a
complete and stable curtain -wall -framing system.
03.5 Joist Installation: Install, align, and securely anchor perimeter joist track sized to match
joists as indicated on Shop Drawings. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level,
straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten to both flanges
of joist track.
(A) Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.
Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists.
(B) Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at spacings indicated.
(C) Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting
joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.
05400-3
July, 2011
SECTION 05400
COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING
(D) Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section
located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist
reinforcement, or as indicated. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls
above.
(E) Install bridging at each end of joists and at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at
each joist intersection.
(F) Secure joists to load -bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom
flange.
(G) Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure
pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to
provide a complete and stable joist -framing assembly.
03.6 Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated
and installed cold -formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
END SECTION 05400
05400-4
July, 2011
SECTION 05720
DECORATIVE METAL
01.1 (A) Fabrication Fencee panel components shall be manufactured using the electro-
forged welding process for complete penetration of cross -members.
(B) Configuration Fence panels and support components shall be fabricated to the
configurations shown ion the contract drawings and as recommended by the
fabricating shop. Provide shop drawings for all components to Architect.
(A) Steel Bar Stock: ASTM A36
(B) Steel Tubing: ASTM P %)), Grade B
05720-02 INSTALLATION
02.1 Install ornamental gates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
02.2 Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference. Anchor
ground -set items in concrete. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where
necessary.
05720-03 HARDWARE
03.1 Hardware
1 pr. Ea. 6" SCH 80 sle(
1 ea. JMC CB-24 MF S
mill finish.
1 ea. Stanley 1009 Saf
to match gate
1 ea. Schlage PL3000 F
END SECTION 05720
r—�
Hinges with Zerk Grease fittings per drawings.
24" L w/ 2 stainless steel guides and 1 stainless steel hanger,
Hasp and Staple (for padlock) galvanized finished, field paint
Dck (keyed alike)
05720-1
September 1 Z 2012
06001-01 RELATED WORK
01.1 Millwork items such as
Wawa, under a separate
06001-02 MATERIALS
SECTION 06001
CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
ets and Countertops will be provided and installed by
02.1 PVC Trimboards: For all exterior 'PVC trim and louvers for New Stores and Remodels
where required on Drawings. Install 'smooth' side for exterior facing. Thickness as
required on Drawings. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation, sealants, and
caulking; and Wawa's instructions below.
(A) Exterior running Trim; and fabrications to be supplied by PVC Trimboard mfr.
1. Celluar PVC Trimlwith a density of .55 grams per cubic centimeter.
2. Supplied without painted finish, white. Painting not necessary.
3. Free Foam Cellul r, ICC code EX1074 compliant.
4. Manufacturers
a. A ek Trimboards, 801 Corey St. Moosic, PA 18507. Phone 866-
5 19-6900. Web -site: www.azek.com
b. Palight Trimboard by Palram Americas Inc. 9735 Commerce
Circle; Kutztown, PA 19530. Phone: 610-285-9918. Website:
(B) Installation
1. Storage and Handling: Store PVC_ trim Products on a flat level surface.
a) Since PVC products are more flexible than wood, they may conform to
uneven surfaces.
b) PVC trim products have a density comparable to pine and should be
handled in the same fashion as pine would be handled to avoid damage.
c) Units of PVC trim are shipped from the manufacturer in a protective
covering. If covering has been removed, take care to keep product free
of dirt and debris at jobsite. If product gets dirty, clean after installation.
2. Cutting:
a) PVC products can be cut using the same tools to cut lumber.
b) Carbide tipped blades designed to cut wood work well. Avoid using fine
tooth cutting blades.
c) Rough edges from cutting may be caused by excessive friction, poor
board support, or worn or improper tooling.
3. Drilling:
a) P_ VC products can be cut using the same tools as used to drill lumber.
b) Drilling PVC products is similar to drilling a hardwood. Care should be
taken to a�oid frictional heat build up.
c) Use standard woodworking tools. Do not use drills made for normal rigid
PVC.
d) Periodic re oval of P_— C shavings from the drill hole may be necessary.
4. Routing:
a) PVC products may be routed using standard routing bits and the same
tools used to rout lumber.
b) Carbide tipped routing bits are recommended.
c) Routing ,PVC products provides a crisp, clean edge.
I
06001-1
September 9, 2015
SECTION 06001
CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
5. Fastening:
a) For best results, use fasteners designed for wood trim and wood siding
(thinner shank, blunt point, full round head)_
b) To take advantage of the performance of PVC trim, use a highly durable
fastener such as stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized.
c) Staples, small brads, and wire nails must not be used.
d) The fasteners should be long enough to penetrate the solid wood
substrate a minimum of 1 '/".
e) Standard nail guns work well with PVC products.
f) Like wood, use 2 fasteners per every framing member for trimboard
applications. Trimboards 12" or wider , as well as sheets, will require
additional fasteners.
g) Fasteners must be installed no more than 2" from the end of each board.
h) PVC should be fastened into a flat, solid substrate. Fastening PVC into
hollow or uneven areas must be avoided.
i) Pre -drilling is typically not required unless a large fastener is used or
product is installed in low temperatures.
j) 3/8" and '/2' sheet product is not intended to be ripped into trim pieces.
These profiles must be glued to a substrate AND mechanically fastened.
6. Painting:
a) PVC products do not require paint for protection, but may be painted to
achieve a custom color.
b) Use a 100% acrylic latex paint with a Light Reflective Value of 55 or
higher.
c) For paint colors equivalent to an LRV of 54 or lower, paints specifically
designed for such applications must be used, such as Sherwin-Williams
VinysafeTM coatings.
d) Follow the paint manufacturer's recommendations to apply.
e) No special surface preparations are required prior to painting -just ensure f`
the PVC surface is clean and dry.
7. Gluing:
a) For best results, glue all PVC to PV_C joints such as window surrounds,
long fascia runs, etc with PVC adhesive to prevent joint separation.
b) The glue joint should be secured with a fastener on either side of the 45
degree scarf joint. This provides the largest surface area to bond PVC to
PVC.
c) PVC adhesive has a working time of 10 minutes and is fully cured in 24
hours.
To bond PVC to other substrates, other adhesives may be used. Consult
adhesive manufacturer to determine suitability.
8. Spanning_
a) PVC products may not be used in load bearing applications, but may be
used in spanned applications such as soffits and ceilings.
b) For soffit installations:
For spans of 16"-24" use a 1x PVC product.
When using PVC beadboard, fasten every 12" or less.
Install PVC headboard perpendicular to structure.
c) For ceiling installations:
For spans of 16"-24" use a 1x PVC product.
When using PVC beadboard, fasten every 16" or less.
If temperature at the time of installation is 40 degrees or below,
spans need to be decreased to 12".
d) Never span PVC products more than 24".
06001-2
September 9, 2015
SECTION 06001
CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
e) Nail Hole (Filling: To fill nail holes and cover nail heads in PVC products,
use Trimbonder by Devcon. It is a 2 part adhesive, installed with a
traditional caulk gun. Trimbonder is available at all lumberyards and pro -
dealers WherePVC is sold. This product can also be used to bond PV_ _C_
to virtually any substrate, wood, metal, masonry,etc.
02.V Interior Wood Trim shall be #1 grade.
02.5 Optional Wood Framing (Only when approved by the Wawa Project Manager)
(A) Structural Framing and Walls to be #2 or better, Hem/Spruce/Fir, kiln dry.
(B) Stud Walls Space 3 '/2' studs 16" oc (metal optional) for partitions and 24" oc for
wall furring. Lumber and Stud grade, WWPA or WSPFA.
(C) Light Framing: Standard Grade.
(D) Blocking, Stripping, Grounds: Utility Grade WWPA or WSPFA.
02.R Sheathing: Shall be C-C xt—APA Exterior Grade, 5/8" thick minimum. Provide ply -clips
between sheets of roof sheathing, space as per APA requirements.
02.E Sheathing at Electrical Panel Location: Provide plywood panels or wall surfaces as
required by Electrical Contractor. Plywood to be painted gray, 2 coats, prior to installation
of electrical equipment.
02.0, Rough Hardware: Nails, spikes, nuts, bolts, ramset stud hangers, anchors, etc. as
required, galvanized cadre um -plated where exposed to the weather.
02.0 D-BLAZE Fire -Retardant Treated (FRT) Plywood: Use only where approved by local
building officials. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical
bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for
installation.
Manufacturer
Chemical Specialities, Inc. (CSI)
One Woodlawn Green
200 East Woodlawn Road, Suite 250
Charlotte, NC28217
Phone: 800-421-8661
Fax: 704-527-8232
02. Roof Pocket Fence — PVC Trimboards
Manufacturer
AzekTrimboards
801 Corey Street
Moosic, PA 18507
Phone: 866-549-6900
Website: www.azek.com
Palram Americas lnc.
9735 Commerce Circle 1.
06001-3
Kutztown, PA 19530
Phone: 610-285-9918
Website:
www. paliphttrimboard. corn
September 9, 2015
SECTION 06001
CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
02.For Remodels Only — SBX Pressure Treated Lumber
(A) Provide for mounting ': VAC equipment as required on Drawings
(B) Provide on all sill plates for bearing and partition walls.
06001-03 WORKMANSHIP
03.1 Provide for a minimum number of joints in running trim; bevel and join where these occur.
Miter external corners and cope interior angles. All miter joints; no butt joints.
03.2 Miter all soffit trim corners; no butt joints.
03.3 All finish work shall be sanded smooth to receive paint or stain. Set all nail heads for
putty.
03.4 All glue to be waterproof type.
03.5 Interior finish millwork shall not be brought into building until building is thoroughly dry.
Finishing work, if stored at the site, shall be in watertight sheds or placed in building.
END SECTION 06001
06001-2
September 9, 2015
06100-01 PRODUCTS
01.1 Lumber, General:
inspection agencies
Board of Review. I
grade stamp of insp(
(A) For exposed li
each piece, or
by inspection e
(B) Provide dry lumber
for 2-inch nominaltF
(C) Provide lumber
2-inch nominaltl
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
ply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of
Pied by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC)
le dressed lumber, S4S, with each piece factory marked with
agency.
furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of
trade stamps and provide grade -compliance certificates issued
19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing
zs or less, unless otherwise indicated.
15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for
;ss or less, unless otherwise indicated.
01.2 Wood -Preservative -Treated Materials: Comply with applicable requirements of
AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality
Mark Requirements of ar inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.
Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention
of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture
content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:
(A) Wood cants, nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with
roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
(B) Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
(C) Ext-CDX Exterior G
(D) Wood floor plates i
01.3 Dimensional Lumber:
Non -Load -Bearing Ps
species:
(A) Species: Hem -fir;
(B) Species: Pin
Plywood. Use P.T. plywood for first 48" above grade.
over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
e #1 grade dimensional lumber. For Framing Other than
Provide Construction or #2 grade and any of the following
WCLIB, or WWPA.
01.4 Remodel Stores Only: Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber
of any species for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop
equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, and similar
members. 1
01.5 Engineered Wood Product11 s: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which
current model code research or evaluation reports exist that evidence compliance with
building code in effect for Project. Provide engineered wood products with allowable
design stresses, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
06100-1
10-22-2012
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
(A) Parallel -Strand Lumber: Lumber manufactured by laying up wood strands using an
exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559, and cured under pressure to
produce members with grain of strands parallel to their lengths and complying with
the following requirements:
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending: 2900 psi (20 Maa) for 12-inch nominal-(286-
mm actual-) depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity: 2,000,000 psi (13 800 Mpa).
(B) Prefabricated Wood I -Joists: Units manufactured by bonding stress -graded lumber
flanges to wood -based structural -use panel webs with exterior -type adhesives
complying with ASTM D 2559, to produce I -shaped joists complying, with the
following requirements: Structural Capacities- Establish and monitor structural
capacities according to ASTM D 5055.
01.6 Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels: Provide either all -veneer, mat -formed, or composite
panels complying with DOC PS 2, "Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -
Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide plywood panels complying with
DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood," where
plywood is indicated.
(A) Trademark: Factory mark structural -use panels with APA trademark evidencing
compliance with grade requirements.
(B) Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to suit support spacing
indicated.
(C) Subflooring: APA-rated sheathing, Exposure 1.
(D) Wall Sheathing: APA-rated sheathing, Exposure 1
(E) Roof Sheathing: APA-rated sheathing, Exterior.
(F) Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide
fire -retardant -treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in
thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm)
thick.
01.7 Gypsum Sheathing Board Re: Section 09250.Water-resistant-core gypsum sheathing
board complying with ASTM C 79 with long edges surfaced with water-repellent paper,
thickness indicated, and as follows:
(A) Type: Regular.
(B) Type: X.
(C) Edge Configuration: V-shaped tongue -and -groove long edges, for horizontal
application.
(D) Edge Configuration: Square, for vertical application.
01.8 Air -Infiltration Barrier: DupontTyvek Commercial Wrap complying with ASTM E-1677
Type 1. Fasteners: Staples with 1 inch crown, cap nails or wrap cap fasteners shall be
used to secure Tyvek Commercial Wrap.
06100-2
10-22-2012
01.9 Fasteners: Where roug
of high relative humidity,
of Type 304 stainless stf
(A) Power -Driven
(B) Bolts: Steel bolts
Class 4.6); with A:
washers.
01.10 Metal Framing Anchors:
type, and size indicated
steel sheet complying wl
structural, commercial, c
anchor indicated.
01.11 Sill -Sealer Gaskets:
sill sealer; 1-inch
selected from manu-
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area
rovide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or
: CABO NER-272.
1plying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property
A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
'rovide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity,
nd as follows. Galvanized Steel Sheet - Hot -dip, zinc -coated
ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation;
lock -forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of
-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a
) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8mm);
s standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
01.12 Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APAAFG-01
that is approved for use vlrith type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and
panel manufacturers.
06100-02 EXECUTION
02.1 Set rough carpentry to
and fitted.
02.2 Fit rough carpentry to
Correlate location of i
attachment of other coi
02.3 Securely attach rough ca
with the following as appl
(A) CABO NER-272 for
(B) Published requ
uired levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
:r construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
g, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow
ction.
✓ work to substrate by anchoring and fastening, complying
for jurisdiction.
-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners.
of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
(C) "Recommended Naili , g Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's
"National Design Specifications for Wood Construction."
(D) "Table 2304.9.1 — Fastening Schedule" of ICC's International Building Code U.N.O.
02.4 Use hot -dip galvanized o stainless -steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to
weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity.
02.5 Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
02.6 Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
06100-3
10-22-2012
I
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
02.7 Installation of Structural -Use Panels: Comply with applicable recommendations
contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential &
Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated.
(A) Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing throughout.
2. Sheathing: Nail to framing.
3. Sheathing: Nail or staple to framing.
02.8 Air -Infiltration Barrier: Cover sheathing with air -infiltration barrier to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Apply air -infiltration barrier to cover upstanding
flashing with 4-inch (100-mm) overlap.
END SECTION 06100
06100-4
10-22-2012
07001-01 GENERAL
01.1 Samples: Submit metal i
ordering.
01.2 See Architectural
recommended inst
SECTION 07001
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
sample to the Wawa Project Manager for approval before
ngs and Metal Roof Manufacturer's Shop Drawings for
procedures.
02.1 Flat Roof Insulation: As per Section 07530.
02.2 Refer to section 07210 concerning all building insulation, properties and applicable
thermal resistance.
T
03.1 Flashing: Provide 0.020" aluminum. Install at door and window heads, window sills, cap
and base flashings. Edge strip angle at roof perimeters and at all roof projections
03.2 Plumbing Vents: Provide '0.020" prefabricated aluminum with flashing ring or 4 lb. lead
bent down into pipe %2'. All plumbing vents to be offset to appear through rear gable
only. No vents at front gable. At metal roof refer to ManufacturerStandards.
03.3 Gutters
A See section 07620.
03.4 Roof and Gutter Drains
(A) Porch Overhangs: Jay R. Smith,Roof Drain:
1. Model: No. 1340T.
2. Description: Cast iron body with combined flashing clamp and gravel stop, 8-1/2
inch diameter flange, low profile, and polyethylene dome.
(B) Gas Canopy: Smi�h, High Dome #1630T, Duco Cast Iron Body with Bronze
Flashing Clamp an Bronze Top Secured with Brass Screws.
Manufacturer
J.R. Smith Mfg., Co.
2781 Gunter Park Drive East
Montgomery, Alabama36109
Phone: 334-277-8520
Fax. 334-272-7396
03.5 Downspouts:
Klee section 07620
03.6 Boots:
(A) Provide cast iron boots by J.R. Smith, Wade or equal, or Schedule 80 PVC boots
at all exposed connections to below grade drainage. Verify with site plan and
coordinate transitions.
03.7 Finish: All exposed aluminum shall be white factory finish, unless otherwise noted on
Drawings.
07001-1
August 29, 2014
SECTION 07001
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
03.8 Building Metal Roof: See,section 07410.
03.10 Roof Ridge Vent: Supplied by Metal Roof Manufacturer. ,See section,074.10.
03.11 Soffit -Louver Strips: AV Continuous Soffit Vent, white painted aluminum, or equal.
Manufacturer
Air Vent, Inc
4801 North Prospect Road
Peoria Heights, IL61614
03.12 Underside of porch roof and gable overhang: See sectiori 07410.
03.13 Gas Canopy Metal Roof: Pre-engineered metal decking. See gas canopy documents and
architectural drawings for color; top face shall match building metal roof. Architect shall
approve color sample.
03.14 Gas canopy roofing submittals to be signed and sealed engineering documents by FOR
licensed in the state of Florida. Roof deck system to meet or exceed wind load
requirements as specified in the structural drawings. All clips and accessories to be
furnished by canopy roof manufacturer.
Manufacturer
Steeltec
Contact: Steve Binns 813-541-9781
07001-04 SEALANT MATERIALS
04.1 Sealant: Non -sagging polyurethane or polysulfide, #101 by Standard Products Co., PPG,
Dynatrol I or GC-9 Synthacalk by Pecora, to match adjacent surfaces.
04.2 Building Joint Locations: All joints in exterior walls at doors and storefront, thresholds,
windows, control joints, expansion joints openings where ducts, pipes or conduits
penetrate walls or partitions, at perimeter of wall mounted fixtures, interior door frames,
comers of ceramic tiles, and wherever else specifically noted on Drawings.
04.3 Canopy Joint Locations: Dow Corning 790 Building Sealant (silicon). See Section
05120-06.
07001-05 SILL PLATE GASKET
05.1 Exterior Stud Sills: Install Sill Plate. Gasket directly beneath all exterior studs
r,�uired to match stud size)
IB) Dow Chemical 'Styrofoam Sill Seal' Foam Gasket (8ti6} 583-2583
END OF SECTION 07001
07001-2
August 29, 2014
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
1.3
A. Section Includes:
1. Batt Insulation.Exterior walls
2. Board Insulation.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07840 - Firestopping:
2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board:
REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part
the text by the basic designation only.
Corning Eco-Touch R-30) Cathedral Kraft -faced 8.25 X 15.5 X 48"
'this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. ASTM C 578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
3. ASTM C 665 - Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
4. ASTM C 1289 - Faced Rigid CellularlPolyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
5. ASTM E 136 - Behavior of Materials l n a Vertical Tube furnace at 750 C..
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND
A. Transport, handle, store, and protect
recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide products from one of the following
1. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Fo
2. Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
3. Johns Manville Insulations, Denver,
4. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH (800)
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's
iufacturers as specified in the Materials paragraph below:
PA (800) 523-7844.
(800) 232-2436.
(877) 766-3295.
-7465.
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indi-
cated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface -burning characteristics and other methods
specified. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
MATERIALS J
A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665 mineral fiber blanket insulation.
1. Unfaced Glass Fiber: Type I (blankets without membrane facing); with maximum flame -spread and smoke -
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2. Faced, Glass -Fiber: Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane -faced surface with a
flame -spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced withvapor-retarder membrane on
1 face. 1
3. Sound Attenuation Insulation (Sound Batts): Unfaced glass fiber battinsulation as specified above.
4. Provide batt insulation by one of the following manufacturers:
August 2, 2012
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville.
C. Owens Corning.
B. Polyisocyanurate: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, foil facing both sides; square edges, with maximum flame -spread
and smoke -developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4
inches. Provide one of the following:
1. Super Tuff-R by Dow Chemical Company.
2. E'NRG'Y 3by Johns Manville.
3. As required by roofing manufacturer to achieve maximum performance and thermal resistance.
C. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01003-01.3
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape: Polyethylene or polyester self -adhering type; two inches wide.
B. Adhesive: Waterproof type, acceptable to manufacturer of insulation board. Adhesive VOC shall be within the limits of not
greater than 70 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Batt Insulation:
1. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation.
2. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested.
3. Vapor Barrier performance -Wrap kraft-faced tabs over metal studs and tape per 2.4-A.
B. Board Insulation:
1. Verify substrate and adjacent materials and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
2. Verify insulation boards are unbroken, free of damage.
3.2 INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION
A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, without gaps or voids.
B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of me-
chanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation.
C. Attach insulation in place to framing; tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Provide insulation types as scheduled below and as indicated on Drawings.
CONDITION
TYPE OF INSULATION
THICKNESS
Exterior Walls
Faced Owens Coming R-30 Eco-Touch
8-1/4 inches R-30 as shown;.
Interior Partitions
UnfacedBatt Insulation as noted onplans)
3-1/2 inches or 5-1/2 inches as Shown.
Sound Attenuation
UnfacedBatt Insulation as noted onplans)
3-1/2 inches or 5-1/2 inches as Shown.
August 2, 2012
SECTION 07250
WEATHER BARRIER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sheet applied weather barrier and related accessories for wall air/moisture barrier
system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05400 - Light Gage Metal Framing: Wall framing and bracing.
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and bracing.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing.
D. Section 07210 - Insulation: Exterior wall insulation.
E. Section 07460 - Siding: Wall finish and primary weather barrier.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) 127 - Water
Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-96 - Standard Test Methods
for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
C. American Society for Testling and Materials (ASTM) D1117 - Standard Guide for
Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3330 - Standard Test Method
for Peel Adhesion of Pressure -Sensitive Tape1.
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3759 - Standard Test Method
for Tensile Strength and Elongation of Pressure -Sensitive Tapes.
F. PSTC-1 - Peel Adhesion of Single Coated Pressure -Sensitive Tapes at 180 Degree
Angle.
G. TAPPI T-460 - Porosity - Gurley.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The airtight components apd secondary moisture protection of the building
enclosure and the joints, junctures and transitions between materials, products, and
assemblies forming the airrtightness and moisture barrier of the building enclosure
are called "the air/moisture barrier system". Services include coordination between
the trades, the proper scheduling and sequencing of the work, preconstruction
meetings, inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by
Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not
include contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect.
I
B. Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air/moisture barrier and paths of air
infiltration / exfiltration through the air/moisture barrier system shall be made
air -tight.
07250-1
January 10, 2012
SECTION 07250
WEATHER BARRIER
C. Moisture Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air/moisture barrier and paths j
of water migration through the air/moisture barrier system shall be made water -
shedding.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar
products.
B. Mock -Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation and sealing
techniques and application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by
Architect.
3. Repair mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Do not store in direct sunlight. Weather barrier shall be stored in a covered area. Do
not expose to building site chemicals.
C. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with
solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Anticipate environmental conditions and schedule installation when conditions are
within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install
products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing defects.
1.HardieWrap Weather Barrier and related products for 10 years.
2. Protecto Wrap standard 10 year limited warranty
3.WeatherTex-(2)-two years * eligible for 10 years when used in conjunction with
other Fortifiber products.
4.Tyvek-10 year limited warranty
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Protecto Wrap PW 100/40 Air Vapor barrier and flashing. Protecto Wrap Company
1955 S. Cherokee St. Denver, Co. 80223. Tel. 1 (800) 759-9727. www.Protecto
wrap.com
07250-2
January 10, 2012
SECTION 07250
WEATHER BARRIER
B.Dupont-Tyvek-Stucco Wrap -single ply.Tel.1 (800)-44-Tyvek. Email
www. Construction.Tyvek�com
2.2 WEATHER BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet:
1. Tyvek Stucco Wrap
2. Protecto Wrap PW 10(/40 (used on all exterior wall surfaces).
B. Self -adhering Flashing: Designed for peel and stick application.
1. Product Protecto Wrap
2. Composition: Butyl rubber hybrid adhesive. Protecto Wrap 100/40
C. Flexible Flashing:
1.) Product Tyvek Flashing
2.) Protecto 100/40 thru wall flashing
D. Seam Tape:
1.) Tyvek Seam tape
2.) Protecto Wrap Stucco super stick building tape
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Weather barrier shall be installed before window and door installation. Do not install
on saturated sheathing. Weather barrier can become slippery and should not be
used in any application whiere it may be walked on.
D. Weather barrier shall be installed on vertical wall applications only.
E. Manufacturer warrants weather barrier sheet only when covered within 180 days of
its installation.
i
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet:
07250-3
January 10, 2012
SECTION 07250
WEATHER BARRIER
1. Weather barrier shall be installed before window and door installation. Do not
install on saturated sheathing. Weather barrier can become slippery and
should not be used in any application where it may be walked on.
2. Begin by affixing weather barrier extending at least 6 inches (152 mm) around
a building corner. Unroll horizontally (with print side facing out) around the
building covering rough window and door openings.
3. Fasten to studs or nailable sheathing material with galvanized construction
grade staples a maximum of 18 inches (457 mm) in the vertical and horizontal
direction.
4. Attach weather barrier so that it is taut and flat. The vertical overlap shall have
a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) and the vertical seam shall be taped.
5. Assure that the bottom edge of the weather barrier extends over the sill plate
and foundation interface by at least 1 inch (25 mm).
6. Overlap upper layers of weather barrier (in shingle lap fashion) by a minimum
of 6 inches below the horizontal edge, and.tape the horizontal seam line.
7. At roof to wall intersection (or wall to deck), affix wrap to the wall such that it
overlaps any step flashing already in place on the wall by at least 2 inches (51
mm).
B. Flexible Flashing:
1. Windows and Doors: Weather barrier is not designed nor guaranteed as a
flashing material to prevent moisture or air from intruding behind weather
barrier. Verify that flashing has previously been installed around all windows
and door openings. Install flexible flashing per manufacturer's instructions.
a. Use the inverted "Y" cut method at rough window and door openings.
Do not place fasteners within 9 inches (229 mm) of the rough opening,
door or window heads. This area shall not be fastened to allow for
proper head flashing installation. At the top corners of the rough
opening, cut the weather barrier at 45 degree to extend 9 inches (229
mm) past the joint.
b. Fold the top flap up and out of the way and fasten temporarily.
C. Fold the remaining three flaps in through the opening fastening them
inside the opening with staples.
2. Rough Electrical and Plumbing Penetrations: Seal with a double layer of
flashing. Install the top flashing piece over the bottom flashing piece
overlapping flashing layers to cover flashing cut-out necessary for placement
around penetration.
C. Repairs: For minor punctures or tears, less than 3 inches (76 mm), cover and
completely seal with seam tape. For larger holes, greater than 3 inches (76 mm),
use slit flashing technique.
a. Slit flashing requires making a horizontal slit above the damaged area
and placing a cut piece of weather barrier into the slit, covering the
damaged area. Tape the perimeter of the patched area.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END SECTION 07250
07250-4
January 10, 2012
SECTION 07260
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
PRODUCTS SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION:
1. Vapor barrier and installation accessories for installation under concrete slabs.
RELATED SECTIONS:
1. Section 03 30 00
2. Section 07 26 00
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Tes
1. ASTM E1745- 11
in Contact with Si
2. ASTM E1643- 11
Retarders Used ii
B. Technical Reference - An
1. ACI 302.2R-06 G
Flooring Material:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality control/assurance:
1. Summary of test r
2. Manufacturer's sa
3. Manufacturer's in:
repair, and perime
4. All mandatory AS"
per ASTM E1745
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
i-Place Concrete
Retarders
ig and Materials (ASTM):
tandard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used
I or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
election, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor
Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
can Concrete Institute (ACI):
e for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture -Sensitive
ilts per paragraph 9.3 of ASTM E1745.
des and literature.
lation instructions for placement, seaming, penetration
seal per ASTM E1643.
E1745 testing must be performed on a single production roll
-tion 8.1.
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Vapor barrier shall have all of the following qualities:
1. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ftz • hr • inHg)] as tested in
accordance with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 Section 7.1
(7.1.1-7.1.5).
2. Other performance, criteria:
a. Strength: ASTM E1745 Class A.
b. Thickness: 151mils minimum
3. Provide third party documentation that all testing was performed on a single
production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1
B. Vapor barrier products: !
07260-1
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07260
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
1. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC.,
(877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com.
2. No substitutions.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Seams :
1. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com.
B. Penetrations of Vapor barrier:
1. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834
www.stegoindustries.com.
2. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com.
C. Perimeter/edge seal:
1. Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries LLC, (887) 464-7834
www.ste-goindustries.com.
2. Stego Term Bar by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834
www.ste.goindustries.com.
3. StegoTack Tape (double sided) by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834
www.stegoindustries.com.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that subsoil is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer.
1. Level and compact base material.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install vapor barrier in accordance ASTM E1643.
1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the
concrete placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the
placement whenever possible.
2. Extend vapor barrier to the perimeter of the slab. If practicable, terminate it at the
top of the slab, otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to the structural engineer or
(b) where obstructed by impediments, such as dowels, waterstops, or any other
site condition requiring early termination of the vapor barrier. At the point of
termination, seal vapor barrier to the foundation wall, grade beam or slab
itself.
a. Seal vapor barrier to the entire slab perimeter using Stego Crete
Claw, per manufacturer's instructions.
b. Seal vapor barrier to the entire perimeter wall or footing/grade
beam with double sided StegoTack Tape, or both Stego Term
Bar and StegoTack Tape, per manufacturer's instructions.
Ensure the concrete is clean and dry prior to adhering tape.
3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's seam tape.
4. Apply seam tape/Crete Claw to a clean and dry vapor barrier.
i
07260-2
September 9, 2015
5. Seal all pe
SECTION 07260
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
(including pipes) per manufacturer's instructions.
6. Avoid the use of nlon-permanent stakes driven through vapor barrier.
7. If non -permanent stakes are driven through vapor barrier, repair as
recommended bvivaoor barrier manufacturer.
8. Repair damaged
permeance, puncl
END OF SECTION 07260
s with vapor barrier material of similar (or better)
and tensile.
END OF SECTION
07260-3
September 9, 2015
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standing seam
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06100 -
2. Section 7620
rainwear:
1.2 REFERENCES
SECTION 07410
METAL ROOF PANELS
it roofing () and accessories.
� terilseled a d half vefft
h Carpentry: Plywood roof sheathing.
t metal flashing and-trim__Roof edges,. copings, fascia, and
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil
Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc -Aluminum Coated
Steel Substrates.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A 792 - St el Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip
Process.
2. ASTM A 653 — Stee Sheet, Aluminum -Zinc Alloy coated by the hot dip method
3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
4. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and
plate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01003-05.
B. Florida Product Approvals: For products, components and assemblies for which Florida
product approval is specified, submit Miami -Dade County NOA or Florida Building Control
product approval showing compliance with the requirements of the Florida Building Code.
Shop drawings_as required.for weathertight warranty:
D. Closeout Submittals: Com ly with the requirements of Section 01002-10.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with
minimum 5 years documented experience certified by sheet metal roofing manufacturer as
an "Approved Installer."
B. Manufacturer Qualifications; Company specializing in _manufacturing, products specified in
this section, in business a _minimum_ of 35 years.
C. Panels shall be factory -produced only. No portable, installer -owned or installer rented
machines will be permitted.
07410-1
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07410
METAL ROOF PANELS
D. Florida Building_ Code_ (FBC) Requirements:
J. Provide roof systems .that have Miami -Dade County Product Control Notice of
- -- -- --
Acceptance (NOA) or Florida Building Code (FBC) Product.Approval'.to meet the
iegunicements of the o-pent Florida Building Berle a neGessaFy to nh#vi'n n mi4o
2. Provide roof systems approved for design pressures calculated in accordance with
the Florida Building Code bearing FBC Product Approval numbers or Miami -Dade
N OA.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of
Section 01600.
B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to
provide ventilation. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job site storage,
handling, and protection.
C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining.
D. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage or traffic
on completed roof surfaces.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's 20 year standard warranty against failure due to corrosion, rupture,
or perforation. -
B. Provide manufacturer's 30
- year standard standar- d warranty_ against chipping, cracking, and fading
of of the paint -system,
C. Provide manufacturer's 20 Year Weathertightness Limited Warranty.
1. Warranty shall cover material and installation of all roofing- materials and related
flashing and guttering:- __
2. _ Minimum two inspections are required; one before installation of metal_ r_oofing
�systern starts and one after substantial completion of metal roofing system;
3_ _ Provide_ inspector's final report toowner prior to contract- close out.
D. Applicator shall furnish written warranty for a two (2) year period from date of substantial
completion of building, covering repairs required to maintain roof and flashings in watertight
condition.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to requirements, provide products by the following blanufacturers.,
1. ATAS -International, Inc., Allentown, PA 800-468 1441.
2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation, Acworth GA. 800&-2-4482.
2.2 PRODUCTS
A_ Standing Seam Metal Roof Panel: Minimum 18" wide standing seam roofing panel with
integral. -locking seam_ and stiffening ribs, factory fabricated out of 0.032" aluminum.
07410-2
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07410
METAL ROOF PANELS
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat PVDF_ paint system_ ; _ equal_ to__ATA_ S'
Coppertone or as indicatedon drawings.
2. Factory fabricated out of 0.032" a_lu_m__ inu_m_ _.
3. Approved products: _
a. ATAS Intern tional, Inc., MRD194 panel.`
b, _ Petersen Aluminum Corporation, Snap Ciad-18" wide panel.
B. Sofft - solid and vented pi
fabricated out of 0.032" alp
Approved Products
a. Approved .prc
b. Approved prc
2. Finish: Manufactur(
White, or as indicate
2.3 ACCESSORIES
s, 12" wide with a v-groov_e in the middle of the panel, factory.
uct: ATAS International,, Inc., MPS.120, solid and vented.
uct: Petersen Aluminum Products, Pac-850, solid and vented.
s standard 2-coat PVDF paint system; Equal to ATAS' Bone
I on drawings.-- - _ - -
A. Provide manufacturer's st ndard accessories and other special items required for sheet
metal roof system installation. Provide accessories with same finish and color as sheet
metal roofing.
1. Trim Items: Minimu .12'_long.to minimize joints; same material and finish as roofing
panels. - —
2. Fasteners: Recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended purpose.
3. Panel clips: stainless steel, provided by panel manufacturer.
4. Panel accessories: provided by panel manufacturer, same material and trim as
panels_where _appropriate.
5. Mastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Sealants: Color coordinated primerless silicone, or high grade, non-drying butyl
recommended by panel manufacturer.
B. Underlayment:
1.
Polyethylene/Rubberize
adhering underlaym
nt.
Cambridge, MA.
2.
Tamko TW Tile and
Mei
3.
Carlisle CCW WIP 300E
4.
Interwrap Titanium__PS_U
5. _ ____High_
temperature
pot,
Underlayment, 40-mil_r_r
panel manufacturer.'
Asphalt: Polyethylene sheet with rubberized asphalt self -
Grace Ice & Water Shield manufactured by W.R. Grace,
Underlayment
Ilene sheet with rubberized asphalt self -adhering
um thickness, as recommended by the _metal roofing
07410-3
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07410
METAL ROOF PANELS
C. Use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction. Exposed fasteners in panels
not permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that
surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Broom clean substrate surfaces immediately before starting installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet metal roofing and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published
instructions.
B. Dissimilar Metals: Back paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials.
C. Underlayment:.
1. Polyethylene/ Rubberized Asphalt (Ice and Water Shield): or previously listed
approved products. Apply below all roof panelsunless otherwise shown. Install ice
and water shield over entire sheathing surface. beneath roof panels. Apply in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Metal Roof System:
1. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and
recommendations and as defined under this Section.
- -- -----_ --
2. c Install panels.so that they run ont_inn,-uously,----- - from eave----- to-- ridge., -- .-- Horizontal.pa--- --- - riel--- joints- -
are not permitted.
3. Anchor securely in place using stainless steel clips and fasteners spaced in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for design wind load criteria.
Fasteners driven into metal deck shall be of the length required to penetrate deck a
minimum of 3/4 inch. Fasteners used to attach metal roof panels directly to purlins
shall be of length recommended by manufacturer.
a. Install per FPA, NOA and project specific structural calculations and design
pressure requirements
4. Fully seat adjacent panel to achieve continuous engagement of standing seam joint.
5. Align panel seams at ridge locations.
6. At perimeters and high velocity wind zones:
a.ATAS panels: Use the same panels used for _the field of the roof._ Decrease
_'clip spacing as noted on shop drawings
Petersen panels: Use 16" wide panels factory fabricated --out _o_ f
0.040"aluminum._ Clip spacing as noted on shop -drawings.
07410-4
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07410
METAL ROOF PANELS
E. Soffit Panels' _
1. Install accordin to manufacturer's standard directions. _
Install one solid panel andthen one vented_ panel, repeating the pattern.ov_er the_
entire installation arpa:
3.4
A.
B.
C.
3.5
A.
CLEANING
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by
metal roof panel manufact rer.
Clean exposed surfaces oi Work 24 hours prior to date of Substantial Completion.
PROTECTION
Provide protection and maintain manufacturer's recommended conditions to prevent
damage of deterioration of �heet metal roofing system until date of Substantial Completion.
END SECTION 07410
07410-5
September 9, 2015
(James Hardie
SECTION 07461
SIDING
1Z10 Engineered for Climate Siding)
SECTION 07461
SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fiber cement lap siding, panels, single, trim, fascia, moulding and accessories,
James Hardie HZ10 Engineered for Climate Siding.
B. Factory -finished fiber cement lap siding, panels, single, trim, fascia, moulding and
accessories, James Hard a HZ10 Engineered for Climate Siding.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05400 - Light G Iage Metal Framing: Wall framing and bracing.
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and bracing.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing.
D. Section 07210 - Insulation: Exterior wall insulation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C1186 - Standarc I Specification for Flat Fiber -Cement Sheets
B. ASTM D3359 - Standard est Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Tool
and Tape.
C. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube
Furnace at 750 degrees G.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01003-05.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of atypical non-standard applications of
cementitious siding materials which are outside the scope of the standard details
and specifications provided by the manufacturer.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color
chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum
size 4 by 6 inches (100 by 150 mm), representing actual product, color, and
patterns.
07461-1
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07461
SIDING
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,.
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar
products.
B. Mock -Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques
and application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store siding on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and
corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.
C. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with
solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Limited, non -pro -rated product warranty.
1.
HardiePlank HZ10 lap siding for 30 years.
2.
HardiPanel HZ10 vertical siding for 30 years.
3.
HardieSoffit HZ10 panels for 30 years.
4.
HardieShingle HZ10 siding for 30 years.
5.
Artisan HZ10 lap siding for 30 years.
B. Product Warranty: Limited, product warranty.
1. HardieTrim HZ10 boards for 15 years.
C. Finish Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing finish defects.
1. When used for its intended purpose, properly installed and maintained
according to James Hardie's published installation instructions, James
Hardie's ColorPlus finish with ColorPlus Technology, for a period of 15 years
from the date of purchase: will not peel; will not crack; and will not chip.
Finish warranty includes the coverage for labor and material.
D. Workmanship Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
07461-2
September 9, 2015
2.1
2.2
SECTION 07461
SIDING
MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: James Hardie Building Products, Inc., which is located at:
26300 La Alameda SuiteI400 ; Mission Viejo, CA 92691; Toll Free Tel:
866-274-3464; Tel: 949-367-4980; Email: request info (info(a).iameshardie.com);
Web: www.lameshardiecommercial.com
B. Substitutions: Not perm`tted.
C. Requests for approval ofequal substitutions will be considered in accordance with
provisions of Section 01003.
SIDING
A. Artisan HZ10 lap siding III requirement for Materials:
1. Fiber -cement Siding - complies with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade Il.
2. Fiber -cement Sidi r g - complies with ASTM E 136 as a noncombustible
material.
3. Fiber -cement Siding - complies with ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index = 0,
Smoke Developed Index = 5.
4. Warnock Hersey Product Listing.
5. CAL -FIRE, Fire Engineering Division Building Materials Listing - Wildland
Urban Interface (WIUI) Listed Product.
6. Florida State Product Approval FL10477.
7. Miami Dade County, Florida Notice of Acceptance 12-0517.05.
8. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation EC-55.
9. Manufacturer's Te hnical Data Sheet.
B. Lap Siding: Artisan HZ10 Lap Siding as manufactured by James Hardie Building
Products, Inc.
1. Type: Smooth 8-1 /4 inches (210 mm) with 7 inches (178 mm) exposure.
C. Trim:
1. Artisan HZ10 Accent trim as manufactured by James Hardie Building
Products, Inc.
07461-3
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07461
SIDING
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Wood Framing Fasteners:
�1) IVOT_USED
B. Metal F
2. Metal Framing: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) No. 8-1-8 by 0.323 inch (8.2 mm) head
self -drilling,_ corrosion resistant S-12 ribbed buglehead screws.
o+ol ❑rominn• 1 innh (25 FnFn) No. R_18 by 0 323 ' h /Q 7 -- -- \
_ I a.. v ry--a�-.vz�-T^v'rC�c-n�m�-rTca�r
elf .dFilling, 66taR+ .ihhed b rl gleheoo
._ __ fl
"-,Metal FFaFnin• 1 innh 25 rnm\ No. 8_113 by 0.311 innh (7 nm 9 m).d heocelf_rdrilliRg n is+en+ 24'7 ribbed hu glehea d G
is Metal FFaF.ing; 1.5 iRGh (38FAFR) [AGS 100] 100 inches by 25 innhe§ MGA/l.
inmby R2�. mm\ CTJt.C'Din a .�fen i+ nne� �m.�+in fas+er,e. —�-�-- ---...--'----
C. Masonry Walls (CMU):
1. Masonry Walls: Aerico Stud Nail, ET&F ASM No.-144-125, 0.14 inch (3.6
mm) shank by 0.30 inch (7.6 mm) head by 2 inches (51 mm) long corrosion
resistant nails.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer.
1. Primer: Factory primed by James Hardie.
2. Topcoat: Refer to Section 09900 and Exterior Finish Schedule.
B. Factory Finish: Refer to Exterior Finish Schedule.
1. Product: ColorPlus Technology by James Hardie.
2. Definition: Factory applied finish; defined as a finish applied in the same
facility and company that manufactures the siding substrate.
3. Process:
a. Factory applied finish by fiber cement manufacturer in a controlled
environment within the fiber cement manufacturer's own facility utilizing
a multi -coat, heat cured finish within one manufacturing process.
b. Each finish color must have documented color match to delta E of 0.5
or better between product lines, manufacturing lots or production runs
as measured by photospectrometer and verified by third party.
4. Protection: Factory applied finish protection such as plastic laminate that is
removed once siding is installed
5. Accessories: Complete finishing system includes pre -packaged touch-up kit
provided by fiber cement manufacturer. Provide quantities as recommended
by manufacturer.
C. Factory Finish Color for Trim, Soffit and Siding Colors:
1. Arctic White JH10-20.: Trim
2. Harris Cream JH80-10.: Siding
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
07461-4
September 9, 2015
A. Do not begin installation
SECTION 07461
SIDING
substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C. Nominal 2 inch by 4 inc
shrinkage and complyin
water -resistive barriers
mm) face and straight, i
1. Install water-resi:
2. Repair any punct
installation of the
3. Protect siding fro
D. Minimum 20 gauge 3-&
gauge 3-5/8 inches (92
framing complying with
barriers and/or vapor bE
and straight, true, of unl
1. Install water-resi;
2. Repair any punct
installation of the
3. Protect siding fro
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
(51 m by 102 mm) wood framing selected for minimal
with local building codes, including the use of
vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38
ie, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned.
ve barriers and claddings to dry surfaces.
-es or tears in the water -resistive barrier prior to the
other trades.
inch (92 mm) C-Stud 16 inches maximum on center or 16
m) C-Stud 24 inches (610 mm) maximum on center metal
gal building codes, including the use of water -resistive
iers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face
rm dimensions and properly aligned.
/e barriers and claddings to dry surfaces.
es or tears in the water -resistive barrier prior to the
ding.
other trades.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
Prepare surfaces using tile methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
Install a water -resistive b,
requirements.
The water -resistive barrie
junction flashing in accorc
Protecto Wrap PW 100/4(
1955 S. Cherokee St. Der
wrap.com
Use Seam Tape and joint
Install Flex Flashing
Dupont-Tyvek-Stucco WrE
www. Construction.Tvvek. i
is required in accordance with local building code
must be appropriately installed with penetration and
ince with local building code requirements.
Air Vapor barrier and flashing. Protecto Wrap Company
✓er, Co. 80223. Tel. 1 (800) 759-9727. www.Protecto
laps
p-single ply. Tel.1 (800)-44-Tyvek. Email
3.3 INSTALLATION - HARDIEPLANK HZ10 LAP SIDING AND ARTISAN HZ10 LAP SIDING
A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Starting: Install a minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick lath starter strip at the bottom
course of the wall. Apply planks horizontally with minimum 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)
wide laps at the top. The bottom edge of the first plank overlaps the starter strip.
07461-5
j September 9, 2015
SECTION 07461
SIDING
C. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Align vertical joints of the planks over framing members.
E. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
F. Locate splices at least one stud cavity away from window and door openings.
G. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required Hardieplank
lap siding is installed to framing members and secured with fasteners described in
Table No. 2 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405.
H. Locate splices at least 12 inches (305 mm) away from window and door openings.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Finish unprimed siding with a minimum one coat high quality, alkali resistant primer
and one coat of either, 100 percent acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade
topcoats or two coats high quality alkali resistant 100 percent acrylic or latex,
exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's
written product recommendation and written application instructions.
B. Finish factory primed siding with a minimum of one coat of high quality 100 percent
acrylic or latex or oil based exterior grade paint within 180 days of installation.
Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application
instructions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END SECTION 07461
07461-6
September 9, 2015
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. EPDM Membrane Roofing
3. TPO Membrane Roofing Sys
4. Flashing Membrane.
5. Waterproofing Membrane.
6. Roof insulation: Poly Isocyan
7. Repair and maintenance of tl
B. Related Sections:
1.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpe
2.
Section 07620 - Sheet Meta
flashings, and other sheet mel
3.
Section 07001 — Thermal and
4.
Section 07720 — Roof Access(
5.
Section 07920 - Joint Sealers.
1.2 REFERENCES
SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
ite board.
roof after roof installation until store grand opening.
:ry: Wood blocking and nailers.
Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal fascia and edge trim, counter
I.
loisture Protection
A. The publications listed below form a (part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced within the text by the basic designation only.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
2. ASTM D 4637 - EPDM Sheet UI sed In Single -Ply Roof Membrane.
3. ASTM D 4434 - Polyvinyl Chlo ide Sheet Roofing.
4. ASTM D 6878 - Thermoplastic IPolyolefin Based Sheet Roofing.
C. Factory Mutual Research Corporatioi
1. FM Approvals Building Mate
Assemblies
2. FM Global Loss Prevention DE
3. FM Global Loss Prevention
Components.
4. FM Approval Standard 4450 -
5. FM Approval Standard 4470 -
(FM):
als Approval Guide, Chapter 3 - Approved Combinations and
a Sheet 1-28 - Design Wind Loads.
Data Sheet 1-29 -Roof Deck Securement and Above -Deck
1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs.
1 Roof Covers.
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory.
2. UL 790 - Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials.
3. UL 1256 - Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Single PI Membrane Roofin S stem_ Single I membrane roofing system consisting of insulation on
_ _.. g Y 9 Y ,9 ply 9 Y 9
metal deck with 60 mil {49-a#erFS sayr� reinforced membrane mechanically fastened.
B. Flashing and Waterproofing Membranes: 60 mil reinforced membrane, fully
adhered, as defined herein and indicated on the drawings.
1.4 RECORD SUBMITTALS
j07530-1
December 31, 2015
SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01002-4
B. Product Data: Provide characteristics on membrane materials, flashing materials, and insulation.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required for seaming the
membrane.
D. Manufacturer's Field Reports:
E. Reports: Indicate procedures followed; ambient temperatures, humidity, and wind velocity during
application.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
1. System Experience:
a. Contractor shall be authorized installer or licensed contractor for the roofing system'
manufacturer, as defined by the roof system manufacturer, for one year prior to the bid
date.
b. Contractor shall have installed a minimum of three projects using the specified roofing
system within the past three years.
B. Qualifications of Applicator:
1. Logistical Experience: Contractor shall have installed a minimum of ten roofing projects of the
same or similar scope with a minimum of 5,000 SF in size within the last three years.
2. System Experience:
a. Contractor shall have been trained by and shall be an authorized installer or licensed
contractor for the roofing system manufacturer, as defined by the roof system
manufacturer, for one year prior to the bid date. , -
b. Contractor shall have installed a minimum of three projects using the specified roofing
system within the past year.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
2. Factory Mutual Engineering & Research Corporation (FM): Roof Assembly classification, of Class
1 Construction, wind uplift requirement minimum of 1 90, in accordance with FM Construction
Bulletin 1-28 or local jurisdiction, whichever is greater.
D. Pre -installation Conference:
1. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.
2. Review installation procedures and coordination required roof openings with relating Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.
C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Follow industry standards for environment requirements including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather.
2. Do not apply finished roofing system to wet, damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is
occurring.
3. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed during same day. _
07530-2
December 31, 2015
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULINGI
A. Contractor shall coordinate the Wol
under other sections as the Work of
B. Contractor shall complete
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide Twenty year (20) Full
B. Warranty: Cover damage resulting
SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
with installation of associated metal counter flashings specified
s Section proceeds.
of base flashing at roof curbs prior to setting roof top equipment.
warranty under provisions of Section 01002-10
failure to prevent penetration of water.
C. Date of warranty to commence at date of building Substantial Completion. No "Early Release of
Warranty" will be accepted by building owner.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject
Manufacturers are considered acce
1.
Versico Roofing Systems N.
2.
Johns Manville Roofing Systi
3.
Durolast Roofing, Inc. (800)
4.
Carlisle SynTec (800) 479-&
5.
Firestone (800) 428-4442
6.
GAF Inc. (973-628-3000'
B. ROOFING SYSTEMS
1. Single Ply EPDM Membrane F
a. Versigard,_ by Versico
1) O_utside HVHZ Or
b. Sure -Seal Mechanically.
1) Florida (FBC) Prc
C. EPDM_ , by Firestone _
1 Outside HVHZ: FI
2) Miami -Dade Cou
07/27/13)
compliance with the physical properties listed below, the following
ible to provide the specified Roofing System:
^_ (800) 992-7663
s (800) 654-3103
FBC Pi&dud Control Number: FL1616.1 dated 05 March 2015
,tened Roofing System, by Carlisle.
t Control Number: FL1601.1 dated 20 March 2008.
C_Pr_oduct Control Number: FL10284.1 dated 08 April _2015
ty Product Control Notice of Acceptance: 08-0324.06 (Expires
2. Single Ply TPO Membrane Roofing
TPO-Roofing System, by Johns -Manville. _ _
1) _ _ Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL11475.1 dated 30 April 2015.
2) Inside-HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number FL16758.1 dated 29 April 2015
b. Vers_ iweld, by Versico. 7 _ - -- --- - - -- - - -- - - - - - - - -
1) Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number FL14207.1 dated 20 March 2068
2) Inside_ HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number, FL16443.1 dated 20 April 2015
C. Ultraply TPO by Firestone
1) Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL10264.1 dated 09 April 2015
______2) Inside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL15894.1_dated 02 July 2015
d.__ _ Everguard TPO by GAF
1) Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL5293.1 dated 14 April 2015
2) Inside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL16730.1 dated 15 April 2015
07530-3
December 31, 2015
SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
2.2 MEMBRANE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
A. EPDM: Cured, synthetic single -ply membrane composed of Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
(EPDM) and reinforced with a polyester scrim conforming to ASTM D 4637
1. Membrane Type: Type Il, reinforced, 60 mil thickness, white.
B. TPO: Thermoplastic single ply membrane composed of thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) sheet as
specified for the specific product hereinbefore and reinforced with polyester scrim conforming to ASTM
D 6878.
1. Membrane Type: Reinforced, 60 mil thickness, white.
2.3 FLASHING MEMBRANE
A. Flashing Membrane: Reinforced and non -reinforced_ membrane and pressure -sensitive flashing by
Roofing System manufacturer, minimum 60 mils, ( __ ._' ___ ______ _plypply specifically designed for use in
flashing at perimeters and wall, and around projections through roofing system.
2.4 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Waterproofing Membrane: Membrane waterproofing formed into uniform, flexible sheets by Roofing
System manufacturer. Reinforced, 60 mils _ nominal thickness.
B. Waterproofing Flashing: Reinforced and non -reinforced membrane_ and pressure -sensitive flashing by
Roofing System manufacturer, minimum 60 mils' ,specifically designed for use in
flashing at perimeters and wall, and around projections through roofing system.
2.5 ROOF INSULATION - MANUFACTURERS
A. E'nrg'y 3 roof insulation (R=40) as manufactured by Johns Manville.
B. Super Tuff-R roof insulation (R-40) as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company
C. As required by roofing manufacturer to achieve maximum performance and thermal resistance
2.6 ANCHORAGE MATERIALS
A. Seam Plates: As recommended by membrane manufacturer for roofing system.
2.7 ADHESIVE MATERIALS
A. Surface Conditioner: Compatible with membrane.
B. Membrane Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
C. Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet membrane.
2.8 FLASHINGS
A. Flexible Flashings: Same material as membrane; manufactured by membrane supplier.
07530-4
December 31, 2015
B. Roof Accessories: As specified in
2.9 ACCESSORIES
07800-FL.
SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Seam Plates: As recommended by T embrane manufacturer for roofing system.
B. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit application.
C. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by Factory Mutual and system
manufacturer; length required for thickness of material with washers.
D. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
E. Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized
flanges.
F.Y _ . _ ,Traffic Surfacing: Flexible walkway
shall be the heaviest weight availab
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditi
B. Verify deck is supported and tightly
C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, fi
valleys, and eaves. Verify flutes
substrate surface shall be reported
maximum possible lengths per location, with attachment
ids as compatible with roofing system as indicated on plans. Pads__
from_the manufacturer.
s are ready to receive work.
of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains,
steel deck are evenly spaced at intersections. Defects in the
i documented.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of water, snow, and ice.
E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips,
nailing strips, and reglets are in place
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide covers and other means of protection as necessary to protect building surfaces against damage
during roofing work.
B. Where Work shall continue over fi
3.3 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION
roof membrane, protect surfaces from damage.
A. Place long edge of boards parallel to'I deck flutes, forming joint over solid bearing. Lay insulation units
with long edge joints continuous and end joints staggered. Mechanically fasten insulation for
N.O.A./F.P.C. wind uplift resistance to deck with FM approved fasteners and plates in accordance with
requirements of FM.
1. Install fasteners using drill with torque clutch; other types of drills will not be permitted.
2. In no case shall the number of fasteners be less than indicated in approved submittals.
B. Lay insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit neatly around
protrusions through roof. At parapet walls, cope insulation around protrusions and embed plates; butt
tight to wall, sealing conditioned building.
1. Fill gaps over 1/4 inch wide with Foam Filler Insulation. After foam sets and before installation of
07530-5
December 31, 2015
SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
membrane, trim foam flush with insulation surface.
C. Place roof crickets and tapered insulation to required slope pattern in accordance with Contract
Documents and manufacturer's instructions.
D. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day.
E. Adhere a single layer of insulation to manufactured metal curbs with bonding cement.
3.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Mechanically Fastened Membrane:
1. Starting at low point of roof surface, run membrane perpendicular to roof slope. Unroll membrane
over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Mechanically fasten membrane using manufacturer's fastening system. Install fasteners in
accordance with submitted engineered layout pattern to resist specified wind uplift.
3. Install fasteners using drill depth sensing or torque limiting screw guns to limit under / over drive
of fasteners.
a. Drill motors and other non -limiting drivers shall not be used.
4. Seam Sealing
a. EPDM: Seal seams where fasteners and seam plates are used with EPDM 6-inch seam
tape. Seal seams without seam plates with EPDM 3-inch in -seam tape as approved by the
system manufacturer.
b. TPO Heat -weld seams according to the system manufacturer's recommendations, and with
a minimum weld width of 1-1/2 inches.
Rd
B. Cold Weather Application Procedures: When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F,
follow Cold Weather Application Procedures as follows:
1. Store materials in heated storage units prior to installation. Rotate adhesive, cement, and sealant
containers to maintain their temperature above 40 degrees F.
2. Allow membrane to relax until no wrinkles are visible and restrict work to sunny days.
3. Allow adequate time for solvents in cements to flash off. Check dryness of applied cements
before sealing joints.
4. Verify that frost, dew, and other forms of moisture have evaporated prior to covering insulation
with membrane to prevent entrapment of moisture within finished roof system.
3.5 WATER CUTOFFS AND WEATHER PROTECTION
A. Install water cut-offs at end of day's operation to seal insulation and edge of roof membrane from
moisture entry. If inclement weather appears imminent during roofing application, cease operations and
protect deck, insulation, flashings, penetrations and membrane from moisture infiltration with water
cutoffs. Insulation and roofing materials not so protected prior to inclement weather will be considered
damaged and will be cause for rejection.
B. Remove water cut-offs and other temporary weather protections prior to continuing roofing work.
Remove materials that have been subject to moisture damage and return deck to a clean, dry condition
before proceeding with roofing operations. Remove damaged materials from job site.
C. The water cut-offs and weather protection shall not be considered a part of the final roof system
specified.
3.6 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES
r
A. Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements using manufacturer's standard peel and
07530-6
December 31, 2015
stick flashing.
1. Reinforced Flashing Membrc,
reinforced flashing membrane
2. Uncured Flashing: Limit use
changes, to flash inside and
shaped walls as approved by
SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
Where conditions permit, flash penetrations and walls with
F uncured flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle
outside corners, scuppers, and other penetrations or unusually
ie manufacturer.
B. Roof Penetrations:
1. Molded Pipe Flashing: Install where configuration of penetration will permit.
2. Urethane Rubber Seal System: Install where molded pipe flashing cannot be installed due to
configuration of penetration. Install at locations shown including electrical penetrations, camera
mount conduits, gas line penetrations, flues, and satellite dish location.
a. Install per manufacturers application instructions.
C. Secure to nailing strips and reglets at 4 inches o.c.
D. Fasten termination bars at 12 incheslon center or less to maintain constant compression.
E. Coordinate installation of rooftop equipment and related fleshings.
F. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane.
G. Install walkway pads minimum of 6W wide, not more than 2 inches from curbs and not more than 3/8
inches between pads. See plan for location. Adhere pads to roofing system to prevent displacement in
maximum anticipated design wind VElocity and to allow drainage of moisture from beneath pads. Install
pads to allow roof surface drainage without ponding water. Install pads after adjacent equipment
installation.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of the applied warranty.
B. Correct identified defects or irregularities.
3.8 CLEANING
A. In areas where finished surfaces are
cleaning advice and conform to their
B. Correct identified defects or irregu
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against dar
B. Where construction traffic must ci
recommended by roofing system ma
3.10 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
by Work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for
ented instructions.
e from roofing work.
nue over finished roof installation, protect roof surfaces as
acturer to protect manufacturer's warranty.
CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall maintain the entire roofing system and related work from the time of roofing
completion until issuance of Certificate of Occupancy. Maintenance shall consist of repair of material or
installation defects or damage resulting from any subsequent work on the roof or from any weather
related damage. Maintenance shall be to maintain the roof system in a watertight condition including
repair of conditions that show signs of inferior workmanship that may result in potential leaks. Leaks
occurring during the maintenance shall be repaired in accordance with good roofing practice and the
07530-7
December 31, 2015
SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
requirements specified herein. The Contractor shall remove and replace all wet insulation caused by
water leaks and repair the Roofing System.
END OF SECTION 07530
07530-8
December 31, 2015
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the followi g:
reglets
1. Formed roof drainage system.
2. Formed wall flashing and Trim.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each prc
B. Shop Drawings: Show I,
fastening, joining, supportir
C. Samples: For each type of
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and l
Metal Manual." Conform
requirements are indicated.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
luct indicated.
outs, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for
, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim.
heet metal flashing and trim upon request of the Architect.
rim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.;
i
a . ATAS_International,_Inc.,-Allentown, PA. 1-800-468-14- -
b Petersen Aluminum Corp. Acworth GA. 800-272-4482.
I. Identify as is Wawa project and state where you are located for pricing.
2.2 SHEET METALS
07620-1
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
MIMI" MIN
110 IN
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for
forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows:
Mill Finish: Standard one -side bright.
Factory Prime Coating: Factory -applied, baked -on epoxy primer coat.
High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat, thermocured system containing not less
than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604.
a. Color: Match Architect's samples
4. Clear Anodic Finish: Class II, AA-M12C22A31, complying with AAMA 611.
B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, No. 2D finish.
C.Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume Plus): ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50
coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural
quality with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating both sides.
D. Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip process
and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1.Aluminum-Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural
quality.
2.Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating:
a. Factory Prime Coating: Factory -applied, baked -on epoxy primer coat.
b. High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat thermocured system
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by
weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance
requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified for below:
1) Humidity and Salt Spray Resistance: 1000 hours.
2) Color: Match Architect's samples
E. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper -bearing lead sheet.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete
sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt, non -
perforated.
07620-2
September 9, 2015
C. Fasteners: Provide _stain@
screws, self-locking rivets
design loads.
1. Nails for Copper Shee
and not less than 7/8 in
2. Exposed Fasteners: H
factory -applied coating.
3. Fasteners for Flashing
hex washer head.
4. Blind Fasteners: Hioh-:
D. Sealing Tape: Pressure
tape with release -paper
staining tape.
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
3s _steel wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping
ind bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand
Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) minimum
(22 mm) long, barbed with large head.
is matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or
Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with
aluminum or stainless -steel rivets.
ve, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing
g. Provide permanently elastic, non -sag, nontoxic, non-
E. Elastomeric Sealant: AST I M C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classi ications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim
and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer:
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold
dry film thickness per coat.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound.
asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain
field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in the Work
cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch
deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet
metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
07620-3
September 9, 2015
2.6
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored i
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being
secured.
2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated,_complete_with.end_ pieces,. outlet
tubes, and other accessories as re-quired:
- - I ---- -- - - - _ - -
1. Material and finish: 0.032" aluminum, bright -clear anodized.
2. Size and style: 6"
3. Length: Fabricate in min. 25'-0`' sections. _
4. - Furnish flat -stock gutter spacers and brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters,
of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness.____,__
5. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion -joint covers,. gutter bead reinforcing bars,_ and
gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
B___ Downspouts (Building Perimeter)_ - Fabricate_to- cross- section indicated,_ comp- te_with
mitered elbows:
'I. - Material: 22 gauge stainless steel
2. Size and style: 4" diameter round.
3. Length: Fabricate in 10' sections.
4. Furnish with metal hangers,, from- same- material_as downspouts,, arid,anchors.
C'. Downspouts (Tower Roof Only)
mitered elbows.: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with
- - ---- - -
5. Materi61:.032 aluminum
6. Size and style: 4" diameter round.
7. Length: Fabricate in 10' sections.
8_ Furnish with metal hangers,_from same material -as downspouts,_ and anchors.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to
exterior, 2-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or
tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.
1. Material: 24 gauge stainless steel.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.
E. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge
and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in overflows.
1. Material: 24 gauge stainless steel.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
----- ------------------ ---- --
A. Roof -Edge Flashing Assembly:
1. Fascia: Basis of Design: Rapid-Lok_Fascia, by ATAS International, Inc. custom Edge_
Lok fascia.
07620-4
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
a. Alternate acceptable _ product: P_ac-Tite WT Fascia with custom extender,_ by
Petersen Aluminum.
b. Material: 0.050" aluminum.
c. Finish: Manufact l rer's standard 3-coat PVDF paint system, _equivalent to Briite
Red, b ATAS International, Inc.
d. Length: Minimum 12' for fewer lap joints.
e. Joint covers: 6" wide, same material as fascia.
f.- _- Fascia extensions: 0.050'-aluminum, same finish as fascia, length as -called for
on plans.
g. FM Rated 1-645,
h. Miami -Dade NOA required.
i. Lifetime 215 mph wind warranty
j_ 30_y_ear kynar finish warranty
2. Parapet Coping
a. Factory or shop fabricated
b. Length: Minimum i10'
C. Material: 0.040" aluminum, same color as fascia.
d. Provide -cleats and accessories for a complete system.
B. Base Flashing:
1. Factory or shop fabrics
2. Length: Minimum 10'
3. Material: 0.040" alumin
C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Factory or shop fabricated.
2. Length: Minimum 10'
3. Material: 0.032" aluminum.
D. Roof -Penetration Flashing:
1. Material: Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered.
E. Roof -Drain Flashing:
1. Material: Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General:
i
1. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions fog thermal and structural movement.
2. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim
system.
3. Torch cutting of sheet mi tal flashing and trim is not permitted.
07620-5
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by -
other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar
metals.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner
or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions cannot be used or
would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,
not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches
for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
I. Stainless steel: use stainless steel fasteners with stainfess steel sheet metal.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.
I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin
edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pre -tinned surface
would show in finished Work.
Do not solder aluminum sheet.
3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with
elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly
anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal
watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart.
Install expansion joint caps.
2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for
cleaning gutters.
07620-6
September 9, 2015
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
C.Downspouts: Join sections wit 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to
hold downspouts securely 1 i _nch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at
approximately 60 inches on center in between.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support
scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge
strips, and under roofing membrane.
E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 mm)
below scupper discharge.
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed
fasteners where possible, stet units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with
laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight.
B. Roof Edge Flashing and C6pings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 and the authority having
jurisdiction.
C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counterfla Thing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Secure in a waterproof man er. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap
counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant.
D. Roof -Penetration Flashing
installation of roofing and of
1. Turn lead flashing doi
flashing.
2. Seal with elastomeric
lead flashing on vent I
END SECTION 07620
(7
Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with
items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with
;alant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for
ing.
07620-7
September 9, 2015
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the followir
1. Roof curbs.
2. Roof hatches.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each produc
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,
C.Samples: For each exposed fin
1.3
=E
SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
icated.
cations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
upon request of architect.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the folio wing:
1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including
flanges and cap flashing toy coordinate with type of roofing indicated.
2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M with Class AZ-50 coating,
structural quality, Grade 40 (Grade 275), or as required for strength.
B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi -rigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated.
C.Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with
finish of material being fastened.
E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standar tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or
flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur
and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating.
07720-1
10-25-2012
SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
G.Mastic Sealant: Poly-isobutylene; non -hardening, non -skinning, nondrying, non -migrating
sealant.
H. Elastomeric Sealant: Recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non -asbestos, fib -rated asphalt cement designed for trowel
application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
2.2 ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Available Manufacturers:. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Custom Curb, Inc.
2. Metallic Products Corporation.
3. Vent Products Co., Inc.
C.General: Units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment
loads and other construction to be supported. Coordinate dimensions with equipment to be
supported.
1. Provide preservative -treated wood nailers at tops of units and formed flange at perimeter
bottom for mounting to roof.
2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.
3. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot, fabricate support units with height
tapered to match slope to level tops of units.
D. Roof Curbs:
1. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from
minimum 0.0747-inch-thick, structural -quality, hot -dip galvanized or aluminum -zinc alloy -
coated steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed
mechanical comer joints.
2. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from
minimum 0.063-inch-thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints.
3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi -rigid insulation where indicated.
4. Cants: Formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness.
II. PART TWO - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. The BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505,
07720-2
10-25-2012
1-203-934-6363, Fax: 1
warranty
III. PART THREE -EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that roof hatch installation
clean, and free of foreign matter.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Submit product design drawings 1
fabrication.
B. The installer shall check as -built c
accuracy to fit the application pric
Manufacturer's installation instruc
C. The installer shall furnish mect
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Coordinate installati
insulation, flashing, roofing mem
ensure that combined elements
securely to supporting structural
thermal stresses, and inward and o
B.Install roof accessory items
Waterproofing Manual," unless o
SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
78, Web: www.bilco.com, or product of equal quality and
II not disrupt other trades. Verify that the substrate is dry,
eport and correct defects prior to any installation.
review and approval to the architect or specifier before
mditions and verify the manufacturer's roof hatch details for
to fabrication. The installer shall comply with the roof hatch
ical fasteners consistent with the roof requirements.
of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, roof
ies, penetrations, equipment, and other construction to
waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories
istrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and
and loading pressures.
ng to construction details in NRCA's "Roofing and
indicated,
C.Separation: Separate metal fro incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood,
by coating concealed surfaces, at I cations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other
permanent separation.
D.Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of
roofing cement to form seal.
E. Cap Flashing: Where required las component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide
waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead
of mastic sealant.
F. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged
metal coatings. i
END OF SECTION 07720
07720-3
10-25-2012
SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Firestopping in rated
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Metl
2. ASTM E814 - Test Methods for
B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Throu€
2. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resis
3. UL Fire Resistance Directory:
4. International Firestop Council i
1.3 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY
A. Installation of firestopping shall be in
contractors respective installation of fii
designs.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL
A. During application of caulk and putty,
product cures. Use only with adequate
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops.
ietration Firestops.
of Building Joint Systems.
for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgements
dance with FM 4991. General contractor is responsible for all sub -
work to be preformed in strict compliance with appropriate UL listed
away from heat, open flame, sparks, or other sources of ignition until
A. Subject to compliance with requirements provide firestopping products as manufactured by one of the following:
1. Nelson Firestop Products, (800) 331-7325.
2. Hilti, Inc, (800) 879-8000.
3. The RectorSeal Corporation, (800) 231-3345.
4. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI�, (800) 992-1180.
5. 3M Fire Protection Products, (800) 328-1687.
6. Tremco Firestop System, (800) 852-8173.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Firestop materials shall have been tested and shall be in compliance with the minimum requirements of ASTM
E814, UL 1479, and UL 2079 as applicable. Products used shall be as listed below as suitable for the intended
application and as required to produce the fire rating as shown on the drawings and to conform to the
Firestopping Schedule of UL assemblies included at the end of this Section.
B. Intumescent Latex or Acrylic Sealant: Sil gle-component, intumescent, latex or acrylic formulation.
1. LBS, by Nelson Firestop Products.
2. FS ONE or CP 606, by Hilti.
3. Metacaulk 950 or 1000, by RectorSeal.
4. SpecSeal SSS100, by STI.
June, 2012
5. CP 25WB+, by 3M.
6. TREMstop WBM, by Tremco.
C. Intumescent Solvent -Release -Curing Sealant: Single component, intumescent, synthetic -polymer based, non -sag
grade.
1. CP 25N/S, by 3M.
2. TREMstop WBM, by Tremco.
D. Intumescent Wrap/Strip: Single -component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one face.
1. WRS, by Nelson Firestop Products.
2. CP 645 Wrap Strip, by Hilti.
3. Metacaulk Wrap Strip, by RectorSeal.
4. SpecSeal SSWRED Wrapstrip, by STI.
5. FS-195+ Wrap/Strip, by 3M.
6. TREMstop WS, by Tremco.
E. Intumescent Putty: Single -component, non -hardening, dielectric, intumescent putty.
1. FSP, by Nelson Firestop Products.
2. CP 618 Putty Stick or CP 617/617L Putty Pad, by Hilti.
3. CP 645 Wrap Strip, by Hilti.
4. CP 658 Firestop Plug, by Hilti.
5. Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty, by RectorSeal.
6. SpecSeal Putty, by STI.
7. Moldable Putty+, by 3M.
F. Silicone Sealant: Single -component, moisture -curing, silicone -based elastomeric, non -sag grade.
1. CLK N/S, by Nelson Firestop Products.
2. CP 601 S, by Hilti.
3. Metacaulk 835, by RectorSeal.
4. SpecSeal PEN 300, by STI.
5. 2000+ Silicone, by 3M.
6. FYRE SIL, by Tremco.
G. Silicone or Polyurethane Foam: Two -Component, liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place
to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
1. SpecSeal PEN 200, by STI.
2. 2001 Silicone RTV Foam, by 3M.
3. CP 620 Fire Foam, by Hilti.
H. Intumescent Collar: Factory -fabricated, intumescent collar.
1.
PCS, by Nelson Firestop Products.
2.
CP 642 or CP 643, by Hilti.
3.
Metacaulk Pipe Collar, by RectorSeal.
4.
SpecSeal SSC Collars, by STI.
5.
Plastic Pipe Device, by 3M.
6.
TREMstop D, by Tremco.
I. Intumescent Composite Sheet, Pillows and Mortar, or Blocks: Products used to firestop large openings.
1. CPS, by Nelson Firestop Products.
2. FS 657 Fireblocks, by Hilti.
3. CP 637 Firestop Mortar, by Hilti.
4. CP 675T Firestop Board, by Hilti.
5. SpecSeal SSB Pillows and SpecSeal SSM Firestop Compound, by STI.
6. CS-195+ Composite Sheet, by 3M.
7. TREMstop PS, by Tremco.
Sprayable Fire -Rated Mastic: Products used to firestop construction joints.
1. CP672 Speed Spray, by Hilti.
2. SpecSeal Elastomeric Spray, by STI.
3. Firedam Spray, by 3M.
June, 2012
K. Packing Material: Manufacturer's standard mastic, putty, ceramic fiber blanket, or mineral wool to be used as fill
or backing material for firestopping.
1. FSB or Mineral Wool, by Nelson Firestop Products.
2. Mineral Wool, by Hilti.
3. Fire Safing or Backer Rod, by RectorSeal.
4. Mineral Wool, by STI.
5. FireMaster Mastic, FireMaster Putty, or FireMaster Bulk, by 3M.
6. Cerablanket, by Tremco.
7. CP 777 Speed Plugs, by Hilti. (preformed mineral wool designed for top of wall fluted metal deck packing
material)
L. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose dirt and oil from penetration surfaces.
B. Place hangers or damming materials in I enetration to hold firestopping materials, if necessary.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer charts for appropriate material to achieve required fire rating in various locations.
B. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire rated wall materials in accordance with manufacturer's published
instructions.
C. Install firestopping at penetrations and construction joints of fire rated walls and floors in accordance with
manufacturer's published instructions and in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Inspection: Upon completion of installation, inspection of installed firestopping shall be made by a qualified
representitive to verify work complies with the manufacturers requirements. Submit written certification to the
Architect that Manufacturer has visited he site and the work is in accordance with manufacturer's requirements
and published instructions.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Provide firestopping complying with UL assemblies specified below.
Penetration
Assembly
Nelson
HIilti
RectorSeal
STI
3M
Tremco
Metal Pipe
CMU Wall 8"
CAJ1224 or
CAJ 1149 or
CAJ1114 or
CAJ1079
CAJ1001 or
CAJ1179 or
Thick or Less
CAJ1203
CAJ1155 or
CAJ1226
CAJ1115
or
CAJ1217
CAJ1009
CAJI 187
Gypsum Board
WL1083 or
WL1054 or
WL1026 or
WL1049
WL1003 or
WL1020 or
Partition
WL1030
WL1058
WL1034
or
WL1009
WL1051
WL1079
Non -Metallic
CMU Wall 8"
CAJ2110 or
CAJ2021 or
CAJ2064
CAJ2082 or
Pipe
Thick or Less
CAJ2086
CAJ2109
WJ2025
or
CAJ2005
FA2024
CAJ2045
Non -Metallic
Gypsum Board
WiL2098 or
WL2015 or
WL2093
WL2002 or
WL2083 or
Pipe
Partition
WL2071
WL2078
WL2104
or
WL2005
WL2082
WL2029
June, 2012
Penetration
Assembly
Nelson
Hilti
RectorSeal
STI
3M
Tremco
Cable Tray
CMU Wall 8"
CAJ8049 or
CAJ4035 or
CAJ4020
CAJ4003 or
CAJ4007 or
Thick or Less
CAJ4033
CAJ4017
CAJ8043
or
CBJ4020
WJA4005
CAJ4029
Gypsum Board
WL4011 or
WL4005
WL3043 or
Partition
WL4003
WL4019
- - - -
or
WL4004
WL3044
WL4008
Insulated
CMU Wall 8"
CAJ5008 or
CAJ5090 or
WJ5016 or
CAJ5021
CAJ5001 or
CAJ5052 or
Metal Pipe
thick or Less
CAJ5059
CAJ5091
CAJ5070
or
CAJ5002
CBT5005
CAJ5029
Gypsum Board
WL5028 or
WL5014
Partition
WL5036
WL5029
WL5057
or
WL5001
WL5034
WL5051
Construction
CMU Wall to
HWD0098
TRC/PV120-14
Gaps - Head
Metal Deck
- - - -
- - - -
HWD0013
----
Gyp Bd Parti'n
HWD0042
of Wall to
Roof Deck
to Metal Deck
- - - -
or
HWD0014
- - - -
HWS0003
WHPV60.01
HWD0049
Construction
CMU Wall to
WWD1011
Gaps - Wall
CMU Wall
----
or
----
----
WWS1001
----
to Wall
WWD1012
or
WWD1017
Gyp Bd Parti'n
to Gyp Bd
----
----
----
----
WWS0004
----
Parti'n
END OF SECTION
June, 2012
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general 1
Conditions and Division 1 Si
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes
1.
Exterior joints in vertical s
2.
Exterior joints in horizonta
3.
Interiorjoints in vertical su
4.
Interior joints in horizontal
5.
Firestop system through fi
6.
Exterior joints in sheet me
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Sections, apply to this Section.
for the following:
and nontraffic horizontal surfaces.
traffic surfaces.
and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
surfaces.
resistance - rated walls.
flashing and trim.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Firestop System Submittals: For each through -penetration firestop system, show each
kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction and kind
of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance with requirements
for each condition.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test
methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are
required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
B. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test
their adhesion to joint substrates using test method indicated in Part 3 "Field Quality
Control" Article.
C. Fire -resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 119 under
conditions where positive furnaces pressures of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained
at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the
test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
1. Fire -Resistive Ratil of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design
designations listed �by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another testing
inspecting agency.
D. Mockups: Before installingijoint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial ;Completion.
07920-1
July, 2011
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not meet requirements specified in this Section or fail in
adhesion within specified warranty period two years from date of Final Acceptance.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated on drawings.
2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealant: (Gutters & Coping Sealant)
1. Products:
a. Dow Corning; 795.
b. GE Silicone, SilPruf.
C. Tremco Spectrem 2
B. Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. For vertical masonry control joints, provide the following:
a. Products:
1) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.; NP 1
2) Tremco; Vulkem 116.
3) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - 1 a.
b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
C. Class: 25.
2. Exposure: Use T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
3. Substrates: Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
C. Urethane Sealant:
1. Concrete paving joints, horizontal traffic surfaces.
a. Products:
1) Bostik, "Chem -Calk 950".
07920-2
July, 2011
2.3
2.4
2) Sor
3) Trei
b. Type and
C. Class 25
d. Exposure:
e. Substrate:
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
im, "SL-1 ".
Vulkem 45
le S (singe component) and NS (nonsag).
(traffic).
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
A. Compatibility: Provide through -penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating
through -penetration firestop system under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by through, penetration firestop system manufacturers based on testing
and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each through -penetration firestop system that are
needed to install fill materials and comply with "Performance Requirements" article. Use
only components specified through penetration firestop system manufacturer and
approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.
Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, include the following:
a. Slat4rock-wood-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of full materials in liquid state.
C. Fire -rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
6. Products:
a. 3M Fire Prevention Products.
b. Hilti Firestop Systems
C. International Protective Coatings Corporation (IPC, a Division of W.R.
Grace).
d. Tremco Inc.
i
JOINT -SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth
and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
07920-3
July, 2011
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
Type: C (closed -cell material with a surface skin).
C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials
or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
f
A. Contractor performing work must be one the Sealant Manufacturer's Approved
Applicators.
B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.
Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,
sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove
loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing
out joints with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues could interfere with adhesion of joint sealants.
5. All surfaces to be caulked shall be clean and dry.
C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience.
Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
07920-4
July, 2011
Q
E.
F
G.
z
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and back of joints.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
1. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
2. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
3. All deep cracks shall be filled to within 1/2 inch of the surface with an appropriate
back-up material and caulked with a caulking gun. Caulking beads shall be
smooth and straight!
4. Caulk around all door and storefront openings and where noted on the drawings.
I. Masonry control joints shall be caulked with a high -quality paintable urethane caulk.
Control depth of caulk at 318 inch to 1/2 inch with a continuous closed -cell rod.
J. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets, and
to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agentslthat are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
i
3. Joint Configuration: Concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
07920-5
July, 2011
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
K. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
L. Through -Penetration Firestop Installation:
General: Installation through -penetration systems to comply with "Performance
Requirements" of the firestop system manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for the applications indicated.
END OF SECTION 07920
07920-6
July, 2011
02.1 Acceptable Manufactur
Subject to compliance v
one of the following:
Note: All exterior doors s
Product approval that m
and frames shall bear Wi
(A) Ceco Door Products
(B) Steelcraft Man
(C) Curries Co.
SECTION 08001
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
the following specifications provide hollow metal from only
be furnished and installed per an approved N.O.A.or Florida
or exceeds the project wind requirements. All such doors
orm Resistance Labels.
ng Co.
02.2 Material — Insulated Exterior Doors
Face sheets are to be made of commercial quality 16 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel
that complies with ASTM A525 A60. Vertical edges shall join the face sheets by a
continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and
dressed smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface. Hinge
reinforcements shall be not less than 7 gage (3116) plate 1-1/4" x 9" height to receive
heavy weight (.180) hinges. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous
steel channel not less th n 16 gage, extending the full width of the door and welded to
the face sheet. Doors wit an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel
welded in place so the channel is flush with the top of the face sheets of the door. Plastic
fillers are not acceptably. Door cores shall have 22 gage vertical steel stiffeners
spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. Stiffeners shall be
spaced not more than 5'I on centers. Spaces between stiffeners shall be filled with
fiberglass insulation (minimum density 0.8#/cubic ft.).
02.3 Material - Interior Doors
Face sheets are to be made of commercial quality 18 gauge cold rolled steel conforming
to ASTM A366 or 620. Vertical edges shall be mechanically interlocked with a hairline
edge seam. Hinge reinforcements shall be not less than 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9"
height to receive standard weight (.134) hinges. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors
with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gage, extending the full width of the door
and welded to the face sheet. Top and bottom channels shall be flush with top and
bottom of door. Door cores shall be a one-piece resin -impregnated honeycomb securely
bonded to both face sheets.
02.4 Material - Exterior Frames
Shall be 14 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A526 A60.
ressure° treated woodablockm shall be �ovided.at'head and.'arnbs. All frames are to be
assembled so that the face) miter seam is "closed and tight". Weld the face seam and the
full web of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress the weld area smooth. Apply
a zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with matching prime paint. Run a
continuous fine bead of white silicone caulk around frame after installation.
02.5 Material - Interior Frames'
Shall be 16 gauge that complies with ASTM A366 or A569 11>fr'anies>shall beK.welde.
M ;,VVoodiblocking:shall be>provid'edat> head$and iambs. Furnish cased openings
frames where indicated onl the Drawings. Run a continuous fine bead of white silicone
caulk around frame after installation.
02.6 Labeled Doors and Frames
Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of National Fire
-- Protection Association (NFPA) Standard Number 80, as herein specified.
08001-1
June 26, 2014
SECTION 08001
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection
ratings as determined and scheduled. Doors and/or frames for labeled openings shall `--
bear either a stamped or applied label from Warnock Hersey of Underwriters Laboratory.
Labeled doors and frames shall comply with procedures of labeling agencies and codes
of authority having jurisdiction.
02.7 Prime Finish
Doors and frames are to be thoroughly cleaned and chemically treated to insure
maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall
receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting primer. The finish shall meet the
requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 "Test Procedure and Acceptance
Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces". The prime finish is not intended to be the final
layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of oil base paints
shall be provided in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame
manufacturer. Refer also to section 09900-03.
END OF SECTION 08001
08001-2
June 26, 2014
DECEMBER 28, 2011
EC 97909-29
4-30-201
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED E
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of
Division 01 Specification Sections,
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Kawneer Alu
hardware and components.
1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Er
08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CES AND STOREFRONTS
1
Guide Specs
Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
ly to this Section.
um Entrances, Kawneer Storefronts, glass and glazing, and door
and Kawneer Storefronts include:
a. 500 Swing Door; Wide stile, 6I vertical face dimension, 1-3/4" depth, high traffic applications.
b. Trifab 451 Storefront System, x 4'/2", non thermal, screw spline, center glazed at the exterior.
c. Trifab 450 Storefront System , 3/4" x 4 %z" screw spline, center glazed at the interior.
d. IR-501 Flush Wet or Dry_Gla4ed Aluminum Storefront System-L.M.I.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07920 Joint Sealants for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum sliding door system
2. Division 08700 "Hardware"
3. Division 084126 "Glazing"
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions: For fenestration industry
Manufactures Association (AAMA) —
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum-frE
performance requirements without e,,
fabrication, installation, or other defe,
Design Wind Loads: Determine d
in miles per hour, according to AS
heights above grade indicated on
a. Basic Wind Speed (MPH): F
b. Importance Factor (I, II, III):
'c�Exposure Category (A, B, C,
B. Aluminum Framed Entrance Perform
1. Wind loads: Provide storefront
rd terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural
Glossary (AAMA AG).
!d storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following
ading performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture,
in construction:
gn wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated
7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof
to plans
;r to plans
Refer to plans
Requirements:
; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design
pressures specified on plans inward land outward. The design pressures are based on the (FBC) Building
Code; 2014 Edition.
2. Air Infiltration: For single acting offset pivot or butt hung entrances in the closed and locked position, the
test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa)
for single doors and 1.567 psf for pairs of doors. A single 3'0" x 7'0" (915 mm x 2134 mm) entrance door and
frame shall not exceed 0.50 cfm per square foot. A pair of 60" x TO" (1830 mm x 2134mm) entrance doors
and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm per square foot.
I
i
i
kawneer.com , KAW N E ER
AN ALCOA COMPANY
DECEMBER 28, 2011 (Revised 10-22-2012, 4-30-2013,12-09-13, 06-26-2014, 09-09-2015) 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 2
EC 97909-29 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs
3 Structural Performance: Corner strength shall be tested per the Kawneer dual moment load test
procedure and certified by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld compliance and corner integrity
[Testing procedure and certified test results available upon request].
4. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no
leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf (383 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, and fabrication methods, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum -
framed entrance door indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work,
operational clearances and installation details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes including samples of hardware and
accessories involving color selection.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for
each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum -framed entrance doors. Test results based on use of downsized
test units will not be accepted.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar
units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum -framed entrance doors and
storefronts that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by
inclusion of test reports, and calculations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain entrance doors, hardware, and storefront through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum -framed glass
entrance doors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If
modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
E. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of sliding aluminum -framed glass door openings by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty.
1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the
Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Kawneer Wide Stile Series 500 Entrance Door, Kawneer Trifab 451 Storefront System'
(exterior), and Kawneer Trifab 450 Storefront System
B. Substitutions: Not allowed
FICKAWNEER
kawneencom AN ALCOA COMPANY
DECEMBER 28 2011 Revised 10-22-2012, 4-30-2013,12-0 -13, 06-26-2014, 09-09-2015 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 3
EC 97909-29 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and tem er recommended by sliding aluminum -framed glass door manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and ap lication of required finish and not less than 0.090" wall thickness at any
location for the main frame and sash embers.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non -corrosive and compatible with
sliding aluminum -framed glass door members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc -coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient
strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with
ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc -coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633
for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design
pressure indicated.
1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi -rigid, polypropylene sheet
or polypropylene -coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702.
2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM
A. Storefront Entrance Framing Trifab° VG 450 (interior) and Trifab VG 451(exterior):
B. Non -Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high -strength aluminum with nonstaining,
nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners
and accessories compatible with adjac ant materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel.
D. Perimeter Anchors: When steel ancho s are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum
material to prevent galvanic action.
E. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unlo (ding: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened,
undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
F. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle
storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from
elements, construction activities, and ocher hazards before, during and after storefront installation.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Wet or Dry_glazing, as specif;ed in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will
not develop adhesion.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other
corrosion -resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and
securely aluminum -framed entrance doors.
B. Standard Hardware: I
1. Weather stripping:
a. Meeting stiles on pairs of doors shall be equipped with an adjustable astragal utilizing wool pile with
polymeric fin.
b. The door weathering on a single acting offset pivot or butt hung door and frame (single or pairs) shall
be Kawneer Sealair° weathering. This is comprised of a thermoplastic elastomer weathering on a
tubular shape with a semi -rigid polymeric backing.
2. Sill Sweep Strips: EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in an aluminum extrusion applied to the interior exposed
surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners (Necessary to meet specified performance tests).
kawneer.com
FICKAWNEER
AN ALCOA COMPANY
a
DECEMBER 28, 2011-(Revised 10-22-2012, 4-30-2013,12-09-13, 06-26-2014, 09-09-2015) 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 4
EC 97909-29 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs
3. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, with ribbed surface. National Guard products;
Inc. Half Saddle -Threshold #327 (1/2" High x 4" Wide)_No-substitutions.. !^*�^^ Vestibule de shag ^^*
4. Offset Pivots: to^r +^'�*^ and bottom
5. Push/Pull: Style CID II / CO-9
6. Closer: LCN 4040 with matching cover 105 degree opening, no hold open function.
7. Security Lock/Dead Lock: Kawaneer Controller -Locking System, No manual -flush bolts allowed, Active Leaf
MS1850 with 4015 Threshold'Bolt: Inactive Leaf: 4085 Header Bolt for pairs of doors !p p .tip^ea
8. Cylinder: KawReeFStandaFd. Provide_thumbturns finished to._match_doorwith_MS1850:
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum -framed glass entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring doors.
B. Fabricate aluminum -framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling perimeter framing.
1. Door corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and
1-1/8" (29 mm) long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be hook -in type
with EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non -stretchable cord.
2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance.
3. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.
4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
C. Weather Stripping: Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as
indicated on manufactures drawings and details.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with AAMA-AFPA "Anodic Finishes/Painted Aluminum" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they
are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
B. Factory Finishing:
1. Kawneer Permanodie AA-M10C22A41, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating (Color #14
Clear)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings,}
vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather
tight sliding door installation.
kawneer.com
IICKAWNEER
AN AICOA COMPANY
DECEMBER 28, 2011
EC 97909-29
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry anc
2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sc
nail heads are driven flush with sw
3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of
offsets at joints.
4. Proceed with installation only after
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawinc
entrance doors, hardware, accessorie
B. Install aluminum swing entrance door
movement, anchored securely in plac
adjacent construction.
C. Set sill threshold in bed of sealant, as
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodi
contact with other materials.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon
service representative.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND
2014, 09-09-2015) 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 5
08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs
free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.
ind, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that
'aces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening.
grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or
A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately
coatings and finishes. Remove excess
B. Clean glass immediately after installatic
cleaning and maintenance. Remove nc
C. Remove and replace glass that has be(
period.
END OF SECTION 084113
conditions have been corrected.
and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum swing
and other components.
level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other
licated, for weather tight construction.
surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of
written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer's field
ifter installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective
sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
n. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final
npermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
n broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction
kawneencom
FICKAWNEER
AN A COA COMPANY
084126 STOREFRONT GLAZING
03.1 Manufacturers
Kawneer Co., Inc
Cheryl Wilkerson
Account Manager
Kawneer CID Sales
317.771.9263
cheryl.wilkerson@alcoa.
03.2 Glazing
(A) Exterior storefront sh6
glass as required on Q
a. Outdoor Lite:
solar control,
achieve the fo
b. Glazing shall
coefficient of d
c-Wet Glazing, 1
Virtually non -di
reject wet glaz
(B) Exterior storefront Cle
low "E" tinted glass as
a. Outdoor Lite: S
the following p,
b. Glazing shall c
coefficient of 0
(C) Interior storefront (betu
labeled tempered glass
Manufacturer
PPG
Pittsburgh, PA
(412) 434-3131
03.3 Insulated Panels: Overall
be used.
(A) Remodels: Thermolite insulated
SECTION 084126
STOREFRONT GLAZING
II have wet or dry glazed, V tempered insulated low "E" clear
rawings and per the following assembly.
)tarphire ultra -clear glass with a second -surface Solarban 60
low-e coating; Indoor Lite: Starphire ultra -clear glass, to
lowing performance:
ieliver visible light transmittance of 74%, a solar heat gain
.4, a light to solar gain ratio of 1.85 and a U-Value
f used, shall exhibit such craftsmanship so as to make it
stinguishable from Dry Glazing. Wawa reserves the right_to
ng installations it deems to have poor quality workmanship,
estory glazing (above 9'-0") shall have 1" tempered insulated
required on Drawings and per the following assembly.
olargray; Indoor Lite: Solarban 70 (3) clear glass, to achieve
iver visible light transmittance of 32%, a solar heat gain
1 a light to solar gain ratio of 1.34 and a U-Value of .26i
en Store and Vestibule) shall have'/" safety glazing quality
All frames to be clear anodized.
1". Verify with Drawings the type of filler panel to
with corregated PolyAllomer stabilizers.
Manufacturer
Laminators Incorporated
3255 Souderton Pike
Hatfield, PA 19440-1731
Phone: 800-523-2347 1
Website: htto://www.omegapanels.com
or
,MSpandrel Glass at building exterior: '/" tempered, color "subdued bronze", and %" clear
tempered glass and'/2" air space to make 1" panel �_ LT = 0%, S IGC = .24, LSGR = 0, U-Value
084126-1
September 9, 2015
Manufacturer
Viracon, Inc.
Owatonna, MN
Phone: 800-533-2080
Alternate Manufacturer
Oldcastle Glass
1-866-653-2278
Color.• Lava
END OF SECTION 084126
084126-2
SECTION 084126
STOREFRONT GLAZING
September 9, 2015
08700-01 HARDWARE
01.1 Hardware schedules are
Institute.
01.2 General Provide alumin
exterior Cold Delivery, M
weather-strip the hollow
stops at exterior Vestibul
conform to all state and
have a maximum openin!
shall have a minimum of
doors shall be supplied b
required to be accessible
wrist to operate.
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
be submitted in the format provided by the Door & Hardware
m handicap accessible thresholds for all exterior doors, except
ter Room and Exterior Storage (including Kawneer doors) and
fetal door at the WorkRoomexitway when required. Add door
doors, only when doors open against storefront. Hardware to
ocal handicap code specifications. Interior hinged door shall
force of five (5) pounds. Fire doors and exterior hinged doors
:Wing force allowable by fire and panic. Hardware for Kawneer
the manufacturer (offset pivots and/or center pivots). All doors
will not require light grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the
01.3 All hardware furnished by GC. The intent of this specification is to be used as a guideline
estimating and establishing a standard of quality. It does not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing all materials thEt may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work.
01.4
01.5
01.6
01.7
Hardware numbers
manufacturers:
Item
Hinges
Locks/Latches
Closers
Thresholds
Stops/Silencers
Push/Pull/Kick
Overhead Stops
Exit Devices (not D1)
Push Button
Hinges shall be as
furnish N.R.P. (nor
herein are taken from the catalogs of the following
Hader Hinge Co.(HA)
Schlage Lock Co.(SC)
LCN (LC)
National Guard (NA)
Hager Hinge Co.(HA)
Hager Hinge Co (HA).
Rixs�on (RX)
Von Duprin (VO)
Locknetics (LO)
Closers with "CUSH" type
from 75 degrees to full of
with thru-bolts.
Thresholds and weatl
exterior doors shall be
Acceptable Substitutes
Stanley, McKinney
No Substitution
No Substitution
No Substitution
Ives, Rockwood, Burns
Ives, Rockwood, Burns
Glynn Johnson
No Substitution
No Substitution
with ball or oilite bearings. For out swinging exterior doors,
e pin) hinges.
shall have backcheck set to slow the door opening cycle
:)p position. Closers on exterior doors shall be installed
pping: Neatly cope threshold around frame and caulk. All
hed with weatherstripping type NGP120NA.
01.8 Keying: All locks and cylinders for each store shall be keyed alike including cylinders for
aluminum entrance doors. The only exception is the lockset for the Cold Delivery Door
which is to be keyed separately to Wawa's delivery key. Coordinate with Wawa's
representative to determine] manufacturer and key section for this lockset.
01.9 Hardware Supplier
William McAuliffe Ill, AHC
Mcauliffe & Sons Inc.
225 W Germantown Pike
Plymouth Meeting, PA 19462
Phone: 610-825-3001
08700-1
October 14, 2016
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
08700-02 SCHEDULE
02.1 The following schedule lists door openings by identifying their location. As there are
several different store layouts, you may find all opening descriptions do not apply to the
store on which you are bidding.
02.2 Aluminum Entrance & Vestibule Doors: All hardware to be supplied with the doors by the
manufacturer except the lock cylinders. (See "Vestibule and Storefront Glazing") Furnish
one (1) cylinders for each exterior door with keying compatible with the locks and
cylinders on the balance of the job. Finish of cylinder faces shall match the finish of the
aluminum doors. Provide door stops on concrete walks for doors opening against
storefront glazing.
02.1 Hardware Schedule
HW1 Door "D" — Exterior Cold Delivery: 4'-0" x T-0" x 1 %" HMD x HMF
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112 HD
628
HA
1 Deadlock
B661 P C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1 Door Pull
7N
626
HA
1 Closer
1461 H CUSH
689
LC
1 Gasketing
120 NA 1 x 48" + 2 x 84"
NA
1 Overhead Holder
8-526
626E
RX
1 Saddle Threshold
410 x 48":
719
NA
HW2 Door "EX" — Exterior Exit: T-0" x T-0" x 1 W HMD x HMF
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112 HD
628
HA
1 Exit Device
22EO
SP28
VO
1 Closer
1461 CUSH TBMS
689
LC
1 Panic Threshold
804 V x 40"
719
NA
1 Gasketing
120 NA 1 x 36" + 2 x 84"
NA
HW3 Door "W'— Retail Area to Backroom : 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 W HMD x HMF single acting
with 4"x25" glass vision panel.
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112 HD
600
HA
1 Push Plate
30S 8 x 16
630
HA
1 Door Pull
33E 4 x 16
630
HA
1 Closer
1461 H
689
LC
1 Kick Plate
19013 �i6�" x 34"
630
HA
1 Kick Plate
190S 36" x 35"
630
HA
1 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
1 Wall Stop
236W
630
HA
HW3.1 Door "W1" —Retail Area to Backroom : 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 W HMD x HMF double
acting with 4"x25" glass vision panel.
1 Pivot Set 7255
SP28
IV
2 Push Plate 30S 8 x 16
US32D
HA
1 Closer 6033 BUMP WMSSRT
AL
LC
2 Protection Plate 190S C39" x 34"
US32D
HA
1 Wall Stop 236W
US32D
HA
HW3.2 Door "W2" — Customer Corridor to Backroom : 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HMF
single acting with 4"x25" one way glass vision panel.
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112 HD
600
HA
1 Turnbolt, No Cylinder
B680
626
SC
1 Push Plate
30S 8 x 16
630
HA
1 Door Pull
33E 4 x 16
630
HA -
08700-2
October 14, 2016
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Kick Plate
1 Door Silencer
1 Wall Stop
HW3.3 Door "W3" — Retail
Minute Labeled Fire
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Latchset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Kick Plate
1 Door Silencer
1 Wall Stop
1 Magnetic Holder
HW3.4 Door "W4" —Rated
20 Minute Labeled F
vision panel.
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Lockset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Kick Plate
1 Door Silencer
1 Wall Stop
1 Magnetic Holder
HW3.5 Door "W5" — Retail A
HW5
with 4"x25" one way
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Push Plate
1 Door Pull
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Kick Plate
1 Door Silencer
1 Wall Stop
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
1461 H
689
LC
190S Q9" x 34"
630
HA
190S 39" x 35"
630
HA
307D
Grey
HA
236W
630
HA
to Rated Exit Corridor: 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HM 20
single acting with 4"x25" wire or firelite glass vision panel.
780-112 HD
600
HA
AL10S SAT
626
SC
1461 REG
689
LC
190S 16" x 34"
630
HA
190S 16" x 35"
630
HA
307D
Grey
HA
236W
630
HA
998 24VDC
689
RX
t Corridor to Backroom : 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HM with
Door, single acting with 4"x25" wire or firelite one way glass
780-112 HD
600
HA
AL53PD SAT C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1461 REG
689
LC
190S 16" x 34"
630
HA
190S 16" x 35"
630
HA
307D
Grey
HA
236W
630
HA
998 24VDC
689
RX
Associate : 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HMF single acting
vision panel.
780-112 HD
600
HA
30S 8 x 16
630
HA
33E 4 x 16
630
HA
1461 H
689
LC
190S 16" x 34"
630
HA
190S 16" x 35"
630
HA
307D
Grey
HA
236W
630
HA
Door "TE" — Exterior Trash Room: 4'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/" HMD x HMF with 10"x10"
laminated glass vision] panel.
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD
628
HA
1 Lockset
AL80PD SAT C145 Keyway KA
626
Sc
1 Closer
1461 H CUSH TBMS
689
LC
1 Saddle Threshold
410 x 48"
719
NA
1 Gasketing
120 NA 1@48" + 2@84"
NA
1 Door Sweep
102 VA x 48"
NA
HW5.1 Door "73" — Exterior Trash Room: 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/" HMD x HMF with 4"x25"
laminated glass vision panel.
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD
628
HA
1 Lockset
AL80PD SAT C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1 Closer
1461 H CUSH TBMS
689
LC
1 Saddle Threshold
410 x 36"
719
NA
1 Gasketing
120 NA 1 @36" + 2@84"
NA
1 Door Sweep
102 VA x 36"
NA
08700-3
October 14, 2016
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
HW5.2 Door "74" — Exterior Trash Room: T-0" x 7'-0" x 1 %" HMD x HMF with 45 Minute
Labeled Fire Door, single
acting with 4"x25" wire or firelite one
way glass vision
panel.
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD
628
HA
1 Lockset
AL80PD SAT C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1 Closer
1461 H CUSH TBMS
689
LC
1 Kick Plate
190S 16" x 35"
630
HA
1 Saddle Threshold
410 x 36"
719
NA
1 Gasketing
120 NA 1 @36" + 2@84"
NA
1 Door Sweep
102 VA x 36"
NA
x
minated glass vision
Continuous Hinge
1 Electric Strike 6211 24VDC FSE US32D VO
1 Closer
1461 H CUSH TBMS
689 LC
1 Kick Plate
190S 36" x 41"
630 HA
1 Saddle Threshold
410 x 42"
719 NA
1 Gasketing
120 NA 1 @42" + 2@84"
NA
1 Door Sweep
102VAx_42"
NA
HW6 Door "T" Sinale User (Private or Public) Toilet Room: 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 3/" HMD x
HMF
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD
600
HA
1 Privacy Set
AL40S SAT
626
SC
1 Closer
1461 REG 62PA
689
LC
1 Kick Plate
190S 16" x 34"
630
HA
1 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
HW7 Door "PT" — Men/Women Public Restroom: 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 3/" HMD x HMF
1Continuous Hinge
780-112HDx79"
CLR
HA
1 Push Plate
30S *E" 24,, x 24" 134E
630
HA
1 Door Pull
33E 4 x 16
630
HA
1 Kick Plate
190S 16" x 34"
630
HA
1 Kick Plate
190S 16" x 35"
630
HA
1 Wall Stop
236W
630
HA
1 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
1 Closer (inside mount)
4011 REG AL
689
LC
HW8 Door "H" — Exterior Storage Room: (2) 3'-0"x7'-0"x1 %" HMD x HMF with Louvers &
Dampers, Inc. #PLSL Secuity Door Louver added to one leaf only,18Hx 12W with
insect screen attached. Louver shall be galvanized sheet with baked enamel finish.
Color to match door.
2 Continuous Hinges 780-112 HD 628 HA
1 Door Pull 7N 626 HA
1 Deadlock B660P C145 Keyway KA 626 SC
2 Flush Bolt 282D MS 12" 626 HA
1 Panic Threshold 804 V x 76" 719 NA
1 Gasketing 120 NA 1 x 72" + 2 x 84" NA
2 Overhead Holder 8-326 689 RX
HW8.1 Door "H1" — Exterior Storage Room: (1) 3'-0"x7'-0"x1 3/" HMD x HMF with Louvers &
Dampers, Inc. #PLSL Security Door Louver. Provide 18"H x 12"W louver with #8 x
32 Phillips head steel thru bolts and insect screen. Louver shall be galvanized
sheet with baked enamel finish. Color to match door.
08700-4
October 14, 2016
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Door Pull
1 Deadlock
1 Panic Threshold
1 Gasketing
1 Overhead Holder
'HW_ 8.2 _ Door "H2 Ex
;18"H Hurricane
door.
'1 Continuous Hinge
1 Passage Set
1 Deadlock
1 Panic Threshold
1 Gasketing
,1 Overhead Holder
HW9 Door "CO" — Water N
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Deadlock
1 Door Pull
1 Panic Threshold
1 Gasketing
1 Overhead Holder
HW10 Door "W" —Vendor[
laminated glass visio
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Power Supply
1 Closer
1 Protection Plate
1 Gasketing
1 Saddle Threshold
1 Door Sweep
1 Mortise Cylinder
1 Rim Cylinder
1 Exit Device
HW11 Door "TI" — Interior 7
laminated glass visit
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Deadbolt
1 Passage Set
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Kick Plate
1 Wall Stop
3 Door Silencer
1 Saddle Threshold
HW12 Door "OF" — Manac
glass vision panel
3 Hinges
1 Push ButtonLock
1 Floor Stop
3 Door Silencer
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
780-112 HD
628
HA
7N
626
HA
B660P C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
884-71V $04u x 40"
719
NA
120 NA 1 x 36" + 2 x 84"
NA
8-326
689
RX
36ra4e Room: (1) 4'-0"x7'-0"x1 3/4" HMD x HMF with 12"W x
t Y-Blade Louver Model 1500AHRC
by Activar Inc.
Standard_
ase with Powder Coat Gray Primer_
Field finished to match
- 780-112 HD y - - -
- - 628-
- HA
ND10S RHO
626
SC
B660P C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
804 V x 52"
719
NA
120 NA 1 x 48" + 2 x 84"
NA
1oset: 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4' HMD x HMF
780-112 HD
628
HA
B660P C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
7N
626
HA
8847N 894V x 40"
719
NA
120 NA 1 x 36" + 2 x 84"
NA
8-326
689
RX
-livery Door: 4'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" HMD x HMF with 4"x25"
panel
780-112HD x 83" ETW-4 RH (D1)
CLR
HA
BPS-24-1
CR
1461 H CUSH TBSRT
AL
LC
190S 36" x 46"
US32D
HA
120 NA 1 x 48" + 2 x 84"
NA
410 x 48"
719
NA
102 VA x 48"
AL
NA
20-001 x 1 '/" C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
20-022 C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
ED5200 X N9905 M107 W048 M61
630
CR
sh Room: T-0" x 6'-8" x 1 3/" HMD x HMF
with 4"x25"
panel
780-112 HD
600
HA
B680
626
SC
AL10S SAT
626
SC
1460-DEL (Pull side)
689
LC
190S 16" x 34"
630
HA
190S 16" x 35"
630
HA
236W
630
HA
307D
Grey
HA
410 x 36"
719
NA
Office: T-0" x 6'-8" x 1 3/" HMD x HMF w/ 4"x25" one-way
BB1279 4'/z x 4'/2
600 HA
t L1021-S-26D
626 SI
241 F
626 HA
307D
Grey HA
08700-5
October 14, 2016
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
1 Kick Plate 190S 16" x 34" 630 HA j
1 Kick Plate 190S 16" x 35" 630 HA -
HW13 Door "EL" -Electrical Room: 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 3/" HMD x HMF w/24"x24" louver and
4" x 25" safe_ty_glass_vision.panel._(Outswing_Door)
3 Hinges
BB1279_4_'/_2 x 4 %
600
HA
1 Exit Device
22NL Less Outside Trim
SP28
VO
i1 Combination Lockset
L_P1020-S-26D-41
626
SI
I Cylinder Core_ --_-
23=030C145 Keyway KA_ _
626
Sc
1 Closer
1461
689
LC
3 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
1 Rim Cylinder
20-022 C145 Keyway KA
HW13.1 Door "EL-1" - Electrical Room Rear (Front/Back): 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HMF
w/ 24"x24" louver'and_4"x_ 25'' safety glass vision- ,panel (Inswing - Door)
3 Hinges
6131279 4'/2 x 4 l/2
600
HA
'1 Combination Lockset
L_1021-S-26D-4.1
626
SI
1 Cylinder Core ___ -
_ 23-030 C145 Keyway KA. _ _ _
_ _- _ 626
_ _SC
1 Wall Stop
236W
630
HA
3 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
HW14 Door "C3" Closet: 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HMF
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD
628
HA
1 Lockset
AL80PD SAT C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1 Kick Plate
190S 16" x 34"
630
HA
1 Overhead Holder (swings out) 4-226
689
RX
1 Wall Stop (swings in)
236W
630
HA
3 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
HW14.1 Door "C2" Closet: 2'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD X HMF
3 Hinges
BB1279 4'/2 x 4 %2
600
HA
1 Passage Set
AL10S SAT
626
SC
1 Roller Stop
272W
626
HA
3 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
HW14.2 Door"Cl" Closet: 2'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD X HMF
3 Hinges
BB1279 4'/z x 4'/2
600
HA
1 Lockset
AL80PD SAT C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1 Kick Plate
190S 16" x 22"
630
HA
1 Wall Stop
236W
630
HA
3 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
HW14.3 Door "C4" 2'-6" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HMF
3 Hinges
BB1279 4'h x4'/2
600
HA
1 Passage Set
AL10S
626
SC
1 Wall Stop
236W
630
HA
HW14.4 Door "C5" (2) 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HMF
6 Hinges
BB1279 4'/z x4'/2
600
HA
2 Door Pulls
15P
630
HA
2 Magnetic Catches
327
IV
2 Wall Stops
236W
630
HA
HW14.5 Door "C5" 2'-6" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HMF
3 Hinges
BB1279 4'/z x4'/2
600
HA
1 Closet Lock
AL80PD
626
SC
1 Overhead Stop
4-126
689
RI
08700-6
October 14, 2016
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
3 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
HW15 Door "S1" — Exterior
Storage Room: 4'-0" x T-0" x 1 3/" HMD x
HMF with
Louvers &
Dampers, Inc. #PLSL
Security Door Louver. Provide 18"H x 12"W
louver with #8 x
32 Phillips head steel
thru bolts and insect screen. Louver shall
be galvanized
sheet with baked enamel
finish. Color to match door.
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD
628
HA
1 Door Pull
7N
626
HA
1 Deadlock
B660P C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1 Panic Threshold
804 V x 52"
719
NA
1 Gasketing
120 NA 1 x 48" + 2 x 84"
NA
1 Overhead Holder
8-326
689
RX
HW17 Door "TC" — Trash Compound:
(2) 3'-0"x7'-0"x1 %" HMD x HMF w/4" Head, inactive
door fixed.
2 Continuous Hinges
780-112 HD
628
HA
1 Door Pull
7N
626
HA
1 Push Button Lock
Set
L1021-S-26D
626
SI
2 Flush Bolt
282D MS 12"
626
HA
1 Panic Threshold
804 V x 76"
719
NA
1 Gasketing
120 NA 1 x 72" + 2 x 84"
NA
2 Overhead Holder
8-326
689
RX
HW17.2Door "TC1" — Trash
Compound:
3'-0"x7'-0"x1 %" FLUSH HMD x
HMF w/4" Head.
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD X 83"
CLR
HA
_ 1 Combination Lock
LR1021-S-26D-41
626
SI
1 Cylinder Core
23-030 C145 KEYWAY KA
626
SC
1 Overhead Holder
8-326
626E
RX
3 Door Silencer
307D
Grey
HA
H1N17.3Door "TC3" —Trash Compound: 3'-8"x7'-0"x1 3/4" FLUSH HMD x. HMF w/4" Head.
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD X 83"
CLR
HA_
1 Combination Lock
LR1 021 -S-26D-41
626
SI
1 Cylinder Core
23-030 C145 KEYWAY KA
626
SC
1 Overhead Holder
8-326
626E
RX
i 3 Door Silencer ----------------
307D
Grey _
HA
HW18 Door "J" Closet: 2'-6'
x 6'-8" x 1 3/" HMD x HMF
1 Continuous Hinge
780-112HD
628
HA
1 Lockset
AL80PD SAT C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1 Kick Plate
190S 16" x 28"
630
HA
1 Overhead Holder (swings
out) 4-226
689
RX
1 Wall Stop (swings in) 236W
630
HA
3 Door Silencer 307D
Grey
HA
HW18.1 Door "J1" Closet: 3'-0" x 6'-8" x 1 %" HMD x HMF
1 Continuous Hinge 780-112HD
628
HA
1 Lockset AL80PD SAT C145 Keyway KA
626
SC
1 Kick Plate 190S 16" x 28"
630
HA
1 Overhead Holder (swings out) 8-326
689
RX
1 Wall Stop (swings in) 236W
630
HA
3 Door Silencer 307D
Grey
HA
HW19 Door "TH" Exterior from Tower: 36"w x 48"h Nystrom XTL Access Door & Frame
with 12" x 12" weatherproof ventilation louver
1 Hinge
Piano type, supplied by Nystrom
08700-7
October 14, 2016
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
1 Leaf Gasket
Supplied by Nystrom
1 Locking Handle
4-Dead'^^�
Supplied by Nystrom
66s�AR S44a l4eyway-KA
626
SG
1' Beer Pull
7P'
U926-
HA
� 9verhead Holder
8 326
689
RN,
HW20 Door "FR" — Rated Walk-in / Corridor Doors (additional to the walk-in door): (2) 3'-
0" x 8'-0" x 1 %" HMD x custom HMF 20 Minute Labeled Fire Door.
4 pair wide throw
ballbearing butts
BB1279 4-1/2 x 7
652
HA
1 Exit Latch
AL25D SAT
626
SC
1 Set Automatic Flushbolts
292D
626
HA
1 Smoke seals
5050W-25'
White
NA
1 Astragal
(Furnished with doors)
2 Kickplates
190S 16" X 35"
630
HA
2 Closers
(swing side, 180 degree)
1461 REG
689
LC
1 Overhead Coordinator
298D
626
HA
2 Magnetic Holder
996 24VDC
689
RX
02.4 Ceiling Access Panel: Babcock Davis #B-IT, 22" x 30" fire rated access door. Prime -
painted steel with 2" mineral fiber insulation, automatic panel closer, self latching, rating 1
'/2" hr. Alternates- Larsen. Style L-FRAP, 22" x 30", or Karp, Style KPR-150 FR, 22" x
30".Provide Fire Rated access door in draftstopping as noted on Drawings.
02.5 Sizes: Verify all sizes of doors with Drawings. Report any discrepancies to Wawa's
Project Manager. _
i
END OF SECTION 08700
08700-8
October 14, 2016
SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non -load -bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteris
load -bearing steel framing, pr(
assembly indicated according to
B. Sound Transmission Character
bearing steel framing, provide n
indicated according to ASTM E
testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL
-s: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non-
ide materials and construction identical to those tested in
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
tics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-
iterials and construction identical to those tested in assembly
) and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent
NG, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content is not less than [25] percent.
B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip galvanized] zinc
coating, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of,0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
July, 2011
092216 - 1
Section 09240 - Senergy Sentry Stucco System
A. WIND LOAD
1. Maximum deflection not to exceed U360 under
2. Refer to structural plans for design wind loads ii
B. SUBSTRATE SYSTEMS
1. Acceptable substrates are cement -boards conf(
C79/C1396); Exposure I or exterior plywood (G
2. For remodels or remedial work concerning exist
prepared as approved by BASF Wall Systems I
acceptable prior to the Senergy Sentry Stucco
3. Refer to Senergy's Accepted Stucco Wall Sys&
requirements, etc.
C. MOISTURE CONTROL
1. Prevent the accumulation of water behind the S
construction, in the design and detailing of the
a. Provide flashing to direct water to the exterio
window and door heads, beneath window ar
walls, above projecting features, at the base
installation.
b. The water -resistive barrier must be installed
building code requirements.
c. Openings must be flashed prior to window/dc
Refer to Senergy's Secondary Moisture Pra
d. Air leakage prevention: provide continuity of
through the system with connecting and con
air movement.
D. COLOR SELECTION
1. Refer to plans for color application legend and r
a. #3085 Meringue, finish textured Sahara
b. #354 Stark white, finish Fine
E. GRADE CONDITION
1. Senergy Sentry Stucco System is not intended f
in water or hydrostatic pressure. Ensure a minir
(50.8 mm) clearance above finished grade (side
F. TRIM, PROJECTING ARCHITECTURAL FEATURE;
1. Minimum slope for all projections shall be 1:2
2. Senergy Wall Systems were designed and teste
decreases, the chance for premature deteriorati
3. Low sloping conditions are subject to more extre
temperature which can lead to accelerated wea
ositive or negative design loads.
conformance with local code requirements.
ng with ASTM C1325 (Type A -exterior); gypsum sheathing (ASTM
e C/D or better); RE: Section 09250
conditions. Painted and otherwise coated surfaces shall be inspected and
ire application. The applicator shall verify that the proposed substrate is
tem installation..
Lath and Trim Accessories bulletin for more detailed information regarding trim
nergy Sentry Stucco System, either by condensation or leakage through the wall
all assembly.
where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly, including above
I door sills, at roof/wall intersections, decks, abutments of lower walls with higher
)f the wall and anywhere else required by local code or design at the time of
the substrate according to manufacturer's specifications and applicable
etc. installation to provide moisture protection of the building frame and interior.
Von Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall System bulletin.
barrier system at foundation, roof, windows, doors and other penetrations
itible air barrier components to minimize condensation and leakage caused by
locations
use below grade or on surfaces subject to continuous or intermittent immersion
,n 4" (101.6 mm) clearance above grade or as required by code, a minimum 2"
ilk/concrete flatwork).
to be applied to vertical surfaces. As the slope of the wall system application
i of any wall system increases.
ie heat. Low sloped areas are known to produce an increase in wall surface
ering of the low sloped surface.
G. SYSTEM JOINTS
1. Expansion joints in the system are required at building expansion joints, at prefabricated panel joints, floor lines of wood frame
construction, where substrates change and where structural movement is anticipated. Detail specific locations in construction
drawings.
2. Control joints are recommended at a minimum of every 13 m2 (144 ft2) of wall surface area and where specified by the design
professional. The maximum uncontrolled length or width is 5.5 lineal meters (18 lineal feet) and a maximum uncontrolled length to
width ratio of 21/2:1. Detail specific locations in construction drawings.
3. Sealant joints are required at all penetrations through the Senergy Sentry Stucco System (windows, doors, lighting fixtures,
electrical outlets, hose bibs, dryer vents, etc.) Refer to Senergy Sentry Stucco System typical details.
4. It is the sole responsibility of the project design team, including the architect, engineer, etc., to ultimately determine specific
expansion and control joint placement, width and design.
09240-1
August 26, 2016
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Consult BASF Wall Systems' Technical Services Department for specific recommendations concerning all other applications. Consult the
Senergy website, www.senergy.basf.com, for additional information about products and systems and for updated literature. Also, for
specifications that include metal plaster base, i.e. metal lath or wire lath, visit the Senergy website.
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Refer to all project drawings and other sections of this specification to determine the type and extent of work therein affecting the work
of this section, whether or not such work is specifically mentioned herein.
B. System Description: Composite wall system consisting of Senergy STUCCOBASETm PREMIX, and Senergy FINISH COAT.
C. Senergy products are listed in this specification to establish a standard of quality. Any substitutions to this specification shall be
submitted to and receive approval from the Architect at least 10 days before bidding. Proof of equality shall be borne by the submitter.
D. The system type shall be Senergy Sentry Stucco System as manufactured by BASF Corporation — Wall Systems, Jacksonville, Florida,
herein after referred to as "BASF Wall Systems".
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05400 Cold -formed metal framing
B. Section 07270 Air barriers
C. Section 07620 Sheet metal flashing and trim
D. Section 07920 Joint protection
E. Section 09220 Supports for plaster and gypsum board
F. Section 092216 Non-structural metal framing
G. Section 09250 Gypsum board
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
B. ASTM C926 Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster
C. ASTM C1063 Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement -Based
Plaster
D. ASTM C847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath
E. ASTM C933 Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath
F. ASTM C1032 Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base
G. ASTM D226 Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
H. ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds
I. ICC-ES AC11 Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings
J. ESR-1064 ICC Evaluation Service, Inc., ES ReportTm(STUCCOBASETM'/ STUCCOBASETm PREMIX)
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01002
B. Product Data: Provide data on Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and
durability.
C. Code Compliance: Provide manufacturer's applicable code compliance report.
D. Samples: Submit 8" [ x ] 8" size samples of Senergy Sentry Stucco System illustrating Finish Coat color and texture range.
E. Certificate: System manufacturer's approval of applicator.
F. Sealant: Sealant manufacturer's certificate of compliance with ASTM C1382.
G. System manufacturer's typical details, system design guide and related product literature which indicate preparation required, storage,
installation techniques, jointing requirements and finishing techniques.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: More than 10 years in the cement plaster stucco industry, with more than 1000 completed cement plaster stucco projects.
B. Applicator: Approved by BASF Wall Systems in performing work of this section.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for cement plaster stucco.
D. Field Samples (If required by WAWA Construction manager)
1. Construct one field sample panel for each color and texture, 24" x 24" in size of system materials illustrating method of attachment,
surface Finish color and texture.
2. Prepare each sample panel using the same tools and techniques to be used for the actual application.
3. Locate sample panel where directed.
4. Accepted sample panel [may] remain as part of the work. RE: Construction manager/ final determination
5. Field samples shall be comprised of all wall assembly components including substrate, water -resistive barrier, plaster trim
accessories, plaster base, STUCCOBASETM/STUCCOBASETM PREMIX, FINISH COAT, and typical sealant/flashing conditions
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials in
B. Protect Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials di
C. Store Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials in c
inal unopened packages with manufacturer's labels intact.
transportation and installation to avoid physical damage.
dry place protected from exposure to moisture and freezing.
1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply Senergy Sentry Stucco System in ambient temperatures below 4°C/40°F.
B. Do not apply Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials to frozen surfaces.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate and schedule installation of Senergy Sentry Stucco System with related work of other sections.
B. Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing, sand joint sealers to prevent water infiltration behind the system.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide BASF Wall Systems five-year limited materials warranty for Senergy Sentry Stucco Wall System installations.
B. Comply with BASF Wall Systems notification procedures to assure qualification for warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
All components of the Senergy Sentry Stucco System shall be obtained from the system manufacturer or through an authorized distributor.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Expanded metal lath (See also, Senergy Lath & Trim Lcessories System Support Bulletin): The lath shall comply with ASTM C847.
Furring and self -furring requirements shall be as set forth for wire -fabric lath. Minimum weight is 1.85 kg/m2 (3.4 Ib/yd2). Other
acceptable welded laths shall comply with _ASTM C933 and other acceptable woven laths shall comply with ASTM C1032.
B. Plaster Sand: Must be clean and free from deleterious amounts of loam, clay, silt, soluble salts and organic matter. Sampling and
testing must comply with ASTM C897. Plaster sand mist be graded within the following limits:
Percent retained by weight
Retained on ± 2 Percent
U.S. Standard Sieve Min. Max.
No.4 - 0
No. 8 0 10
No.16 10 40
No.30 30 65
No.50 70 90
No.100 95 100]
C. Water: clean and potable without foreign matter.
D.ST000OBASErm
1. STUCCOBASETm PREMIX: Factory -blended stucco mixture of Portland cement, reinforcing fibers, sand, and proprietary ingredients;
supplied by BASF Wall Systems for scratch and brown coats.
2. SENERGY STUCCOBASETm: Factory -blended stucco mixture of Portland cement, reinforcing fibers, and proprietary ingredients;
supplied by BASF Wall Systems for scratch and brown coats
E. Senergy REINFORCING MESH: Balanced, open weave glass fiber reinforcing mesh; twisted multi -end strands treated for compatibility
with Senergy System components.
1. INTERMEDIATE 6: standard/medium weight, 6 oz.
F. Senergy FINISH COAT: [SENERFLEX] [SILCOAT] [SENERLASTIC] [SENERLASTIC PLUS] and [STUCCOPRIME] Finish, 100%
acrylic polymer based finish; air cured, compatible with lBase Coat; Finish color;
#3085 Meringue, finish textured Sahara as scheduled on plans;
#354 Stark white, finish texture Fine [used at trim] as scheduled; manufactured by BASF Wall Systems.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Water -Resistive Barrier:
a. Protecto Wrap PW 100/40 Air Vapor barrier and flashing. Protecto Wrap Company 1955 S. Cherokee St. Denver, Co.
80223. Tel. 1 (800) 759-9727. www.Protecto wrap.com
1. Water -resistive barrier. (polymeric water -resistive barrier) - Tyvek StuccoWrap No Substitutions
2. In accordance with the 2006 IRC/IBC, wood based sheathings require a water -resistive vapor permeable barrier with a performance
at least equivalent to 2 layers.
B. Trim: Casing bead, comer bead, expansion joint and weep screed accessories shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1063.
Accessories shall be: vinyl, meeting ASTM D1784; galvanized, meeting ASTM A525 and ASTM A526; or zinc, meeting ASTM B69.
Vinyl or zinc accessories are recommended where highly humid or salt -laden service conditions exist. Refer to Senergy's Stucco Wall
Systems Lath and Trim Accessories bulletin for additional information.
1. Foundation weep screed: Beveled edge designed to terminate finish system and drain internal moisture.
2. Casing bead: Square edge style.
3. Comer bead: Small radius nose style.
4. Control joints: W-shaped accordion profile style.
5. Expansion joints: [Two piece type slip joint design] or [pair of casing beads spaced for application of sealant bead]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Division 2.
B. Walls
1. Substrates
a. As specified in section 09250 and recommendations in conjunction with manufacture requirements.
b. Sheathings must be securely fastened per applicable building code requirements and manufacturers recommendations.
c. When applying direct to concrete/unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C926, verify concrete/unit masonry is free of dust, dirt,
grease, oils, laitance, efflorescence, biological residue, existing paint or coatings, curing compounds, form release agents, or any
other contaminants which might affect the bond of SENERGY STUCCOBASETm/STUCCOBASETm PREMIX. Masonry walls
should be properly cured to full load bearing capacity, laid true, and with joints tooled. Properly prepared concrete will have an
open texture similar to fine grit sandpaper.
2. Flashings
a. All flashings are by others and must be installed in accordance with specific manufacturer's requirements. Where appropriate,
end -dams must be provided.
b. Openings must be flashed prior to window/door, HVAC, etc. installation. Refer to Senergy's Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier
Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall Systems bulletin for further guidance.
c. Windows and openings shall be flashed according to design and building code requirements.
d. Individual windows that are ganged to make multiple units require continuous head flashing and/or the joints between the units
must be fully sealed.
3. Water -Resistive Barrier (If installed by others, examine installation at this time)
a. Verify that the water -resistive barrier is installed over the substrate per applicable building code requirements, manufacturer's
specifications and wrapped into rough openings in accordance with Senergy's Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines
for Senergy Stucco Wall System bulletin prior to application of the Senergy Stucco Wall System.
b. The water -resistive barrier shall be free of any damage such as holes or breaks, and must be applied to all surfaces to receive the
Senergy Stucco Wall System.
4. Roof
Verify that all roof flashings have been installed in accordance with the guidelines set by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
Association (ARMA).
5. Kick -out flashing
Kick -out flashing must be installed where required. The kick -out flashing must be leak -proof and angled (min 100* ) to allow for
proper drainage and water diversion. Refer to Senergy's Sentry Stucco System Typical Details.
C. Do not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect all surrounding areas and surfaces from damage and staining during application of Senergy Sentry Stucco System.
B. Protect finished work at end of each day to prevent water penetration.
3.03 MIXING
General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close containers when not in use. Prepare in a
container and/or mixer that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do not use a container and/or mixer which has contained or been
cleaned with a petroleum -based product. Clean tools and equipment with water immediately after use. Dried material can only be
removed mechanically.
A. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier
1. Tyvek Stucco Wrap
B. Stucco Base Coat: STUCCOBASETM
1. Use mixer which is clean and free of foreign substances.
2. Add 18.9-22.7 liters (5-6 gallons) of clean potable water to mixer per one bag of STUCCOBASETm.
3. Add one bag of STUCCOBASETM1°.
4. Add one half 45.4-54.4 kg (100-120 Ibs) of the required plaster sand (ASTM C144 or ASTM C897).
5. Mix for 34 minutes at normal mixing speed while adding the remainder 45.4-54.4 kg (100-120 Ibs) of the plaster sand. Allow
material to set for 24 minutes, then remix adding water to achieve desired consistency.
Note: Continuous mixing may cause excessive air entrainment.
C. Stucco Base Coat: STUCCOBASETm PREMIX
1. Use mixer which is clean and free of foreign substances.
2. Add 7.6-9.5 liters (2-2.5 gallons) of clean potable water to mixer.
3. Slowly add one bag of STUCCOBASETm PREMIX.
4. Mix for one minute at normal mixing speed. Allow i
water to achieve desired consistency. Desired cor
lath or block) and whether the stucco is applied to
Note: Continuous mixing may cause excessive air ei
D. Senergy FINISH COAT
1. Thoroughly mix the factory -prepared material with
2. A small amount of clean, potable water may be adz
3. Additives are not permitted.
4. Close container when not in use.
5. Clean tools and equipment with water immediately
3.04 APPLICATION
General: Apply Senergy Sentry Stucco System materi
specification and related product literature.
A. Apply STUCCOBOND substrate bonding agent as pE
STUCCOBASETMISTUCCOBASE rm PREMIX applied!
B. Water -resistive barrier (Not required on concrete/umt
PREMIX applied direct in accordance with ASTM C92
1. Install according to the specific water -resistive barn
2. The water -resistive barrier shall be free of any dam
Senergy Sentry Stucco Wall System.
3. Wrap the water -resistive barrier into rough opening;
Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco V
frame and interior.
4. Coordinate work with other trades to assure proper
C. Trim junction
1. When two pieces of trim abut:
a. Set intersection of trim in a minimum 100 mm (4'
b. Allow 3-5 mm (1/8"-3/16") gap between the abu
c. Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturer';
substrate.
2. When two or more pieces of trim intersect:
a. The vertical trim piece shall be continuous with a
b. Miter all corners at intersections of trim.
c. Set intersection of trim in a minimum 100 mm (4"
d. Allow 3-5 mm (1/8"— 3/16") gap between the inte
e. Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturers
3. Application over open framing:
a. The weather -resistive membrane is placed over i
bracing, in accordance with the applicable code,
reinforcement are optional.
naterial to set for 2-4 minutes with mixing blades at rest. Then re -mix, adding
sistency varies with type of application (trowel or gun), substrate (paper -backed
a wall or a ceiling.
clean paddle and drill until thoroughly blended.
�d to adjust workability.
use. Dried material can only be removed mechanically..
alb in accordance with all Sentry Stucco System typical details, system
,r specifications to concrete/unit masonry that will receive SENERGY
directly in accordance with ASTM C926 mixture within 12 hours.]
masonry substrates surfaces to receive the STUCCO BASE Tm/STUCCOBASETM
3).
;r manufacturer's specifications and all applicable building code requirements.
ige such as holes or breaks, and must be applied to all surfaces to receive the
; (doors, windows, etc.) in accordance with Senergy's Secondary Moisture
fall System bulletin to increase the level of moisture protection to the building
detailing and installation of materials.
bed of acceptable trim sealant.
ing trim pieces. Do not overlap trim.
specifications. True expansion joints must be fastened to the structural
horizontal pieces.
bed of acceptable trim sealant.
secting trim pieces. Do not overlap the trim
specifications and ASTM C1063.
wood or steel framing spaced a maximum of 610 mm (24") on center. Wall
be installed. Square wall corners and parapet corners, metal corner
D. Metal Lath
1. The metal lath shall be applied with minimum i/Z side laps and 1" end laps.
2. When end laps occur between supports, lace or wire_ tie the ends of the sheets with 0,0475" galvanized annealed steel wire.
3. Refer to ASTM C1063 for additional information.
4. Corrosion -resistant fasteners for lath attachment shall penetrate a minimum of 25 mm (1 ") into wood framing.
5. Apply the Senergy Stucco Wall System over steel) framing [minimum No. 20 gauge, 0.0359" thick]. Lath is secured to framing
using No.8-18, S-12, pan -head, self -tapping screws 'spaced a maximum of 6 inches vertical on center to studs. The screws shall
penetrate framing -at least 3/8".
E. STUCCOBASETM exterior wall coating (ICC-ES AC-1 1) over 3.6 Self -Furring Galvanized Metal Lath:
1. Apply mixed SENERGY STUCCOBASETM to approved substrate by hand toweling or machine spraying in one or two coats to a
minimum thickness of 9.5 mm (3/8") and a maximum thickness (2 coats) of 1/2". If applied in a two coat scratch brown application,
the thickness is a minimum 3/16-1/4" per coat for a total thickness of 1/2". Ensure the first coat is sufficiently rigid to resist cracking
prior to application and leveling of the second coat. For localized areas, a slightly thicker application is acceptable. Level surface
using rod or darby. Trowel SENERGY STUCCOBASETm or other cementitious exterior wall coating into trim to seat trim. The lath
shall be fully embedded in the coating and shall be completely covered.
Note: Recommended method of cementitious exterior wall coating application is double back or scratch and brown. Use of
tighter (less water) cementitious exterior wall coating mix in initial double back or scratch coat can ease stucco application.
2. After surface has sufficiently hardened, use sponge or hard rubber float as required to fill voids, holes or imperfections, leaving the
surface ready to receive Senergy Finish.
3. Cure completed STUCCOBASETM by fog spraying with clean, potable water once or twice daily for 48 hours under normal
conditions; fog spray more frequently if hot, dry conditions exist.
4. Allow SENERGY STUCCOBASETM to cure 6 days prior to primer or Finish Coat application.
F. STUCCOBASETM or field mix exterior cement plaster conforming to ASTM C926 at a thickness of 3/4" to 7/8" over 3_._4#SF _ _elf u_rring
Galvanized M—et al Lath:
1. Apply mixed SENERGY STUCCOBASETM or field mix exterior cement plaster conforming to ASTM C926 to approved substrate by
hand toweling or machine spraying in two coats to a minimum thickness of 9.5 mm (3/4") and a maximum thickness of 7/8". Apply in
a two coat scratch brown application. The thickness is a minimum 318" per coat fora total thickness of 3/4" to 7/8". Ensure the first
coat is properly "scratched" and sufficiently rigid to resist cracking prior to application and leveling of the second or "brown" coat.
Level surface using rod or darby. Trowel SENERGY STUCCOBASE11,1 or field mix Exterior Cement Plaster into trim to seat trim. The
lath shall be fully embedded in the coating and shall be completely covered.
G. FINISH COAT
1. SENERFLEX FINISH: [SAHARA] [FINE]
-OR-
SENERLASTIC FINISH: [SAHARA] [FINE]
a. Apply FINISH directly to the dried base coat with a clean, stainless steel trowel.
b. Apply and level FINISH during the same operation to minimum obtainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage.
c. Maintain a wet edge on FINISH by applying and texturing continually over the wall surface.
d. Work FINISH to comers, joints or other natural breaks and do not allow material to set up within an uninterrupted wall area.
e. Float FINISH to achieve final texture.]
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01004.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces and remove excess material, droppings, and debris.
3.06 PROTECTION
Protect finished work in compliance with general conditions.
END SECTION 09240
�l
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior nonload-bearing steel st
foot uniform load perpendicular
2. Gypsum board.
3. Backer materials: Backer panels
1.2
1.3
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
l partition framing 20 (30 mil) gage (designed for 5 pounds per square
partition minimum).
wall tile and plastic wall panels.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05400 - Cold Formed etal Framing: Load -bearing steel stud exterior and interior wall framing
20 gage and heavier and ceiling joists. Cold formed deep leg track for interior nonload-bearing steel stud
partitions. Metal stud header wale framing and bracing supported from roof structure.
2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips, plywood, blocking, and fasteners attached to
partition framing.
3. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation.
4. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Installation of firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated partitions.
5. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish applied to gypsum board.
REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced within the test by these basic designations only.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM C 475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
2. ASTM C 840 - Application And imshing Of Gypsum Board.
3. ASTM C 1177 - Glass Mat Gyps�m Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
4. ASTM C 1178 - Coated Glass Matt Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel.
5. ASTM C 1396 - Gypsum Board
6. ASTM C 1658 - Glass Mat Gypsum Panels.
7. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surfaces of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of light gage metal framing components and
gypsum wallboard with minimum 5 years documented experience.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.
I
B. Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
C. Store and protect metal framing with weal herproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.
D. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer or supplier.
09250-1
November 5, 2013
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
E. Stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
Products used in the assembly shall carry a classification label from a testing laboratory acceptable to
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer:
1. CertainTeed Coro, Tampa, FL. (866) 427-2872.
2. Georgia-Pacific, Atlanta, GA. (800) 284-5347.
3. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC. (800) 628-4662.
4. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, IL. (800) 874-4968.
B. Standard Gypsum Board: Sheetrock, ASTM C 1396; 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length;
ends square cut, tapered edges. Provide one of the following products:
1. ProRock by Certainteed.
2. ToughRock by Georgia-Pacific.
3. Gold Bond Gypsum Board by National Gypsum.
4. Sheetrock by United States Gypsum.
C. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 or C 1658, 1/2 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends
square cut, tapered edges. Mold resistance of water resistant gypsum board shall score a rating of not less than 10
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273.
1. ProRoc M2Tech by Certainteed.
2. DensArmor Plus by Georgia-Pacific.
3. Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board by National Gypsum.
4. Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough by United States Gypsum.
D. Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends
square cut, tapered edges; core material as required to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) assemblies
indicated on Drawings.
1. ProRock Type X by Certainteed.
2. ToughRock Fireguard by Georgia-Pacific.
3. Gold Bond Fire Shield by National Gypsum.
4. Sheetrock Firecode X by United States Gypsum.
E. Water and Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths;
ends square cut, tapered edges, core material as required to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
assemblies indicated on Drawings. Mold resistance of water and fire resistant gypsum board shall score a rating
of not less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273.
1. Gold Bond Brand XP Fire -Shield C Gypsum Board, by National Gypsum. .
2. Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode "C" Core, by United States Gypsum.
F. Impact Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, thickness shown, manufactured to produce greater resistance to
surface indentation and through -penetration than standard gypsum panels.
1. ProRoc Brand Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by CertainTeed.
2. DensArmor Plus Impact Resistant by Georgia-Pacific.
3. Hi -Abuse Brand Wallboard by National Gypsum.
09250-2
November 5, 2013
4. Sheetrock Brand
: Gypsum Wallboard by United States Gypsum.
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
G. Impact and Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, thickness shown, manufactured to produce greater
resistance to surface indentation and through -penetration than standard gypsum panels and providing water
resistant gypsum core with paperless facing and mold resistance with a rating of not less than 10 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 3273.
1. DensArmor Plus Impact Resistant by Georgia Pacific.
H. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASD
extra resistance to moisture and saggin
1. ProRoc Brand Exterior Soffit Bi
2. DensArmor Plus by Georgia -Pa
3. Gold Bond Brand Exterior Soffi
4. Type X Soffit Board by Temple
5. Sheetrock Brand Exterior Gvnsi
I. Gypsum Board Fasteners:
1. Metal Framing: ASTM C 954
tapping steel screws.
a. One Layer 1/2 Inch: 1 in
b. One Layer 5/8 Inch: 1-1)
C. Two Layers: 5/8 Inch: 1
2. Wood Furring: ASTM C 100.
screws.
J. Gypsum Board Accessories:
1.
Corner Beads: Sheetrock Brai
Gypsum.
2.
Edge Trim: Galvanized steel ca:
a. No. 200-B, L shape by U
b. No. 200-A, J shape by Ui
3.
Control Joint Accessory Piece:
a. No. 093 roll -formed zinc
4.
Vertical Movement Joint Trim:
a. No DRMZ-625-200 alum
5.
Adhesive:
a. Commercial Adhesive co
6.
Acoustical Insulation:
a. Unfaced fiberglass batts s
7.
Firestopping:
a. Specified in Section 0784
C 1396, Type X, 5/8" thick, gypsum wallboard manufactured to produce
ird by CertainTeed.
ific.
Board by National Gypsum.
nland.
n Ceiling Board by United States Gypsum.
2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
I
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
C 1002, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion -resistant self -drilling self -
inch.
/8 inch.
1-1/4 inch, Type W bugle head, corrosion -resistant self -drilling steel
No. 104 Dur-A-Bead galvanized steel corner bead by United States
ted States Gypsum for tight abutment at edges.
ed States Gypsum at other locations.
i C1arkDietrich.
um Z shape trim by Fry Reglet.
dying with ASTM C 557.
;cified in Section 07210.
for penetrations of fire -resistive rated gypsum board.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper tape.
2. Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape.
3. Backer Panels: j
a. Glass -Mat Backer Material: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape.
C. Joint Compound
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard:
09250-3
November 5, 2013
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
a. Sheetrock Brand Ready -Mixed Lightweight All -Purpose Joint Compound with Dust Control, by
United States Gypsum.
b. ProForm Lite Ready Mix Joint Compound with Dust -Tech by National Gypsum.
2. Exterior Applications:
a. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting -type, sandable
topping compound.
b. Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
3. Backer Panels:
a. Glass -Mat Backer Materials: Use setting -type taping compound as recommended by backer panel
manufacturer and that is rated 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in
accordance with ASTM D 3274.
2.4 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD
A. ASTM C 1396 and ASTM C 1177; water resistant gypsum core surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass
fiber mats; thickness shown on the Drawings, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut. Provide one of the
following products:
1. Dens -Glass Gold Type `X' gypsum sheathing as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific.
2. Gold Bond Brand 5/8" e2XP Fire Shield Type `X' Gypsum Panel by Sheathing by National Gypsum.
B. Sheathing Board Fasteners: ASTM C 954 and ASTM C 1002, 1 inch length for 1/2 inch sheathing board and 1-
1/4 inch length for 5/8inch thick sheathing board, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion -resistant self -drilling steel
screws.
2.5 BACKER MATERIALS
A. Provide cementitious backing materials as follows where indicated to receive cement board, cement backer board,
or cementitious backer board.
1. Fiber Cement Backing Board: Hardibacker by James Hardie Building Products, Mission Viejo, CA (888)
542-7343.
2. Thickness as indicated.
a. Hardibacker 250, 1/4".
b. Hardibacker 500, 1/2".
C. Durock Next Gen (used at exterior walls behind walk-in coolers and freezers and elsewhere as
indicated in drawings):
i. 5' x 3' x ''V2" Cement Board
ii. 4' x 8' x %" Cement Board
d. Other as noted on Drawings.
B. Glass -Mat Backer Materials: Provide glass -mat moisture resistant gypsum core backer materials complying with
ASTM C 1178. Glass -Mat Backer Material shall score a rating of 10 when tested according to ASTM D 3273.
Thickness as shown on the Drawings. Provide Type X where required as shown on Drawings. Provide one of the
following products:
1. GlasRoc Tilebacker by Certainteed.
2. DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific.
3. GreenGlass Tile Backer by Temple-Inland.
4. Gold Bond e2XP Tile Backer by National Gypsum.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
09250-4
November 5, 2013
A. Examine existing conditions and
conform to product manufacturer's
Work. Verify that rough -in utilities
conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine panels to assure they are c
sagging, irregular shape, fuzzy or splc
C. Beginning of erection and installation
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK
A. Coordinate erection of studs with
door frames.
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
vrit areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions
irements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive
in -place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
and free of moisture and mold damage as evidenced by discoloration,
y surface contamination, and discoloration.
acceptance of existing conditions.
metal door and window frames, sliding window, and overhead coiling
B. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building accessory items
installed within framing.
3.3 INSTALLATION - STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Installation Standards: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
installation and with further details and instruction by gypsum board manufacturer's written construction
guidelines.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support
fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
Comply, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."
3.4 INSTALLATION - PARTITION FRAMING
A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 754, GA-216, and
GA-600.
B. Install bracing at terminations in
C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load -bearing steel framing members. Frame both
sides of joints independently.
D. Install studs so flanges within framing sy stem point in same direction.
E. Metal Stud Spacing: Unless otherwise noted, provide interior framing at maximum 24 inches on center. Provide
spacing of 16 inches on center maximum for walls to receive ceramic tile.
F. Align stud web openings horizontally. j
G. Splice studs with minimum 8 inch nested, lap, fasten each stud flange with minimum two screws.
I
H. Construct comers using minimum three studs.
I. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, maximum 2 inches from each side of openings.
J. Place studs as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2 inches from abutting walls.
09250-5
November 5, 2013
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
K. Install headers at partition openings using load -bearing C-shaped joists specified in Section 05400.
L. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items.
M. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing.
N. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports.. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending
to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to building structure above.
O. Maintain clearance under structural members to avoid deflection transfer to studs.
1. Where indicated, construct partition to accommodate vertical deflection.
2. Install optional products specified in Part 2 above in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction.
a. Install clip with step bushing in center of slotted hole.
b. Use a minimum of two fasteners per clip leg to connect clip to structure and partition framing.
C. Attach clip to each stud by screwing through the center of each step bushing.
P. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner
Ranges in double -stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools.
1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed -light frames.
2. Place horizontally a cut -to -length section of runner with web -flange bend at each end, fasten with
minimum one screw per flange.
3. Position a cut -to -length stud (extending to top runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header.
Q. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and
support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
R. Lateral Bracing for Metal Studs:
1. In metal stud partitions and bulkheads where length of metal studs is over 8 feet, install lateral bracing
using one of the following methods:
a. Install 1-1/2 inch cold -formed channel through stud web holes and screw attach in place with clip
angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie
together.
b. Install optional products specified in Part 2 above in accordance with the manufacturers printed
instructions.
C. Install field -cut runner for solid bridging at each end of wall, adjacent to wall openings, and 10 feet
on center maximum. Install 1-1/2 inch wide, 20 (30 mil) gage strap bracing on both sides of stud.
Fasten strap bracing to each solid bridging runner section with four screws.
2. Gypsum Board Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals:
a. Provide bracing at ceiling line or at mid -span of studs at areas without ceilings.
3. Wire Mesh Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals:
a. Stud Length Greater Than 8 Feet and Up To 10 Feet: Provide bracing at midpoint.
b. Stud Length Greater Than 10 Feet and Up To 15 Feet: Provide bracing at third points.
C. Stud Length Greater Than 15 Feet and Up To 20 Feet: Provide bracing at quarter points.
Install braced framing of steel stud framing as indicated on Drawings. Use only screw attachments.
T. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet
partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories and hardware.
U. Framing Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below,
unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
CONNECTION
09250-6
FASTENER
November 5, 2013
Floor Track to Concrete ......................
Partition Stud to Floor Track ..............
Stud Brace Web to Stud Web .............
Plates and Straps to Studs ...................
Stud Web to Stud Web .......................
Stud Brace Web to Attachment Angle
Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using
............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
clip Angles ........................
Runnerto Header ................................ !.............................................
V. Installation Tolerances: Install steel frE
are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
members.
W. Isolate suspension systems from built
prevent transfer of loading imposed by
3.5 INSTALLATION - FURRING
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
1 - Pin at 24 inches on center.
1 - Screw each side at each flange.
2 - Screws.
2 - Screws.
2 - Screws.
2 - Screws.
2 - Screws to stud and 2 - Screws to cold
formed channel.
1 - Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum
6 inches from each end.
components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment
ured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel
structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to
;tural movement.
A. Furring Channels:
1. Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, to masonry and concrete surfaces with hammer
set or powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges.
2. Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor with 2 fasteners in each wing.
B. Wall Furring:
1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure.
2. Space metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center.
3. Furring for Fire Rating: Install metal furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings,
and to GA-600 requirements.
3.6 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and
mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions as specified on
Drawings. Or specified in section 07210
3.7 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 840, GA-216, and GA-
600.
1. Use water resistant gypsum board at wet areas including walls and ceiling in toilet rooms, janitor closets,
and food prep areas as applicable and where shown.
2. Use fire resistant gypsum board at ilocations of fire -resistive rated assemblies indicated on Drawings.
3. Use water and fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire -resistive rated assemblies where water
resistant gypsum board is specified.
4. Use standard gypsum board at locations not indicated to be fire resistant or water resistant type.
B. Where applicable, install ceiling panels before the installation of wall panels.
C. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction in accordance with ASTM C 840, with attachment
to firm bearing surfaces over framing members. Do not align panel joints with edges of openings.
D. Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with screws; apply second layer with screws, staggering
09250-7
i
November 5, 2013
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
joints with those of first layer. Use adhesive only to hold second layer until screwed in place. Use fire rated
gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions.
E. Treat cut edges, holes, fastener heads, and joints, including those at angle intersections, in water resistant gypsum
board and exterior gypsum soft board with specified joint compound. Treat prior to installation.
F. Place gypsum panels over supporting framing members with panel ends aligning and parallel with framing
members. Leave bottom edge spacing above floor in accordance with GA-216.
G. Install fasteners spaced and located in accordance with GA-216 or ASTM C840.
3.8 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Install gypsum board sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, GA-216 and GA-600.
B. Erect single layer gypsum board horizontally with attachment to firm bearing.
C. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. Use longest practical length.
D. Using screws, attach panels in place at maximum 12 inches on center, perimeter and field, to supporting framing.
E. Protect exposed gypsum core at perimeter edges and penetrations by covering core with metal trim.
3.9 INSTALLATION - BACKER MATERIALS
A. Install glass -mat backer materials where indicated to receive glass -mat backer material. Install in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.10 INSTALLATION - JOINT TREATMENT
A. Install joint treatment in accordance with GA-216.
B. Install corner bead, trim, and casing in accordance with GA-216.
C. Install control joints full height of partition with 1/2 inch gap between board edges and between studs. Control
joints shall be installed in accordance with the gypsum manufacturer's recommended guidelines for control joints
or the Gypsum Association GA-234 for control joint in fire rated systems. Apply sealant at base of joint and
control joint accessory piece at face. Install control joints at the following locations:
1. Where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet.
2. At pairs of doors, install vertical control joint at each jamb. At single doors, install control joint at latch
side of jamb.
3.11 FINISH
A. Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and GA-214 Finish Levels.
B. Provide gypsum board finish levels at locations as follows:
1. Level 0 (GA-214): No taping, finishing, or accessories necessary.
a. Exposed surfaces above 12 ft high in Back of house and Storage Area.
2. Level 1 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedment set in joint compound. Surface free of
excess joint compound. Tool Marks and ridges are acceptable.
a. Areas above ceilings where required by drawings.
b. Concealed areas.
09250-8
November 5, 2013
C. Interior exposed gypsum
Level 3 (GA-214): Joints and i
coat of joint compound applied c
are applied over joints, angles, f
ridges.
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
ices not indicated to be painted.
nor angles have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional
all joints and interior angles and two separate coats of joint compound
ier heads, and accessories. Surface smooth and free of tool marks and
a. Interior gypsum surfaces indicated to be painted.
b. Exterior exposed gypsumi surfaces.
C. Painted Gypsum Sheathing: Exposed lexterior gypsum sheathing to receive a paint finish shall be prepared as
follows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions:
1. Apply fiberglass mesh joint tape over joints and embed in setting -type joint compound specified.
2. Skim coat surface with setting -type joint compound for smooth finish.
3. Finish painting is specified in Section 09900.
D. Textured Coating.
1. Apply textured coating to gypsum board surfaces as scheduled on the drawings.
a. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
b. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture
finish by covering them .7ith masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these
precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to
prevent damage accordinglto texture -finish manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
09250-9
November 5, 2013
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ceramic tile materials and ap
1.
Ceramic wall tile anc
2.
Porcelain tile.
3.
Glass tile (including
4.
Installation adhesive
5.
Trim, cementitious b
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 09300
TILE
plications including the following:
trim units (glazed).
)saics).
mortars, grouts and sealants.
ker units and other accessories specified herein.
A. Tile Manufacturer (Single Source Responsibility): Company specializing in ceramic and/or
porcelain tiles, mosaics, and/or trirp units . Obtain tile from a single source with resources to
provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
a. All wall tile and mosaics shall be provided by Owners vendor: Haines, Jones, & Cadbury.
General Contractor is responsible for coordination and installation.
Haines, Jones, & Cadbury contact:
�`. David Lightfoot
David. Lightfoot@hjcinc.com
(479) 366-0642 Cell
(800) 459-7099 Toll Free
(484) 708-9732 Fax
B. Installation System Manufacturer (Single Source Responsibility): Company specializing
adhesives& mortars. Obtain installation materials from single source manufacturer to insure
consistent quality and full compatibp ty
a. All wall tile adhesives and mortars shall be provided and installed by General Contractor.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of ceramic and/or porcelain tiles, tile,
mosaics, trim units with five years documented experience with installations of similar scope,
materials and design.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Acceptance at Site: deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals
unbroken and labels, including grade seal, intact until time of use, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Store tile and installation system materials in a dry location; handle in a manner to prevent
chipping, breakage, and contamination.
C. Protect latex additives, organics adhesives, epoxy adhesives and sealants from freezing or
overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; store at room temperature when
possible.
09300-1
D. Store Portland cement mortars and grouts in a dry location.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Provide ventilation and protection of environment as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Prevent carbon dioxide damage to tile, mosaics, trim units as well as adhesives, mortars,
grouts and other installation materials, by venting temporary heaters to the exterior.
C. Maintain ambient temperatures not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or more than 100
degrees F (38 degrees C) during installation and for a minimum of seven days after
completion. Setting of Portland cement is retarded by low temperatures. Protect work for
extended period of time and from damage by other trades. Installation with latex Portland
cement mortars requires substrate, ambient and material temperatures at least 37 degrees F
(3 degrees C). There shall be no ice in slab. Freezing after installation will not damage latex
Portland cement mortars. Protect Portland cement based mortars and grouts from direct
sunlight, radiant heat, forced ventilation (heat & cold) and drafts until cured to prevent
premature evaporation of moisture. Epoxy mortars and grouts require surface temperatures
between 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) at time of
installation. It is the General Contractor's responsibility to maintain temperature control.
D. Do not install epoxy based materials when surface temperature is less than 60 degrees F
(16 degrees C) or over 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of tile work with related work.
1.6 WARRANTY �t
A. The Contractor warrants the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract
Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship. The
manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, and other installation materials shall provide a written
warranty per Contract Documents which covers materials and labor.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Submit maintenance data Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions recommended, stain
removal methods, as well as polishes and waxes recommended.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer of grout and silicone joint sealant: LATICRETE International, Inc.,
which is located at: 1 LATICRETE Park N.; Bethany, CT 06524-3423; Toll Free Tel: 800-
243-4788; Tel: 203-393-0010; Fax: 203-393-1684; Email:reQuest info
(technicalservices(oD-laticrete.com); Web:www.laticrete.com/Mvislwww.drytek.com
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C. Obtain products from a single manufacturer.
2.2 TILE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with product requirements and performance requirements, provide
products by manufacturers as noted on Contract Documents/Drawings
f
09300-2
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES - CERAMIC TILE
A. Lightweight, Waterproof Tile Backer Board to comprised of high -density polystyrene core
and reinforced, waterproof cementitious coating on both sides. Available in thicknesses from
1/4 inch to 2 inches (6 millim i ters to 50 millimeters) and specifically designed for use in
bonded tile installations.
B. Cementitious backer board units: size and thickness as specified, complying with ANSI
Al 18.9. 1
2.4 INSTALLATION Material's -ALL WALL TILE ADHESIVES AND MORTARS SHALL BE SUPPLIED
AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ALL WALL TILE, GROUT AND TILE JOINT
SEALANT SUPPLIED BY OWNER'S VENDOR INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR.
A. Epoxy Adhesive to be chemical resistant 100% solids epoxy with high temperature
resistance, GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to ISO R2, and meet the following
minimum physical requirements:
1. UL GREENGUARD Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and
UL GREENGUARD old Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG UL
2818).
2. Compressive strength (ANSI Al 18.3): > 5000 psi (34.4 MPa).
3. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI Al 18.3): > 1250 psi (8.6 MPa).
4. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI Al 18.3): > 600 psi (4.1 MPa).
5. Tensile Strength (ANSI Al 18.3): > 1400 psi (9.6 MPa).
6. Shrinkage (ANSI Al 18.3): 0 - 0.1 %.
7. Total VOC Content: 0.22 mg/m3.
8. ISO 13007 Classification: R2.
9. Cured Epoxy Adhesive to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard,
tea, coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices,
vegetable oil, detergents, brine, sugar, cosmetics and blood, as well as chemically
resistant to dilute fool acids, dilute alkalis, gasoline, turpentine and mineral spirits.
B. Improved Modified Dry -Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set and slurry bond coats to be
weather, frost, shock resistant!, non-flammable, GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to
ISO C2TES2,and meet the following physical requirements:
1. UL GREENGUARD Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and
UL GREENGUARD Gold Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG UL
2818).
2. 28 Day Porcelain Tile Shear Strength (ANSI Al 18.15): > 450 psi (3.1 MPa).
3. 28 Day Dry Cure / 20 Cycle Freeze -Thaw Porcelain Tile.
4. Shear Strength (ANS Al 18.15): = 250 psi (1.7 MPa).
5. 7 Day Cure / 7 Day Water Immersion (ANSI Al 18.15): > 280 psi (1.9 MPa).
6. Extended Open Time (ANSI Al 18.15): > 100 psi (0.7 MPa).
7. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0.
8. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3.
C. Rapid -Setting Modified Dry -Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar to be weather, frost, shock
resistant, non-flammable, conform to EN12004:2007 + A1:2012 for Class C2FTS2 adhesive,
and meet the following physical requirements:
1. 28 Day Porcelain Tile IShear Strength (ANSI Al18.4): > 400 psi (2.8MPa).
2. 7 Day Cure / 7 Day Water Immersion (ANSI Al 18.4): > 200 psi (1.4 MPa).
3. Shear Bond / Quarry Tile to Plywood (ANSI Al 18.11): > 190 psi (1.3 MPa).
4. Open Time (ANSI Al 8.4): >= 30 minutes.
D. Modified Dry -Set Cement Thin Ped Glass Tile Adhesive to be weather, frost, shock resistant,
non-flammable, GreenGuard compliant, conform to ISO C2TS1, and meet the following
physical requirements:
09300-3
1. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4 5.2.4): > 370 psi-(2.55 MPa).
2. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4 5.2.3): 199 psi (1.37 MPa).
3. Total VOC Content: <=0.22 mg/m3.
4. mm.
5. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3.
E. Organic Adhesive shall be a non-flammable, water resistant, latex adhesive and shall meet
the following physical requirements:
1. Open Time (ANSI A136.1): 70 minutes @ 75 degrees F (24 degrees C).
2. Color: White
3. Density (ANSI Al36.1): 13.2 Ibs/gal (1.6 kg/1).
4. Total VOC Content: < 36.00 g/L.
F. Epoxy Grout (Commercial/Residential) shall be non -toxic, non-flammable, non -hazardous
during storage, mixing, application and when cured, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, and
shall meet the following physical requirements:
1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout supplied by
Owner's Vendor.
2. UL GREENGUARD Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and
UL GREENGUARD Gold Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG UL
2818).
3. Compressive Strength (ANSI Al 18.3): 3,800 psi (26.2 MPa).
4. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI Al 18.3): 1,100 psi (7.6 MPa).
5. Tensile Strength (ANSI Al 18.3): 1,100 psi (7.6 MPa).
6. Thermal Shock (ANSI Al 18.3): > 800 psi (5.5 MPa).
7. Water Absorption (ANSI Al 18.3): < 0.05%.
8. Vertical Joint Sag (ANSI Al 18.3): Pass.
9. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3.
10. Cured Epoxy Grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea,
coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil,
brine, sugar, cosmetics, and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute acids
and dilute alkalis.
G. Latex Portland Cement Grout to be weather, frost and shock resistant, UL GREENGUARD
Gold compliant, as well as meet the following physical requirements:
1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Select Grout supplied by Owner's
Vendor.
2. Compressive Strength (ANSI Al 18.7): 4500 psi (31 MPa).
3. Tensile Strength (ANSI Al 18.7): 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
4. Flexural Strength (ANSI Al 18.7):1,250 psi (8.6 MPa).
5. Water Absorption (ANSI Al 18.7): < 5%.
6. Linear Shrinkage (ANSI Al 18.7): < 0.05 %.
7. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0.
8. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3.
H. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant to be a one component, neutral cure, exterior grade
silicone sealant and meet the following requirements:
1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE LATASIL and LATICRETE LATASIL 9118 Primer
supplied by Owner's Vendor
2. Tensile Strength (ASTM C794): 280 psi (1.9 MPa).
3. Hardness (ASTM D751; Shore A): 25 (colored sealant) /15 (clear sealant).
4. Weather Resistance (QUV Weather-ometer): 10,000 hours (no change).
5.
Spot Bonding Epoxy Adhesive for installing tile, Ceramic tile over vertical and overhead r
surfaces shall be high strength, high temperature resistant, non -sag and shall meet the
09300-4
following physical requirer
1. Thermal Shock R
2. Water Absorption
3. Compressive Stre
4. Shear Bond Strer
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTRATE EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces to be co,
1. Sound, rigid and co
2. Systems, including
shall be in conform,
applications, or app
3. Clean and free of di
efflorescence, form
4. For thin -bed tile insl
including medium b
tiles with edges sho
1/4 inch in 10 feet (I
inch variation in 12
high points in the sL
length, maximum al
required plane, with
in 600mm) when m(
substrate units, sud
units, adjacent edge
lance (ANSI Al 18.3): > 1,000 psi (6.9 MPa).
ISI Al 18.3): 0.1 %.
i (ANSI Al 18.3): > 8,300 psi (57.2 MPa).
(ANSI Al 18.3 Modified): > 730 psi (5 MPa).
.red with ceramic tile, mosaics, are:
Form to good design/engineering practices;
ie framing system and panels, over which tile will be installed
ice with the International Building Code (IBC) for commercial
gable building codes.
;t, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance,
il, loose plaster, paint, and scale;
Ilations when a cementitious bonding material will be used,
J mortar: maximum allowable variation in the tile substrate - for
er than 15 inches (375mm), maximum allowable variation is
nm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1/16
ches (1.5mm variation in 300mm) when measured from the
face. For tiles with at least one edge 15 inches (375mm) in
wable variation is 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3mm in 3m) from the
io more than 1/16 inch variation in 24 inches (1.5mm variation
isured from the high points in the surface. For modular
as exterior glue plywood panels or adjacent concrete masonry
cannot exceed 1/32 inch (0.8mm) difference in height
B. Advise General Contractor avid Owner Project Manager of any surface or substrate
conditions requiring correctior� before tile work commences. Beginning of work constitutes
acceptance of substrate or surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES - l
1. Control Joints: Tile it
ceramic tile, which is
filled joints shall be o
substrate control join
2. Movement Joints: Ce
corners, other chang
substrate. Expansion
restraining surfaces,
Council of North Ame
LATICRETE LATASI
;tallations shall include sealant filled joints between the
ever any control joints in the substrate. However, the sealant
set horizontally by as much as one tile width from the
location to coincide with the grout joint pattern.
amic tile installations shall include expansion joints at coves,
s in substrate plane and over any expansion joints in the
oints in ceramic tile are also required at perimeters, at
t penetrations and at the intervals described in the Tile
'ica, Inc. (TCNA) Handbook Installation Method EJ171. Use
and backer rod.
3.
B. . Adjusting: Correction of defective work for a period of one year following substantial
completion, return to job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without
limitation, tiles broken in normal abuse due to deficiencies in setting bed, loose tiles or grout,
and all other defects which shall develop as a result of poor workmanship.
3.3 INSTALLATION -TILE
A. General: Install in accordance !with current versions of American National Standards
Institute, Inc. (ANSI) "A108 A encan National Standard Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile" and TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation." Cut
and fit, neatly around corners 1 fittings, and obstructions. Perimeter pieces to be minimum
09300-5
half tile, brick or stone. Chipped, cracked, split pieces and edges are not acceptable. Make
joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform width to tolerance +/- 1/16 inch over 8' (1.5mm in
2.4m). Install divider strips at junction of flooring and dissimilar materials
1.
B. Thin Bed Method (interior adhered veneers):
1. Install latex Portland cement mortar in compliance with current revisions of ANSI
A108.02 (3.11), A108.1 B and ANSI Al08.5. Use the appropriate trowel notch size
to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the latex Portland
cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of
trowel. Spread only as much latex Portland cement mortar as shall be covered
while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format (> 8
inches x 8 inches/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone, rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or
sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread latex Portland cement mortar onto the
back of (i.e. ' back -butter') each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling latex Portland
cement mortar over the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the latex Portland
cement mortar with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and
flatness. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex Portland cement
mortar from tile or stone face and joints between pieces.
C. Epoxy Thin Bed Method:
1. Install epoxy adhesive in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.14)
and ANSI Al08.6. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding
of the tile or stone selected. Work the epoxy adhesive into good contact with the
substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much epoxy
adhesive as shall be covered while the adhesive surface is still wet and tacky.
When installing large format (> 8 inches x 8 inches/200mm x 200mm) the/stone,
rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread epoxy
adhesive onto the back of (i.e. ' back -butter') each piece/sheet in addition to
trowelling epoxy adhesive over the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the epoxy
adhesive with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness.
Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess epoxy adhesive from tile or stone
face and joints between pieces.
D. Thin Bed Method (Glass Tiles):
1. Ensure that the backs of the glass tiles have been thoroughly washed, rinsed, and
completely dried prior to installation. Install latex Portland cement thin -set mortar in
compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.11), Al 08.1 B and ANSI
Al08.5. Remove any excess setting material from in between tile edges. If voids or
water spots in the adhesive are visible through the tile, remove the tile and correct
the installation. Allow the tile installation to cure a minimum of 48 hours at 70
degrees F (21 degrees C) prior to grouting. Clean excess latex Portland cement
mortar from the face of the glass tiles and joints between pieces.
E. Grouting or Pointing (Interior Adhered Veneers):
1. Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile=Grouting Epoxy (ANSI Al 18.3): Follow
manufacturer's recommendations for minimum cure time prior to grouting. Store liquid
components of LATICRETE SpectraLOCK@ PRO Premium Groutt for 24 hours @ 70-80°F
(21-27°C) prior to use to facilitate mixing and application. Substrate temperature must be 40-
95°F (4-35°C). Verify joints are free of dirt, debris or grout spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt
off tile faces and remove water standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive,
abrasive, non -slip or rough textured ceramic tile, or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated
to facilitate cleaning. Cut open pouch and pour LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Premium
Grout Part A Liquid into a clean mixing pail. Then open pouch and pour LATICRETE
SpectraLOCK PRO Premium Grout Part B Liquid into the mixing pail. Mix by hand or with a
09300-6
slow speed (<300 rpm) mixe i until the two liquids are well blended. Then, while mixing, add
LATICRETE Spectral-OCK Grout Part C Powder and blend until uniform. For narrow joints,
it is acceptable to leave out yip to 10% of the LATICRETE Spectral-OCK Grout Part C
Powder to produce a more fl id mix. Install LATICRETE Spectral-OCK PRO Premium Grout
in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.13) and ANSI A108.6 (3.0 - 4.0).
Spread using a sharp edged, firm rubber float and work grout into joints. Using strokes
diagonal (at 457 angle) to they grout lines, pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Then hold
float face at a 900 angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess
grout, stroking diagonally to avoid pulling grout out of filled joints. Once excess grout is
removed, a thin film/haze will be left. Initial cleaning of the remaining film/haze can begin
approximately 20 minutes after grouting (wait longer when temperatures are cooler). Begin
by mixing one cleaning additive packet with 2 gallons (7.6 L) of clean water in a clean bucket
to make cleaning solution. Dip a clean sponge into the bucket and then wring out cleaning
solution until sponge is damp. Using a circular motion, lightly scrub grouted surfaces with the
damp sponge to loosen grou� film/haze. Then drag sponge diagonally over the scrubbed
surfaces to remove froth. Rinse sponge frequently and change cleaning solution at least
every 50 ft2 (4.7m2). Discard sponges as they become "gummy" with residue. Check work
as you clean and repair any low spots with additional grout. One (1) hour after finishing first
cleaning, clean the same area again following the same procedure but utilizing a clean white
scrub pad and fresh cleaning solution. Rinse scrub pad frequently. Drag a clean sponge
diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Use each side of sponge only once
before rinsing and change cleaning solution at least every 50 ft2 (4.7m2). Allow cleaned
areas to dry and inspect tile/stone surface. For persistent grout film/haze (within 24 hours),
repeat scrubbing procedure with undiluted white vinegar and clean pad. Rinse with clean
water and allow surface to dry. Inspect grout joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with
freshly mixed LATICRETEO Spectral-OCKO PRO Premium Groutt. Cautions: Do not use
undiluted white vinegar on po !shed marble or limestone unless a test spot in an
inconspicuous area indicates �no change in finish appearance; do not use acid cleaners on
epoxy grout less than 7 days old
a. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK
PRO Premium Grout.
References:
LATICRETE Data Sheets: 681.0, 681.5
LATICRETE MSDS: Premium Part A, Premium Part B, Part C Powder, Cleaning
Additive
GREENGUARD Certificate: PRO Premium
LATICRETE Techpical Data Sheets: 111, 198, 216, 400
2. Polymer Fortified Cement Grout (ANSI A118.7) Allow ceramic tile installation to
cure a minimum of 24 hours @ 700 F (21 °C). Verify grout joints are free of dirt,
debris or the spacers Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any
water standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-
slip or rough textured Stone, or trim units to facilitate cleaning. Surface temperature
must be between 40-90° F (4-32°C). Mixing: Pour approximately 64 oz. (1.9 L) of
clean, potable water into a clean mixing container. Add a 25 lb. (11.3 kg) bag of
LATICRETEO PERM ACOLORO Grout to the container while mixing. Mix with a
slow speed mixer to a smooth, stiff consistency. Allow to slake for 5-10 minutes
and remix. Install latex Portland cement grout in compliance with current revisions
of ANSI A108.1A (7.0 Grouting of tile), ANSI A108.02 (4.5 Cleaning tile) and ANSI
A108.10. Dampen dry surfaces with clean water. Spread using a sharp edged,
hard rubber float and work grout into joints. Using diagonal (at 45' angle to
direction of grout line) strokes, pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Hold float face
at a 90' angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout,
stroking diagonally to! reduce pulling grout out of filled joints. Initial cleaning can
begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 15-20 minutes after grouting @
09300-7
70' F (21 °C). Higher temperatures may require faster time to initial cleaning; wider
joints or lower temperatures may require a longer time to initial cleaning. Begin
initial cleaning by lightly dampening the entire grouted area with a damp sponge.
Then wash clean the entire area with a damp (not wet) sponge. Drag a clean towel,
dampened with water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the
veneer face to remove any grout haze left after "squeegeeing." Rinse towel/sponge
frequently and change rinse water at least every 200 ft2 (19m2). Repeat this
cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present. Allow grout joints to become
firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Inspect joint for pinholes/voids
and repair them with freshly mixed grout. Within 24 hours, check for remaining haze
and remove it with warm soapy water and a nylon scrubbing pad, using a circular
motion, to lightly scrub surfaces and dissolve haze/film. Do not use acid cleaners
on latex Portland cement grout less than 10 days old.
a. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE PERMACOLOR
Select Grout.
References:
LATICRETE Data Sheets: 250.0;
LATICRETE MSDS: 2500;
GREENGUARD Certificates: 2500;
LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 201, 400
F. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide control or expansion joints as located in contract
drawings and in full conformity, especially in width and depth, with architectural details.
1. Substrate joints must carry through, full width, to surface of tile, brick or stone.
2. Install expansion joints in tile, brick or stone work over construction/cold joints or
control joints in substrates.
3. Install expansion joints where tile, brick or stone abut restraining surfaces (such as
perimeter walls, curbs, columns), changes in plane and corners.
4. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCNA "Handbook for
Ceramic Tile Installation" Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant
manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters.
5. Joint width: >: %" (3mm) and <_ 1" (25mm).
6. Joint width: depth —2:1 but joint depth must be >t %" (3mm) and <_'/z" (12mm).
a. Layout (field defined by joints): 1:1 length: width is optimum but must be <_ 2:1.
Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as
dirt, dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer.
Use LATICRETE LatasilTm 9118 Primer for underwater and permanent wet area
applications, or for porous stone (e.g. limestone, sandstone etc...) installations.
Install appropriate backing material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion
joint design and as specified in § 07920. Apply masking tape to face of tile, brick or
stone veneer. Use caulking gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints with
sealant. Within 5-10 minutes of filling joint, 'tool' sealant surface to a smooth finish.
Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint. Wipe smears or excess
sealant off the face of non -glazed tile, brick, stone or other absorptive surfaces
immediately.
Use the following LATICRETE System Materials:
LATICRETEO LatasilTM
LATICRETE Latasil 9118 Primer
References:
LATICRETE Detail Drawings: WP300, EJ-01, EJ-02, EJ-05, EJ-06, EJ-08, EJ-10
(Sealant treatments only)
LATICRETE Data Sheets: 6200.1, 6524.1, 6526.1
09300-8
3.4
3.5
LATICRETE M
LATICRETE Ti
Latasil, Primer
al Data Sheets: 211, 252
CLEANING
A. Clean excess mortar/epoxy from veneer surfaces with water before they harden and as work
progresses. Do not contaminate open grout/caulkjoints while cleaning. Sponge and wash
veneers diagonally across joints. Do not use acids for cleaning. Polish with clean dry cloth.
Remove surplus materials and leave premises broom clean.
PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation to avoid damage to finished tile work.
END OF SECTION
09300-9
SECTION 09300
CERAMIC TILE
,
RIM MON. AM
•
-- •
09-1
August 26, 2016
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile- SaniTECH)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and genes
Supplementary Cond
work of this section.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes
1. Installation sh,
moisture barri(
maintained usii
with recommen
2. Wall treatment
Restrooms.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
SECTION 09390
SaniGLAZE International, LLC
provisions of Contract, including General and
is and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
the following:
III result in a wall treatment that will produce a
;r and condition so that the appearance can be
g conventional cleaning processes in combination
ded periodic prescribed support service activities.
shall NOT be installed on red glass the in the
A. Definition - Restorative Bonding: Tile and grout restoration and
maintenance are referenced generically as Restorative Bonding. This
technology is enviro mentally friendly and permanent in nature, and
should not be confused with or compared to tile or grout painting, staining,
or otherwise recolorind.
B. Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each
type and color of restorative bonding materials.
I
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage a licensed, certified, trained and
experienced installer who has successfully completed restorative bonding
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016
09390 -1 of 9
RESTORATIVE BONDING
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile- SaniTECH)
SaniGLAZE International, LLC
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project.
D. Mock-ups: Provide mock-up of restorative bonding system at location
indicated, or if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Owner. Mock-up
shall be approximately 2-feet by 2-feet or include no less than four (4)
contiguous wall tiles, whichever is larger, at location indicated. Accepted
mock-ups shall demonstrate and establish the quality of work by which the
remainder of the work shall be judged.
E. Sanitation Support Service: Contractor shall offer an optional periodic
"Sanitation Support Service" to the Owner in writing upon completion of
the work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Experience and qualification data for manufacturer and applicator.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete and current product
information, technical information, and installation and maintenance
instructions.
C. Submit sample warranty for review.
D. Shop Drawings: Where locations of the work of this contract are not
indicated or completely indicated, prepare and submit shop drawings
indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of control, isolation,
contraction and expansion joints in tile surfaces.
E. Contractor's proposal for "Sanitation Support Services," including all
provisions and services to be provided, frequency of additional cleaning
and restorative procedures and annual cost for at least the first year
following expiration of manufacturer's warranty.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and recommendations, in original containers with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016 09390 - 2 of 9 RESTORATIVE BONDING
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile -
contamination to
causes.
B. Store items to be inci
off of floor, within an
acceptable range reqt
C. Do not unreasonably
Confine stockpiling c
indicated, or if not indi
1. If additional stc
off site in a fi
Owner, with all
this project. j
provided to the
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain environm
1.07
tl
C.
0
installation to comply
recommendations.
Vent any temporary I
bonding work from ca
Maintain temperature
work areas during it
SaniGLAZE International, LLC
by water, freezing, foreign matter or other
in the Work in stable and secure manner,
which has ambient temperature controlled within
ired for each product.
encumber the site with materials or equipment.
` materials and location of storage to the areas
sated, as designated by the Contractor or Owner.
-age is necessary, obtain and pay for such storage
Ily bonded and insured facility acceptable to the
items stored clearly identified as being assigned to
,ddress for any off -site stored materials shall be
Dwner, by the Contractor.
conditions and protect work during and after
i manufacturer's current printed instructions and
to exterior to prevent damage to restorative
dioxide buildup.
at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) in
:allation and for 7-days after completion, unless
higher temperatures are required by manufacturers' current printed
instructions and recommendations.
;ANTIES AND GUARANTEES:
Warranty: The manufacturer shall approve the installation and provide
their standard written warranty for labor and materials, that the restorative
bonding system shall remain adhered, intact (without perceptible
deformation) and completely leak free from the date of project Substantial
�F Completion as long as prescribed Support Services are continued, subject
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016 09390 - 3 of 9 RESTORATIVE BONDING
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile- SaniTECH)
SaniGLAZE International, LLC
to Owner's compliance with written maintenance instructions delivered to
the Owner by the Contractor.
1. Warranty provisions shall not apply in the event of occurrence of
exclusions in the written warranty, including in part, Owner's
noncompliance with written maintenance instructions delivered to
the Owner by the Contractor, work performed on the completed
system by others that affects its integrity or causes damage; or
damage due to neglect, abuse, natural phenomena, acts of God, or
otherwise not under the control of the Contractor or due to defective
workmanship.
2. The Contractor shall warrant the appearance and integrity of the tile
and grout surface indefinitely for as long as warranty provisions are
adhered to and the Owner engages the Contractor for optional
"Sanitation Support Services."
B. Repairs that become necessary while restorative bonding system is under
warranty and/or guarantee, shall be performed within 14-days of
notification to the installer and/or manufacturer, including in part, any
required removals, repairs of the restorative bonding system, and
restoration of any additional materials removed to perform the work to at
least their previously existing condition. Should for any reason, the
installer is not able to perform the repairs, it shall be incumbent upon the
manufacturer to do so. If repairs are not begun on time, Owner shall have
work done by others and costs will be charged to the Contractor, with no
detrimental effect on the remaining warranty and no termination of
warranty.
C. The above warranty shall be in addition to, shall be in effect
simultaneously with, and shall not alter or limit other project or product
warranties or guarantees, nor shall it serve as a limitation to other
remedies available to the Owner.
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016 09390 - 4 of 9 RESTORATIVE BONDING
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile -
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFA(
A. Manufacturers:
preapproved produ
"SaniGLAZE Proce
process, as mane
Jacksonville, Florid
www.saniglaze.com.
2.02 PRODUCTS -GENERAL:
A. Restorative bonding
materials utilized in cc
approved in writing fc
that these requiremen
system accepted
B. All products and insta
manufacturer's curr(
restrictions.
2.03
SaniGLAZE International, LLC
)ject to compliance with requirements, provide
; and restorative bonding systems equivalent to
if system, specifically SaniGLAZE SurfaceGLAZE
factured by SaniGLAZE International, LLC;
1; Phone: 1-800-874-5554; Website:
system specified is proprietary in nature, and all
impletion of the work shall be either manufactured or
r use by the system manufacturer. It is anticipated
is will also apply to any alternate restorative bonding
lation shall comply with restorative bonding system
nt written instructions, recommendations and
MATERIALS:
A. Tile Cleaning Compound: SaniGLAZE Extra Strength Contaminant
Remover, Gel Contaminant Remover, or Tile and Grout Prep.
B. Shielding Sealer:
1. Porous and Nonporous Tile: SaniGLAZE SaniTECH, a waterborne
i
tile surface moii sture, grease, oil and chemical barrier, providing an
impermeable moisture seal over the entire treated area, with a flat
finish. This sealer shall be resistant to urine, disinfectants, bleach,
acid bowl cleaner, high pH cleaners, and other chemicals typically
used in cleaning rest rooms and other tile and grout areas
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016
09390 - 5 of 9
RESTORATIVE BONDING
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile- SaniTECH)
SaniGLAZE International, LLC
a. Finished Appearance: Clear, transparent and invisible when
it has dried and cured, with sufficient particle size of the
emulsion and surfactant package to allow deep penetration
of porous tile substrates, and a chemical adhesion
component. Gloss level to be flat.
b. Maintenance: This compound must be able to recoat itself
when maintenance needs arise.
C. Optional Support Services - Materials: SaniGLAZE EverGLAZE PRO,
capable of removing any surface soil and contaminants, renewing the
original SaniGLAZE finish or SaniGLAZE SaniTECH which was applied
during the original restoration, and bringing the floors, walls and ceilings
back to the same "like new" appearance affected by the original
restoration, using SaniGLAZE EverGLAZE PRO cleaner, to clean and
renew the original SaniGLAZE topical shield.
1. Maintenance by Owner shall include in part cleaning with
EverGLAZE Daily cleaner and/or buffing and recoating SaniGLAZE
Super Shield periodically as required to maintain the original
restorative bonded surface integrity.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine surfaces to receive restorative bonding work and conditions
under which the system will be installed.
B. Do not proceed with restorative bonding work until surfaces and conditions
comply with requirements indicated in manufacturer's current written
instructions and recommendations.
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016 09390 - 6 of 9 RESTORATIVE BONDING
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile- S4niTECH) SaniGLAZE International, LLC
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL:
A. Prepare and install restorative bonding system in accordance with
manufacturer's current written instructions and recommendations, and as
otherwise required to obtain manufacturer's warranty.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Wall surfaces to be restored shall be mechanically scrubbed utilizing
SaniGLAZE Extra Strength Contaminant Remover or Gel Contaminant
Remover or preapproved equivalent to remove any remaining embedded
contaminants from tile and grout surfaces. Remove scrubbing residue by
suction and rinse with I clean water flood rinse. Remove rinse solution by
suction. Test wall surfaces to be restored using hydrion method, and
verify that existing pH level will not neutralize chemicals used in the
preparation, sealing aid finishing processes.
Test wall surfaces to Ibe restored using hydrion method, at least one test
per 100 square feet of tile surface, and verify that existing pH level will not
neutralize chemicals used in the preparation, sealing and finishing
processes. Correct any deficiencies prior to continuing with joint treatment
applications.
B. Grout Preparation Procedures: Grout preparation gel shall be applied to
the entire surface of the wall and surfaces to be restored.
1. Grout lines shall be chemically etched and cleaned (if required)
using SaniGLAZE Tile & Grout Preparation compound or
preapproved equivalent that is specifically formulated to leave a
grout surface conducive to micro anchor bonding.
2. A clear water ;flood rinse shall be applied to the floor and the
residue removed by suction. The grout preparation gel shall leave
no residue, chalk, or grit after having been properly rinsed.
i
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016 1 09390 - 7 of 9 RESTORATIVE BONDING
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile- SaniTECH)
SaniGLAZE International, LLC
3. Test wall surfaces to be restored using hydrion method, at least
one test per 100 square feet of tile surface, and verify that existing
pH level will not neutralize chemicals used in the preparation,
sealing and finishing processes. Correct any deficiencies prior to
continuing with joint treatment applications.
3.05 GROUT & TILE SEALING:
A. Priming: Apply SaNGLAZE SaniTECH Primer to all surfaces to be
coated. Priming shall be one application and be deemed complete after
solution totally evaporates from tile surface.
B. Apply two coats of SaniGLAZE SaniTECH or pre -approved equivalent to
the entire tile surface to provide an impermeable moisture seal over the
entire treated area(s), with the specified flat appearance level.
C. Drying and Curing: Provide drying and curing procedures in accordance
with manufacturer's current written instructions and recommendations, or
if not indicated, by means of a mechanically generated air flow.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of restorative bonding applications, clean all
new and adjacent existing tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
Remove any residue, splatter and similar materials from adjacent and
other surfaces, wherever occurs.
B. Remove all trash, containers, cartons, debris, excess materials, etc.,
which results from work under this Section, and legally dispose of off
Owner's property.
C. Protection: Advise Contractor and Owner in writing of protections
necessary from completion of restorative bonding work and project
Substantial Completion.
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016 09390 - 8 of 9 RESTORATIVE BONDING
Guide Specifications (New Wall Tile-
/ 3.06 CLOSEOUT:
A. Deliver the followin
duplicate 3-ring bind(
and Owner on the co
1. Fully execute
Support Servi(
2. Complete cor
installer
3. Complete prin
at least two
special clear
supplies.
4. Proposal for
SaniGLAZE International, LLC
to the Contractor or Owner, as applicable, in
clearly identifying the project, Contractor, Installer,
and spline:
warranty, subject to acceptance of prescribed
information for the system manufacturer and
cleaning and maintenance instructions. Include
rces with complete contact information for any
and maintenance solutions, materials and
itation Support Services."
ND OF SECTION
11-6-06; REV 10-3-2016 1 09390 - 9 of 9 RESTORATIVE BONDING
01.1 ACT1 Armstrong "He-altl
Color: White. Location: 1
Verify ceiling coverage
requirements.
SECTION 09500
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
i Zone" Square Lay -in #1935 (Scrubbable), 24" x 24" x
tetail, Food Service, Backroom/Food Prep., and Washroom.
with_- drawings and according- _ to - local Board of Health
01.2 ACT2 ��°'�s: Armstrong "Cortega," Square Lay -in #770, 24" x 24" x 5/8", Color:
White. Location: Associates Room, Office, Electrical Room, Restroom Corridor, Delivery
Corridor, Delivery- Staging, and Janitor Area. Verify ceiling coverage with drawings and
according to local Board of Health requirements.
12 ViN*L ACOUSTICAL CEILING `-ft� ACCESSORIES
02.1 _ _Armstrong Flex Molding. Steel' base with flexible vinyl facing #7884, 15%16" x 15/16"
— ,Color: White. Location: Use at Food Service Soffit and any other curved ceiling to vertical
'surface intersection. Ar►„rtrmpp ;,e;, pe_rterated 'Clean Reem VL, # 2' A" x 2'' 9"x
--------- 868
b22 Armstrong Angle IVloldirig: Hemmed with prefniished exposed flanges#7808, 2" x 2",
Color: White. (Alternate: CertainTeed #WA32-32). Location: Interior adhered
'manufactured stone veneer wall. Lesatiem Feed SeFVOGe, GustGustemeF and Wash Reem
03.1 Material: Armstrong,
CertainTeed Celotex '
White.
03.2 Installation
A. Unless otherwise
requirements.
B. Suspend ceiling
2
3.
Install 1 %" c
of 4'-0" oc ali
spaced 16" c
tied #16 ga g
gypsum boar
Attach gypsu
the board 8"
Install hange
within ceiling
suspension s
and offset re:
equally effecl
Where width
hanger spaci
support stanc
suspension n
Size supplerr
lude 15/16" exposed tee system, Color: White. Alternate:
sic Hook" (or stab) for 15/16" exposed grid system, Color:
, install suspended ceilings in accordance with the following
from the building structure as follows:
1 rolled channels 4'-0" oc with 8 ga hanger wire spaced a max
g carrying channels. Attach 7/8" screw furring channels
perpendicular to the 1 'h" channel with double strand of saddle
vanized tie wire or 1 '/2" furring channel clips. Apply'/"
with its long dimension at right angles to the furring channels.
board with 1" self drilling drywall screws 12" oc in the field of
12" oc at butt joints, located not more than'/2" from edges.
plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
enum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling
;tem. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions
Iting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other
e means.
ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
that interferes with the location of hangers required to
,d suspension system members, install supplemental
mbers and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
ital suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
09-2
August 26, 2016
SECTION 09500
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.
4. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or
to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so
members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
END OF SECTION 09500
09-3
August 26, 2016
01-1 TERRAZZO
09,.1
SECTION 09600
FLOORING
Project Conditions:
01.1.,1_ All work shall be in accordance with National Terrazzo_ and Mosaic Association,
Inc. specifications.
01.1-2 _ The_ deneral_Cori racfor is -responsible for Terrazzo floor installation.
01 .1 3 the General Contractor shall provide sufficient water, temporary heat and light,
and adequate electric power with suitable outlets connected and distributed for
use within 100 feet of any_working_space.
— -- - ----I_—____ _
01._1__.4_The General Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures and o_th_ e_r_s_u_ita__ble_
methods to prote It adjacent spaces from damage during installation.
01.1.4.1 Maint in ambient temperatures in the area to receive terrazzo at not
less th
01.1.4.2 Maintalin adequat' e_ventilation in the area to receive terrazzo:
01.2 - Terrazzo Sample: Provide a 4'W" sample panel of the terrazzo prior to commencement
of construction for owner and architects approval.
01.3 _-_-,Patching: Patch terrazzo as required: Fill.wiith concrete, add terrazzo mix to match, then
ground down flush with existing,
01-.4 Initial Floor Slab inspeci
01.4.1 The terrazzo4 C
Contractor's Supe
the installation to
— terrazzo. - ----
0.1.4_.2__. Verify that concrE
free of cracks, la
agents, dust, dirt,
flooring_materials.
01._4.3 _the Terrazzo C&
and acceptance e
hot limited to lev+
prior to proceedin!
01.5_ Install Terrazzo Strip Ma
01.5.1 Terrazzo Divider
b i.5.1.1 Locate
ntractor shall examine the floor slab with the General
ntendent present for compliance with requirements regarding
rances and other conditions affecting finished quality of the
ie surfaces to receive monolithic terrazzo flooring are sound,
tance, glaze, efflorescence, curing, compounds, form -release
grease, oil,_ and other_ contaminants incompatible with terrazzo
ractor shall proceed with the installation upon the inspection
the floor slab. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, including, but
hesslflatness tolerance 'issues,_ etc., they must be corrected
with the installation of terrazzo.
ial;
mtrol Joint Strips:
er strips__in _- - locations indicated on sheet S2 in the
plan -set. - - - - __--- — -- ---
d joint_ strips _back to back in locations indicated along
01 5.1.2 1 i Install' strips_in _epoxy- adhesive setting bed without voids
below strips -
01.5.1.3 _- Install -accessary strips as required to provide a complete installation.
b1 5 1._4Mfr. Manhattan American Terrazzo Strip Company.
Phone:; (888)_462-2813
01.5.1.4.1 Rijtex"T"_ strips %z" _high 16ga zinc installed over top of the
09-4
August 26, 2016
SECTION 09600
FLOORING
slab control joints.
01.5.1.4.2 "L Angle" strips 1XV Jigh 16ga zinc and used at the door
_ - openings, restroom thresholds and cooler/freezer edges.
01.5.1.4.3 Alternate: 1" high by 1/8"'thick zinc divider strip used afthe
'entry mat edge locations. To be installedby_. terrazzo
contractor, not G.C.
01.5.1.4.4_ Column isolation joint strips: Expansion -T"
01.6 InstalF Terrazzo Floor:
01.6.1__Monolithic Terrazzo: rovde %2 Pi' thick, bonded_ toatructural,wa
slab.
concrete
- -- _.
- - -
01,6.1.1 Terrazzo Mix (When patching floor, match_ e_xis_tin_g mix.)
Terrazzo Color Formula #7 (New Stores)
10% Raven, Black #1 & #2
25% New Pure White #1 & #2
10% Boston Cream #1 & #2
20% Mocha #1,& #2
20% Chocolate #1 & #2
10% Arim Mirror 6-9 mm
5% Arim Red. Glass 6-9 mm
Type II Gray_Cement with 2 oz. black color perbag cement
01.6.2_'Place Terrazzo Mixture in sections formed by dividerstrip s and trowel mixture to
above the tops of the strips.
01.6.3 Broadcast additional marble and chips, as_ necessary.__to match__re-quired
mix/ attern,
01.6.4- Roll and_ compact surface until all excess cement and water has been extracted.
01_.6,5 . Trowel to a dense uniform flat_surface disclosing_lines if divider strips,
01.7 Terrazzo Curing:
01.7.1_ Once the terrazzo has, sufficiently set„- continue to cure with water or
poly_ethy_lene-sheeting;
01.7.2_ Cure until topping develops sufficient strength to prevent lifting or pulling of
stone/chips during the grinding process:
Terrazzo. Finishing;
0_1__.8.1 The Terrazzo Contractor shall protect o_ther adjacent work from water and dust
generated by grinding,op_erations: __
_
_.Rough Grinding:
01.8.2.1 _Grind with 24 or fnergrit stones_or with comparable diamond plates.
01�8_3__Grouting
01.8.31::._ Clean the floor with. clean; water and then rinse. thoroughly.
M.8_.3 2Remove excess rinse water and machine _-or_hand-apply grout, taking
care to fill all voids.
01.8.3.3 Cure until grout-is_ready for grinding.
01.$.4, Fine Grinding/P_olishing
01.8.4.1 _Grind with 200 grit stone or comparable diamond abrasives until qrout
09-5
August 26, 2016
SECTION 09600
FLOORING
is_removed from_the.surface.
01.8.4.2 Grind with 400 grit stone or comparable_ diamond _-abrasives _until
entire floor has been polished to 400 grit.
01.8.4.3_ GAnd ith 600-grit stone or comparable_ diamond abrasives until the
entire floor exhibits a high gloss polish.
01.9._ _ Terrazzo Cleaning:
df'.9.---------- ----------------------- ------------------- ----- -- - - ---- ---- ----
011 _Remove grinnding residues -- from the terrazzo surface and properly— dispose of
them from the site utilizing a lined container. Terrazzo should never be
introduced into the sanitary drainage system as a means of disposal, or buried
pn site.
01.9.2 Wash terrazzo surfaces immediately after grinding of terrazzo flooring with water
;and allow surfaces to dry thoroughly:
61-A6 _Terrazzo Sealing:
01.10.1 The o i terrazznstaller _shall .seal terrazzo with 2 coats of the following sealer
manufactured by NCL;
01.10.1.1 NCL product'Surface Barrier'' at nclonline.com.
6_1.11 _ General Contractor Cleaning Responsibility
01.11.1 Once terrazzo has been poured, ground, and sealed with a construction sealer,
the floor must be broom swept at least daily, and more frequently if conditions
require (excessive dust, dirt, spills, etc.). Special care should be taken to avoid
moving heavy items across the floor without the aid of a hand -truck or other
wheeled moving device. In addition, spills on the terrazzo floor surface __ must_ be
avoided.
01.112 Night before- opeping. Clean floor using auto -scrubber with Hurricane, detail
clean along edges and in corners,. polish with Rock Hard and Diamond Gloss.
09600-02 VINYL BASE
02.1 Material: Armstrong, Standard Vinyl Wall Base,.080 ga, 4" high, matte black, using
S-285 adhesive. Match existing as required. Provide molded corner pieces; DO NOT
MITRE.
02.2 Location: At all exposed wall bases, including those behind movable shelving and
equipment, at all cabinets including Checkout, and at equipment bases, including store
side of Walk -In ( Freezer and Refrigerator), if none exist. Seal Cove Base top and
bottom.
09600-03 VESTIBULE FLOORING
03.1 Vestibule Mat:
Mats, Inc. Ultra Entry Mat. Color: Charcoal (Base Color: Black). Mat installed over
terrazzo. Fill entire vestibule. Mat seams set parallel to front of store. Do not install mat
spacer bar. All work to; be in compliance with manufacturer's current installation
instructions_ Furnished and installed by General Contractor. No substitutions allowed:
09-6
August 26, 2016
SECTION 09600
FLOORING
Manufacturer:
Mats, 'Inc.
Contact: Mary Crane
Phone: (781) 573.0265
Email: mcrane matsinc.com
n
09600-04 ECORE ANTI -FATIGUE ECO SURFACES FLOORING AND TRANSITION STRIP
04.1 Materials:
04.1.1 F-COsurfaces Classic #1005 Sandpiper 124 Interlocking Tiles, 6m
C surfaces Classic is pre -sealed with factory -applied ECOguard. Dimensions
24"x24". Install over Terrazzo at CheckoutF—
Manufacturer
Ecore Commercial Flooring
Kathie Marchalonis Br4an Sesks
717-517-5404 396 'O� 90
khm(d)ecorecf.com
04.1.2 Transition Strip: Roppe Rubber Transitional Reducer #25, 5/16"H x 1-5/16".
Color: #193 Black -Brown.
http://www.roppe.com/roppeweb/includes/rubberreducers.htmi
Manufacturer
Roppe
Supplier and Contact
Stanley Stephens
800-523-5200
04.2 Location: Checkout Core as indicated on drawings.
04.3 Application: As per Manufacturer's detailed instructions found on ECOsurfaces website
at www.ecosurfaces.com. Clean after installation with E-Cleaner as per Manufacturer's
instructions.
04.4 Maintenance: TaskiProfi Cleaner: PH -neutral cleaner. Spread Rate 10,000sf.
09600-05 BEER CAVE FLOORING by owner
05.1 Materials: Armstrong Sheet Rejuvenations TimberLine
09-7
August 26, 2016
SECTION 09600
FLOORING
05.2 Wall Base: Armstrong Vinyl. Color: brown. To match flooring.
05.3 Vinyl flooring transition at beer cave door to match beer cave flooring.
06.1 Materials
. . -- v v It 11 -WI . -W.. V VUtlV4 VUJIUII I. WIWI IU. /4 U II%lr% VV/ V
formed base. Transition to'/" over 20" horizontal distance to match
anufacturer
e_RCynol
Supplier & Contact
Gary Rader --�
�PremUs of Orland n
hone: 407-654-30, 99
,Cell: 407-509-4726
END OF SECTION 09600
09-8
rhm
August 26, 2016
SECTION 09700
WALL FINISHES
09700-01 FRP PANELS
01.1 Material
(A) Crane Composites FRP `Glasbord-P', Class C Fire -Rated, .09" (2.3 mm). See
Drawings for color. Colors other than white require lead time.
(B) Crane Composites FRP `Fire-X Glasbord', Class A Fire -Rated, .09" (2.3 mm). See
Drawings for color. Colors other than white require lead time. See drawings for
location.
01.2 General: Fastened and glued installation.
01.3 Base Molding: Provide all moldings as required and Marlite FRP Base molding M612€P-
P20_0 _,(Black), etc. as recommended and specified by manufacturer for complete
installation.
01.4 Trim: Where FRP is used to cover the lower four(4) feet or (8) feet of drywall (Vestibules,
Corridors, Office, Associate and Retail Area) use 1" half round wood trim, painted. All
other areas use FRP 1/2" Outside Corner Trim OC". See drawings for location.
01.5 Manufacturer and Distributors:
Manufacturer
Crane Composites Inc.
Address:23525 W Es
IL60410
Phone: 1.815.467.8600
Fax: 1.815.467.8666
09700-02 CORNER PROTECTION
02.1 Corner protection at FRP t
to match FRP. Verify locati
02.2 Where bullnose the is una%
indicated on drawings.
02.3 Where two FRP colors con
stainless steel corner guar
s, Channahon,
1.800.435.0080
be Crane Composites/Kemlite Vinyl Trim for Glasbord, color
on on Drawings.
ailable, install Schluter transition strip. Styles and Colors as
together at outside corner in Wash area, supply 2" x 2"
Refer to drawings for height.
09700-03 WALLPAPER
03.1 Material: Wallpaper supplied by Wawa and installed by General Contractor.
Color: "Wawa Yellow".
Manufacturer
Eykon
Linda Lemieux, 800-222-7866
09-9
August 26, 2016
SECTION 09700
WALL FINISHES
Fax. 901-366-0447
03.1 Application: As per manufacturer's instructions. 'Railroad' wallpaper with seams in the
corners.
(A) Surface preparation: Proper surface preparation is essential for a quality
wallcovering installation. The wall surface should be clean, dry, structurally sound
and free of mildew, grease or other stains. Any loose paint must be removed from
the wall. Glossy and semi -gloss paint should be sanded to dull the surface and a
coat of adhesion -promoting primer applied prior to the installation of wallcovering.
Any wall irregularities should be corrected.
(B) Adhesive: Heavy duty clear non -staining cellulose.
09700-04 CAULKING
04.1 Material: Silicone caulk. Clear at sinks, cabinets, and Restrooms. Match grout color at
tiles.
04.2 Location: Run a continuous bead of caulk around all cabinets, sinks, top of Food Service
Area tiles and vertical corners of tile at Food/Prep Area and Food Service Area. Caulk at
corner guards, back splashes, and all corners (horizontal and vertical) in Restrooms.
END OF SECTION 09700
09-10
August 26, 2016
09900-01 GENERAL
01.1 Ordering Procedure
(A) General Contractor
operation.
(B) Verify procedure witl
(C) Manufacturer: As nc
No exceptions or sut
01.2 Preparation for Paintini
clean and free of dirt, gr(
primed without sanding o
much as possible by w,
product.
09900-02 INTERIOR SURFACES
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
I remove and reinstall certain items to facilitate painting
the Wawa Project Manager.
All specified paints are Class A rating for Flame Spread.
ions without prior approval.
Repainting Interior Wood Trim& Doors: Surface must be
se, wax, mildew, and scaling paint. Glossy surfaces can be
surface deglossing. If surface is already stained, remove as
hing, sanding and scraping before applying recommended
02.1 Gypsum Wall Board (See Drawings)
(A) Walls: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel
&Undercoater Prirr1er Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats Benjamin Moore
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell #274. See Drawings for color. (See TDS on
Benjamin moore.corn for prep instructions.)
Alternate: Provide one (1) coat Sherwin Williams PrepRiteProBlock Latex
#B51W20. Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Latex
Eg-Shel #B20-2200.See Drawings for color.
(A) Ceilings When Exposed: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super
Spec Latex.Enamel &Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats
Benjamin Moore Mloorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss #276 (color 01 White).
(See TDS on Benjalminmoore.com for prep instructions.)
Alternate: One (1)!, coat Sherwin Williams PrepRiteProBlock Latex #B51 W20.
Followed by two (211 ) coats Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel
#1320-2200 (color Luminous White Satin).
02.2 Fascias (See Drawings)
(A) 1" Half Round Trim:Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Aura Interior/Exterior
Color Foundation #521. Followed by two (2) coats Aura Semi gloss Waterborne
Interior Paint #528. See Drawings for color. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for
prep instructions.)
(B) Vertical Drywall: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex
Enamel &Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats Benjamin
Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss #276. See Drawings for color.
Alternate: Provide one coat Sherwin Williams PrepRiteProBlock Latex #B51 W20.
Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel
Finish #620-2200.See Drawings for color. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for
prep instructions.)
I
02.3 Wood Trim: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel
&Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats DTM Acrylic Semi -Gloss
#M29. See Drawings for color. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.)
09900-1
December 2, 2013
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
Alternate: Provide One (1) coat Sherwin Williams PrepRiteClassic Interior Latex Primer
#B28W101. Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic
Semi -Gloss (1331 Series). See Drawings for color.
02.4 Doors and Frames: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex
Enamel & Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats DTM Acrylic
Semi -Gloss #M29.See Drawings for color. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep
instructions.)
Alternate: Provide one (1) coat Sherwin Williams Kern Bond HS Universal Metal Primer
#B50WZ4. Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic
Semi -Gloss (1331 Series). See Drawings for color.
02.4.1 Doors, Frames and metal Cased Openings, as well as Access Panel covers and frames.
shall receive Benjamin Moore Waterbourne Polyamide Epoxy P42 paint. See Drawings
for color. These interior, HM doors, frames and metal casings include the interior (not
exterior) face of the exterior HM doors.
02.5 Return Air Grilles
(A) Ceilings: Prefinished, color: white.
(B) Walls: Paint to match adjacent wall.
02.5 Electrical Room Walls Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec
Latex Enamel & Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats Benjamin
Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel. Color AF-700 Storm Gray. (See TDS on
Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.)
09900-03 EXTERIOR SURFACES
03.1 General: Verify with the Wawa Project Manager exterior work required in
Remodel Stores.
03.2 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore & Co unless otherwise noted.
03.3 Metal Doors, Frames, and Metal RW.C's: Provide one coat Moorcraft Super Spec
AlkydMetal Primer #P06 for ferrous metal, where required. Followed by two coats
MoorGlo Latex House and Trim Paint #N096 (color 01-White) soft gloss. Provide one
coat Acrylic Metal Primer #PO4 for galvanized metal, where required. Two coats
MoorGlo Latex House and Trim Paint #N096 (color 01-White) soft gloss. (See TDS on
Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.)
03.4 Parking Lots: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Safety Zone Marking Latex #M58.
Parking Stalls- color 01 White. Barrier Free Zone, Fire Zone, and Fire Lane — color 30
Blue. Curbs, Directional, and No Parking — color 10 yellow.
Alternate: Provide two (2) coats Sherwin Williams Setfast Acrylic Latex Traffic Marking
Paint. Parking Stalls- color .TM2160, White. Barrier Free Zone, Fire Zone, and Fire
Lane- color TM2133, Blue. Curbs, Directional, and No Parking- color TM2159, Yellow.
03.5 Trash Compound Interior Walls: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP
Waterborne Epoxy Block Filler #P31and one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super
Spec Urethane Enamel #P22.Color as iridicated on drawings.
03.6 Fiber Cement Siding color JH80-10 Harris Cream (for repairs): Use Benjamin Moore -
09900-2
December 2, 2013
03.7
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
Aura Exterior Satin #631, color HC-12.
Fiber Cement Trim color JH10-20 Arctic White (for repairs): Use Benjamin Moore - Aura
Exterior Satin #631, color 2144-50.
(See Section 05120-03)
09900-05 WORKMANSHIP
06.1 Before painting or applyirltg natural finishes, General Contractor shall remove hardware
accessories, plates, lighti g
ofixtures and similar items or provide protection for same and
replace upon completion f each space.
06.2 After they have been fitted, General Contractor shall remove all doors to finish all edges
(side edges, top and bottom edges).
06.3 Work to be painted under this Contract on exposed finished surfaces shall be completely
cleaned of all hand marks, grease, dirt and dust before painting is started. All sanded
surfaces shall be well brushed and left dust free.
06.4 Should wood contain knots, pitch streaks or sappy spots, work to be painted shall first be
touched up with shellac.
06.5 Do necessary puttying ofl nail holes, cracks, etc., after first coat, with putty of color to
match that of finish. Bring putty flush with adjoining surface in neat, workmanlike
manner.
06.6 Sand smoothly all woodwork to be finished with enamel or varnish, clean surface before
proceeding with application of the first coat. Use fine sandpaper #100 or steel wool
between coats of enamel or varnish finish applied to wood or metal to produce even,
smooth finish.
06.7 Do no exterior painting w
paint manufacturer's spec
06.8 All cut edges of plywood i
to smooth condition ready
06.9 Final coats of paint shall c
END OF SECTION 09900
C,
le surface is damp or during rainy or frosty weather, as per
other interior millwork, if exposed, shall be filled and sanded
r finishing.
, without streaks.
09900-3
December 2, 2013
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface
coating systems on the f(
1. Structural steel d
2. Anchor bolts and
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Asphaltic Based Corros
asphalt -base emulsions
surfaces.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Te:
Asphalt -Base Emulsions
the time of project buildir
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Include p
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HAP
A. Store materials not in use
ambient temperatures con
not allow coating in pail to
B. Maintain containers in cle,
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
SECTION 09960
COATINGS FOR STEEL
and the application of asphaltic -based emulsion
lowing:
ectly in contact with soil.
Aher steel components in contact with soil.
Resistance Coating: (as referred in the drawings) refers to
)lied in a relatively thick film as a protective coating for metal
ig and Materials (ASTM) D 1187 - Standard Specification for
r Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. Use latest edition at
submittal.
requirements and application instructions.
)LING
i tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with
nuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). Do
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air
temperatures are between 150 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C. Do not apply if there is a threat of rain or temperatures below 50 deg F within 24 hours.
D. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
i
09960-1
September 9, 2015
SECTION 09960
COATINGS FOR STEEL
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Henry Company, 788 Non-Fibered Asphalt Emulsion Damp Proofing.
B. Western Colloid, Product #298 Asphalt Emulsion Roof Surfacing.
C. Approved Equal by Structural Engineer of Record. Subject to compliance with
requirements, available products that may be utilized are not limited to the products
listed. Alternate products may be submitted for approval. Approval must be received in
writing prior to approval of product. Unapproved products installed may require removal
at Contractor's cost.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: asphaltic based corrosion resistant coating system shall be
compatible with substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Use same product and manufacturer for all asphaltic based corrosion resistant coating
applications.
B. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when
samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project
site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and
certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show
materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and
recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to
remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with
complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for performance of
the Work per manufacturer's technical data sheet or other installation requirements.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
09960-2
September 9, 2015
3.3
3.4
3.5
B.
Clean substrates of subst
oil, grease, and incompati
C.
Remove incompatible prir
coat as required to produ(
D.
Steel Substrates: Remove
methods recommended it
E.
Shop -Primed Steel Subst
shop paint is abraded. Pa
priming to comply with SE
F.
Galvanized -Metal Substre
metal by mechanical mett
adhesion of subsequently
APPLICATION
SECTION 09960
COATINGS FOR STEEL
inces that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt,
)le paints and encapsulants.
iers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
e coating systems indicated.
rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using
writing by paint manufacturer.
ates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where
nt exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
PC -PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces.
les: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet
ods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote
applied coatings.
A. Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
B. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, n
materials from Project site
B. After completing coating a
coatings by washing, scrag
finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trade
work of other trades by cle
Architect, and leave in an
D. At completion of construct)
defaced coated surfaces.
COATING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:
1.
2.
3.
END SECTION 09960
rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
lication, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
g, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent
against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to
ling, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by
damaged condition. .
i activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
Apply a minimum 1/16" thick coating in two applications.
Coating to be applied on all sides of members — to include where steel will be
covered or adjacent to cast -in -place concrete.
Bring coating to 6-inches above top of concrete slab for building structures. Gas
canopies require the coating be terminated at the top of the finished slab.
I
i
I
09960-3
September 9, 2015
SECTION 10200
SPECIALITIES
01.1 Manufacturer: As noted Ion Drawings. Provide wall blocking as required. Provide
accessories if required onj Drawings.
01.4 Barrier Free Requirements: Locate as per Barrier Free Accessibility requirements.
01.5 Pipe Covers: See Plumbing Section.
01.6 Public Rest Rooms: See Drawinqs for accessories.
02.1 General Contractor to install
the following items:
(A) Bulletin Boards (minimum
of 2).
(B) Produce Bag Holders.
(C) Lockers. Bolt Lockers
top and bottom.
(D) Job Aid Holders and
Clipboards.
(E) License Board.
(F) Complete Graphics Package
including LCD Monitors.
(G) Soap Dispensers in Food
Service and Wash Areas.
(H) Toilet Tissue Dispensers.
(1) Paper Towel Dispenser
in Food Service Area.
(J) CSR Filter System, See
Section 15002.
(K) Safes (G.C. to bolt safes
to floor).
(L) Mop Holder
(M) Hose Holder
(N) Air Delight Dispenser
Economizer 9000, model #401375 (attach with screws) and Air
Delight Micro -Burst 9000
F
refills (two per Restroom)
-
(0) Sanitizer Neat Seat Dispenser
(one per restroom stall)
10200-1
August 26, 2016
SECTION 10200
SPECIALITIES
(P) Wawa Toilet Bowl Cleaner #89 Spray Bottle shelf manufactured by Chemstar
(Q) Bollards
(R) Clocks
(S) Clipboard Racks
(T) Charity Collector @ Checkout Counter
(U) Broom Holders (2)
(V) Trash Bag Holders (2)
(W)BAS
(X) Cleaning Solution Rack (1)
(Y) Wallpaper covering
M, Grab bars. Rails to be 1 '/4" to 1.Y2" diameter stainless steel pi a in accordance wit
[ANSI A117.1, See drawings for sizes and mounting locations,1
AAA) ReStrOOrn_MIrrOC locate per drawings)
BB Hand Dryer with recessed kit in Rest Rooms
,(,CC),Toilet Partitions (see drawings
�(DD)Restroom Coat Hook_
EE} Restroom Lavator�Cabnets
FF) Restroom Lavatory solid surface countertop
EGG) `Restroom Lavatory Shiel
NH)'Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit
{ll) Restroom doorstops and partition walk stops
NJ Toilet Seat. coverdispenser
KK Restroom;waste_receptacles,
LL}Solid Surface wall panel beneath restrootn hand dryer
MM}. Restroom ADA si ns
10200-03 ITEMS SUPPLIED BY WAWA, INC, INSTALLED BY OTHERS & COORDINATED BY
GC:
02.1 Items to be installed by others:
(A) Graphics
10200-2
August 26, 2016
(B)
Cabinets' except Re
(C)
Refrigeration
(D)
Trash Compactors
(E)
First Aid Kit
(F)
Sanitary Equipment
(G)
Fire Extinguishers
(H)
Intercom System & P
(1)
ATM's
(J)
Soda & FCB Equiprr
(K)
Coffee Equipment
(L)
Milkshake Equipmer
(M)
Iced Coffee Equipme
(N)
Phones
(0)
CAT System
(P)
Computers
(Q)
Register & Cash Sys
(R)
Office Furniture
(S)
Self -Serve Beverage
10200-04 WIRE SHELVING
04.1 Over Sink Storage - Local
Contractor to install " IUD
Compartment Sink and of
SECTION 10200
SPECIALITIES
luzak
& Espresso
At Three Compartment Sink (4 shelves required). General
" wire shelving Item # WAWA-SINK72 above Three
locations per drawings. with "lop" at franc of sties,,^^ faGiRg
04.2 Materials: Metroseal 3 with built-in Microban. Open -wire construction.
04.3 Provide wood blocking support as required for all shelving.
10=0A-85
10200-3
August 26, 2016
SECTION 10200
SPECIALITIES
10200-06 ROLLER SHADE
06.1.1 Retail Area - Flexshade XD Manual Roller Shade for all as required on drawings.
Fabric: SW2710-P28, Openness Factor of 10%, Color: Oyster/Charcoal. Length of shade
to center horizontal mullion. A cord tensioning device must be installed to all looped
operating cords. Provide metal covers for rollers to match storefront.
06.1.2 Office - Flexshade XD Manual Roller Shade as required on drawings. SW2701-P28,
Openness Factor of 1 %, Color: Oyster/Charcoal. Length of shade to top of window sill.
A cord tensioning device must be installed to all looped operating cords. Provide
metal covers for rollers to match storefront.
Manufacturer:
Draper
Tracy Linville
Phone: 765-856-1236
tlinville@draperinc.com
06.2.1 Alternate: Retail Area — Roll -A -Shade Manual Roller Shade for all as required on
drawings. Fabric: SW2710-P28, Openness Factor of 10%, Color: Oyster/Charcoal.
Length of shade to center horizontal mullion. A cord tensioning device must be
installed to all looped operating cords. 4" Square fascia system. Fascia and brackets
shall be powder coated silver. Internal hem bar. Vanilla clutches with stainless steel chain
and vanilla child safety tension device. -
06.2.2 Alternate: Office — Roll -A -Shade Manual Roller Shade as required on drawings.
SW2701-P28, Openness Factor of 1 %, Color: Oyster/Charcoal. Length of shade to top
of window sill. A cord tensioning device must be installed to all looped operating
cords. 4" Square fascia system. Fascia and brackets shall be powder coated silver.
Internal hem bar. Vanilla clutches with stainless steel chain and vanilla child safety
tension device.
Alternate Manufacturer:
Roll —A -Shade
Krystal Martinez
Phone: 951-245-5077x 122
Krysta/. martinez(a.rollashade. com
10200-07 OUTDOOR SHED (All building types except F110-Attached)
07.1 Outdoor shed: mfr. shall provide construction, engineering & anchoring drawings, V�CA,
letter and installation of the shed. See architectural drawings for location.
07.2 Shed shall have a finish floor height of not more than 2" above fin. slab.
07.3 Unit size to be 8'-0" x 10'-0" with peak of roof not to exceed 9'-0" AFF.
07.4 GC shall install a turbine vent in shed roof.
Manufacturer, installer:
10200-4
August 26, 2016
SECTION 10200
SPECIALITIES
Superior Sheds, Inc.
Jim Frey
Phone: 407-467-0004
08.1 Outdoor shed: mfr. shall pFovide construction, engineering & anchoring drawings, DCA
letter and installation of the shed. See architectural drawings for location.
08.2 Shed shall have a finish flpor height of not more than 2" above finish slab.
08.3 Unit size to be 3'-8" x 7'-0'� or 2'-4" x 7'-0" with peak of roof not to exceed 9'-0" AFF.
08.4 GC shall install a turbine vent in shed roof
Manufacturer, installer:
South Country Sheds LL(
203 S. Manatee Ave. Arc
Contact. Orlando Penner
09.1 Powder -coated Al
All holes and cuto
lifetime structure
09.2 Pre -Finished 18 (
Systems "MTPN"
Manufacturer
Pioneer Architectural Sys
392 W. Melody Lane
Casselberry, FL 32707
PH: (321) 926-6667
Alternate Manufacturer
Superior Custom Shutters
620 Douglas Avenue #13(
David Daniels
Phone: 407-949-1969
10200-10 ROOF LADDER
10.1 Ladder shall be
extrusions: 2x1
END OF SECTION 10200
FL, 34266
'-491-8700)
70
inum Shutters with seamless, welded frame. Epoxy primed.
shall be pre -made and powder coated. 7 year finish and
white aluminum closure panel by Pioneer Architectural
ath shutters (See drawings, exterior elevations)
icted using the following pre -fabricated aluminum
rungs (knurled) by Eastern Metal Supply or Equivalent.
10200-5
August 26, 2016
01.1 Food and merchandise di
installed by separate
equipment when required
11400-02 EQUIPMENT LIST
SECTION 11400
EQUIPMENT
play, storage and preparation equipment shall be provided and
Contractor, including compressor/condenser refrigeration
02.1 All equipment listed in �quipment Schedule on Drawings supplied by Wawa, Inc.
Installation, including but not limited to Plumbing and Electrical wiring and connections as
specified on Drawings.
02.2 Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, General Contractor to supply all accessories
and equipment not listed ip Equipment Schedule.
02.3 The Equipment listed in the Drawings is a general description of the equipment and
utilities required. This may vary somewhat depending on the Refrigeration/Equipment
Contractors. General Contractor shall verify with the Wawa Project Manager the
equipment that is to be installed.
03.1 These apply to the Equipinent/Refrigeration/Cabinet Contractor, as well as the General
Contractor where he is installing equipment, etc.
03.2 Seal all adjacent perimeters of cabinet -type equipment, make mobile, or space from walls
and adjacent perimeters as follows:
Length of Side Width
of
2 feet 6'nches
2-4 feet 8'nches
4-6 feet 12
inches
over 6 feet 18
inches
Do not seal access panelsL they must be accessible.
03.3 Place counter items not readily movable, weighing over 80 lbs., on legs or feet at least 4"
high.
03.4 Space backsplash a minimum of 3" from the wall, or seal it to wall.
03.5 All joints, annular spaces, or openings into hollow or inaccessible areas are to be closed
to 1/32" or less for food seance areas.
03.6 Terrazzo in Trash Room shall be sealed.
03.7 Concrete beneath Trash CI mpactor shall be sealed.
03.8 Three Compartment Sink and Prep Sink (if required): Provide minimum 2" clearance or
must be sealed.
03.9 Install floor anchors for Double Deep Top Track systems. The posts of the stationary units
have triangular foot plates designed for this purpose. Each post should be bolted to the
floor. The bolt should extend into the flooring material at least one (1) inch and should
be 3/8" in diameter and be (self -anchoring.
END OF SECTION 11400
i 11400-1
January 10, 2013
15001-01 SCOPE
01.1 The Work required and
services necessary for,
drainage systems and
these Specifications.
01.2 Work includes, but is
water services, pipe in
01.3 Work not specifically cc
complete any part of
Contractor without addi
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
this section shall include all labor, materials, appliances, and
ind incidental to, the proper completion of the plumbing and
lated Work, shown, implied or required by the Drawings and
limited to, all sanitary and grease waste services, domestic
ion, and testing and adjusting of all systems.
I or having minor details obviously omitted, but necessary to
plumbing services installation, shall be provided by the
cost to Wawa.
01.4 The term "furnish" shall mean to deliver an item to the site. The term "install" shall mean
to mount the item in its intended location and make required connections. The term
"provide" shall mean to furnish and install.
02.1 All Work under this section shall be provided in strict accordance with local municipality,
state, and federal, codes and requirements. Where differences may exist between this
Specification and Drawings and the Plumbing Code(s), the code shall govern. Additional
requirements shall be met at no additional cost to Wawa.
02.2 Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approvals and pay related fees as
required by the municipality. Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Inspection from the
local authority, as required, indicating satisfactory compliance with all governing codes.
13 GUARANTEE AND COORDINATION
03.1 Contractor shall unconditionally guarantee in writing all equipment and workmanship for a
period of one year from date of acceptance of system by Wawa unless otherwise
specified. Contractor shall provide free service for all equipment involved in Contract
during this period. Guarantee period shall be extended for all non -operational periods
due to failure within the Guarantee Period.
03.2 The Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate all work with the Mechanical, Electrical,
Structural and General Contractors as to eliminate field conflicts.
15001-04 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
04.1 Sanitary Waste Piping, 4" ;and smaller, below grade, shall be PVC Schedule 40, Plastic
pipe and fittings, with solvent cement joints. Where PVC piping and fittings are not
approved by local authorities, provide Hub -and -Spigot Cast -Iron soil pipe, service class,
with compression fittings and rubber gaskets.
I
04.2 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping, 4" and smaller, above grade, shall be PVC Schedule 40,
Plastic pipe and fittings, with solvent cement joints. Where PVC piping and fittings are
not approved by local authorities, provide Hubless, Cast -Iron soil pipe with heavy-duty
couplings. Or, provide "DWV" copper drainage tubing and soldered "DWV" copper
fittings. Exception: Waste! piping from the urinal shall not be "DWV' copper, due to
corrosion.
04.3 Extend Building Sanitary drain piping and Grease Waste piping to the sanitary sewer
15-1
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
main as shown on the Site Engineers Drawings. Coordinate invert elevations with the
Site Engineer prior to installation.
04.4 Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. Provide additional
protection during the terrazzo flooring process to prevent terrazzo material from entering
the piping.
04.5 Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at the end of the day and when work stops.
04.6 Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water -
based latex paint. Paint color shall match roof color.
04.7 Exposed Drainage Pipe and Fittings at plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be chrome -
plated brass or chrome -plated copper pipe, with chrome -platted fittings.
04.8 Cleanouts: Round, heavy-duty, nickel bronze top for general floor areas and terrazzo
areas. Square, heavy-duty, nickel bronze top for tile floors.
04.9 Exterior Grease Interceptor shall be provided and located by the contractor. Interceptor
shall be configured as a two (2) compartment unit with 1250 gallons liquid storage
capacity. Provisions for the unit shall include 2-way slot type cleanout plugs (one inlet,
one outlet), manhole access, and access via cleanouts over the tank baffles. Cleanouts
and manholes shall be set flush with finished grade. Interceptor shall be constructed in
accordance with Florida Codes and Regulations for specific locations and highway
requirements when installed in traffic areas.
04.10 Interior Grease Interceptor (Remodeled Stores Only): Interior Grease Interceptor shall be
provided when no exterior grease interceptor exists or an exterior unit is not permitted.
Where Health Department or Plumbing Official requires an indirect connection to sanitary
system provide 50 GPM flow rate Grease Interceptor by Wade, W-5150-JCT-SC.
Interceptor to be cast iron with standard coating, flow control fitting #W-5013-FC,
removable baffles, 3" threaded inlet/outlet, internal air relief, double wall trap with
cleanout, gasketed cover, flexible draw -off hose, shut off valve, grease accumulating
hood, and fabricated steel fully enclosed housing with anti-skid cover and adjustable
interceptor carrier brackets. Install recessed in floor when required. Verify with the
Wawa Project Manager. Where Health Department or Plumbing Code require or allows a
direct connection, Contractor to provide Grease Interceptor by Wade #W-5150-JCT.
Interceptor to be cast iron with standard coating, flow control fitting #W-5012-FC,
removable baffles, 2" threaded inlet/outlet, internal air relief, double wall trap with
cleanout, gasketed cover, flexible draw -off hose, shut off valve, grease accumulating
hood, and fabricated steel fully enclosed housing with anti-skid cover and adjustable
interceptor carrier brackets. Install recessed in floor when required. Verify with the Wawa
Project Manager.
04.11 All sanitary waste and grease waste piping shall be jetted and flushed at the completion
of construction to ensure that there are no blockages. Clean grease interceptor after
grease waste pipe flushing. Provide written confirmation to the Wawa Project Manager
that the piping is free from blockages.
15001-05 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE
15-2
September 23, 2015
05.1 Domestic Water Service
Domestic Water Service i
but not limited to, connect
the street to the building.
05.2 Domestic Water Service
Type "L" copper tubing
acceptable by the Local
with heat -fusion joints.
building. Water main frc
continuous length of pip
Authority shall be coordii
05.3 Provide main shut-off v,
service entrance.
05.4 Provide Water Meter in si
type, accessories, install
Authority. Coordinate the
Manager.
05.5 Provide and locate Bab
Board of Health requirerr
and location shall be as i
Authority does not requir
preventer in accordance
provided with a strainer.
cup and indirect waste pit
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
as indicated on the Site Plans and Plumbing Plans. When
to be provided via a Water Utility, requirements shall include
on to the street main, curb box, water meter, and 2" main from
ain, Underground, from the street main to the building shall be
th wrought copper fittings and 95/5 soldered joints. Where
ithority, provide PE (Polyethylene Plastic Piping) and fittings
wide proper transition fitting from PE to copper inside the
the curb box or exterior meter to the building, shall be one
. No fittings shall be permitted. All requirements of the Water
ad and provided.
and hose -end drain valve inside the building at the water
accordance with Water Authority requirements. Water Meter
n details, and location shall be as required by the Water
ter meter location with the Site Engineer and Wawa Project
low Preventer in strict accordance with Water Authority and
rots. Backflow Preventer type, accessories, installation details,
squired by the Water Authority and Board of Health. When the
a backflow preventer, provide a double check valve backflow
Frith Wawa's requirements. All Backflow Preventers shall be
Ls dictated by the type of Backflow Preventer, provide a drain
ng. Indirect waste shall be piped to the floor drain.
05.6 Where water pressure ex6eeds 75 PSI, or as required by the Water Authority, provide a
pressure regulating station. Water pressure regulators shall be provided in a parallel
configuration to handle high and low flows. Pressure regulators shall be located directly
downstream of the backflow preventer. Pressure regulators shall be Watts Model "U5-
GG", or an approved equal, provided with pressure gauge. Configuration, size, and
pressure settings shall be as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings.
05.7 Where water pressure fal
provided. Booster pump i
Plumbing Drawings.
05.8 Pressure testing and steril
the local water authority's
Edition (201:4) Plumbing".
16 DOMESTIC WATER DIS1
below 50 PSI after the RPZ, a water booster pump shall be
,del, configuration, and location shall be as specified on the
on of the water main shall be done in strict accordance with
jirements or as prescribed in the "Florida Building Code e
06.1 Hot and Cold Water Piping, above grade and inside the Building shall be FlowGuard Gold
CTS CPVC pipe and fitti �I gs, conforming to ASTM D 2846. Pipe and fittings shall be
manufactured to the nominal dimension cited in the applicable ASTM standard, and be
the product of one manufacturer.
06.2 Hot and Cold Water Piping, below slab, shall be "PEV tubing, in accordance to ASTM
F876 and F877. Tubing located below slab shall be one continuous piece, with no fittings
permitted. Tubing below slab shall be limited to serving island fixtures only, and shall be
installed inside PVC piping for protection.
15-3
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
06.3 Provide a shut-off valve above the ceiling or as noted on Drawings, for each Hot and
Cold Water branch line, to each piece of equipment and/or fixture. All equipment and
fixtures shall be able to be isolated. Valves shall be accessibly located, 12" above
ceilings.
06.4 Shut-off valves shall be turn, 2 piece kiiii ball valves, standard or conventional port,
with lever handle Nibco
06.5 Provide a pressure gauge on the domestic water main, located downstream of the
backflow preventer. Pressure gauge shall be connected to the piping, locating the gauge
on a backflow preventer port shall not be permitted.
Q66 Provide Armstrong "Armaflex SS" insulation '/2" on all domestic hot & cold water piping,
and CSR water piping. Insulation shall be a minimum thickness of '/2'. Installation,
including adhesives and vapor seals, shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's
requirements. Increase insulation thickness per water temperature and pipe size
according to Florida Building Code 5t''.Edition'(2014) Energy Conservation.
06.7 Provide identification labels and flow arrows for all cold water, hot water, and CSR water
piping.
06.8 Pressure testing and sterilization of the water distribution piping shall be done in strict
accordance with the local water authority's requirements or as prescribed in the Florida
Building Code 5t''. Edition (2014) Plumbing.
15001-07 WELL WATER SERVICE
07.1 Well Water System: When domestic water service is not available from a local utility,
water shall be provided via a well system. Well Water Contractor shall provide a complete
system consisting of, but not limited to, the well drilling, well pump, pump controls, control
wiring, pressure tank, pressure switch, and required piping.
07.2 The design requirements for a well water system shall include the following:
(A) Well capacity shall provide a minimum flow rate of 20 GPM for 10 minutes.
(B) Well Pump capacity shall be designed to provide a flow rate of 20 GPM at the outlet
pressure of 60 PSI.
(C) Pressure switch shall operate between 50 and 70 PSI.
(D) Pressure tank shall be sized to provide a minimum draw -down capacity of 20
gallons at the 50-70 PSI pressure range.
07.3 After the well system has been installed and the piping flushed, the Well Water
Contractor shall provide a water sample and test. Test results shall be forwarded to the
Wawa Project Manager and Engineer for review.
07.4 Based on the water test results, Wawa will hire a consultant to provide water treatment
equipment. Equipment configuration, sizing, and space requirements shall be
coordinated with the Well Water Contractor and Plumbing Contractor.
07.5 Power to the well pump shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. Final power
terminations shall be field coordinated.
I
15-4
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
08.1 Provisions shall be made for reclaim water usage for the lawn irrigation system
connection. Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 1 '/2" water supply line, 1" water meter,
and 1" backflow preventer. Irrigation water supply configuration and devices shall be
located as shown on the Plumbing Drawings. Plumbing Contractor shall extend the
Irrigation water supply to a point on the site as directed by the General Contractor and/or
Wawa Project Manager,
08.2 The Irrigation system supply configuration, as shown on the Plumbing Drawings, is based
on an anticipated flow rate of 20 GPM, at 40 PSI. Flow rates or pressure requirements,
greater than those listed, shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to system installation.
08.3 General and Plumbing Contractors shall coordinate the option of an alternate water
source for the Irrigation system, with the Wawa Project Manager. Options shall include a
separate connection to the public water system or an individual well water system.
Design of the alternate water supply source, meter requirements, backflow preventer
requirements, and sizing shall be coordinated with the Irrigation Contractor and Engineer.
Note: All plumbing fixtures to be lead-free
10.1 Toilets and Flush Valves:
(A) Fixture and flush �plve shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No
substitutions shall be, permitted.
(B) Seat shall be
(C) Flush valve sensor
Sensor shall be mo
(D) Fixtures and it
requirements for
10.2 Urinals and Flush Valves:
Duty" plastic with stainless steel hinges.
ting height shall be coordinated with the grab bar location.
above and clear of the grab bar.
m shall meet the ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1
with disabilities.
(A) Fixture and flush valve shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No
substitutions shall bel permitted.
(B) Fixture rough -in a9d rim elevation shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements.
(C) Fixtures and installation shall meet the ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1
requirements for people with disabilities.
10.3 Lavatories, Faucets and
(A) Fixture, faucet, and accessories shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No
substitutions shall belpermitted.
15-5
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
(B) Fixture rough -in and rim elevation shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements.
(C) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and
chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted.
(D) Provide chrome plated brass tailpiece and trap. PVC piping shall not be permitted.
(E) Waste piping and supplies shall be insulated. Provide McGuire 'Pro -Wrap' insulation
kit for each fixture.
(F) Fixtures and installation shall meet the ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1
requirements for people with disabilities.
10.4 Mop Receptor, Faucet, and Accessories:.
(A) Fixture, faucet, and accessories shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings.
(B) Provide with hose and hose holder, mop hanger, and vinyl bumper guard.
(C) Faucet shall be set at 36" above finished floor.
10.5 Water Heaters:
(A) Provide unit(s) and accessories as specified on the Plumbing Drawings.
(B) Substitutions shall be permitted as indicated in the Plumbing Schedules.
(C) Provide complete installation including shut-off valves, unions, T&P relief valve and
drain, drip pan and drain, thermal expansion tank, and vacuum relief fitting.
(D) Coordinate electrical requirements and connections with the Electrical Contractor.
10.6 Floor Sinks and Floor Drains:
(A) Provide fixtures and accessories as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No
substitutions shall be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
(B) Floor Sink and Floor Drain rims shall be set flush with the finished floor, unless
specifically required by the Local Authority to be raised.
(C) Contractor shall field verify all locations and verify rim elevations with the General
Contractor for finished floor elevation and coordination of equipment.
(D) Where PVC drains are not permitted by the Local Authorities, Plumbing Contractor
shall coordinate alternate fixtures and submittals with the Engineer prior to
installation.
(E) Floor sink grates, as required, shall be arranged so the "open" section shall be
located at the rear of the fixture.
10.7 Safe Wastes and Hub Drains:
(A) Provide fixtures and accessories as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No
substitutions shall be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
15-6
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
(B) Safe Waste and Hub, Drain rims shall beset 1" above finished floor.
(C) Contractor shall .field verify all locations and verify rim elevations with the General
Contractor for finished floor elevation and coordination of equipment.
10.8 Refrigerated Sandwich Station, Eq. B1 and B3:
(A) Equipment furnished) by Wawa.
(B) Provide Indirect Wa
Plumbing Drawings.
10.9 Hot Food Table, Eq. 139:
(A) Equipment furnished
(B) Provide Indirect W,
Plumbing Drawings.
piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the
by Wawa.
piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the
(C) Provide hot water supplies and accessories as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings.
Accessories shall include, ball valve, backflow preventer and braided steel tubing.
10.10 Refrigerated Deli Display
10.11 Rethermalizer, Eq. 612:
(A) Equipment furnished
(B) Provide Indirect We
Plumbing Drawings.
run independent of e
(C) Provide hot water sL
Accessories shall in(
NOT USED.
by Wawa.
to piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the
fwo(2) indirect waste connections are required, and shall be
ch other. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions.
plies and accessories as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings.
ide ball valve, backflow preventor and braided steel tubing.
10.12 Sink (Countertop, Coffee and Prep. Areas), Eq. B20:
(A) Fixture and faucet I furnished by Wawa. Plumbing Contractor shall provide
installation and accessories as required.
(B) Verify waste piping configuration (Hard Piped or Indirect Waste) as indicated on the
Plumbing Drawings.
(C) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and
chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted.
(D) Provide specified sink strainer, trap adapter, union fitting, P trap, and mission band
coupling kit from DN Supply Co. Kit to be purchased from Ed Ronayne at 610 626
0299 for a cost of $ 145.00 including shipping. Allow one week delivery time. No
substitutions will be accepted by Wawa Project Managers. NOTE: Plumbing
contractor to provide copper tubing necessary to complete assembly of the trap from
the sink to the drain located in the wall.
10.13 Sink (Counter Top), Eq. B24 (NOT USED):
10.14 Sink (Counter Top, coffee & Full Service Drinks area), Eq. B25 and B53:
15-7
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
ti
(A) Fixture and faucet furnished by Wawa. Plumbing Contractor shall provide installation F
and accessories as required.
(B) Verify waste piping configuration (Hard Piped or Indirect Waste) as indicated on the
Plumbing Drawings.
(C) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and
chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted.
(D) Provide soldered DWV copper waste assembly, tailpiece and trap. Provide
removable fittings at the fixture connections and at the PVC coupling at wall. Chrome
plated brass fittings with slip joints and PVC piping shall not be permitted.
(E) Provide clean out plug at trap.
10.15 Coffee Brewers, Eq. B26:
(A) Equipment provided by Wawa.
(B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information.
10.16 Cappuccino Machines, Eq. B29:
(A) Equipment provided by Wawa.
(B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information.
10.17 Refrigerated Open Display Case, Eq. C3:
(A) Equipment furnished by Wawa.
(B) Indirect Waste piping shall be provided by the Refrigeration Contractor. Run piping
to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings.
10.18 Drop -In Refrigerator (Coffee Condiment Counter), Eq. C17:
(A) Equipment furnished by Wawa.
(B) Provide Indirect Waste piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the
Plumbing Drawings.
10.19 Reach -In Freezer, Eq. C19:
(A) Equipment furnished by Wawa
(B) Indirect Waste piping shall be provided by the Refrigeration Contractor Run piping
to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings.
10.20 Soda & Ice Dispenser, Eq. C22:
(A) Equipment furnished by Wawa.
(B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information.
10.21 Frozen Carbonated Beverage Dispenser, Eq. C23:
15-8
September 23, 2015
(71
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
(A) Equipment furnished by Wawa.
(B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information.
10.22 Refrigerated Island Display Case, Eq. C3
(A) Equipment furnished �y Wawa
(B) Indirect Waste piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the Plumbing
Drawings.
10.23 Carbonator, Eq. D3:
(A) Equipment provided by Wawa.
(B) Refer to the CSR Specification
10.24 CSR Water Filtration Unit, Eq. D7:
(A) Equipment provided by Wawa.
(B) Refer to the CSR
10.25 Power Wash Unit, Eq.
for supporting information.
for supporting information.
(A) Equipment and accessories provided by Wawa, through Hotsy Equipment
Company. Hotsy Contact: Jim Turley @ 800-344-6879.
(B) Power Wash Outlet Boxes furnished by Wawa, installed by the Plumbing
Contractor.. Contractor shall coordinate exact number of outlet boxes and locations.
(C) Piping into the outlet boxes shall be located in the top of the box, centered, 1" in
from the left side. Extend threaded piping 1" into the box. Outlet valve and
connection provided by equipment installer.
(D) Piping shall be %", 'schedule 80, galvanized steel pipe and threaded fittings. No
pipe dope shall be permitted.
(E) Piping located in exterior walls shall be insulated, and run tight to the inside of the
wall. Piping run abode the ceiling does not require insulation.
(F) Multiple Outlet Configurations: Provide piped manifold with a valved branch line for
each box. Valves shall be high pressure, carbon steel, '/ turn ball valves.
(G) Provide a '/2" valved cold water outlet, backflow preventor, and '/z" threaded male
hose connection as detailed on the Plumbing Drawings. Connection to the water
outlet provided by the equipment installer.
(H) Provide a '/2" threaded female fitting for the power wash discharge connection.
Connection provided) by the equipment installer.
10.26 Emergency Eyewash: NOT USED
10.27 Three Compartment Sink,' Eq. F3:
15-9
September 23, 2015
10.28
10.29
10.30
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
(A) Fixture, faucet, strainers, and lever waste outlets furnished by Wawa. Plumbing
Contractor shall provide installation and accessories as required.
(B) Verify waste piping configuration (Hard Piped or Indirect Waste) as indicated on the
Plumbing Drawings.
(C) When discharging through Indirect Waste Piping, the piping shall be arranged to
spill into the "open" section of the floor sink grate, with beveled end, and required air
gap. Each compartment shall be individually piped.
(D) Waste piping shall be "DWV" copper or PVC piping.
(E) Water supplies shall be hard piped, with'/4 turn ball valves.
(F) Lever Waste Operation: Lever arms shall point to the right in the open position and
rotate clockwise to the left closed position.
(G) Faucet handles shall be aligned to be parallel to the wall when in the closed
position.
Hand Sink (Wash Area), Eq. F5:
(A) Provide Krowne Model #HS-9, stainless steel, wall mounted, hand sink with faucet
and strainer. Provide with H-107, stainless steel side panels.
(B) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and
chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted.
(C) Provide chrome plated brass tailpiece and trap. PVC piping shall not be permitted.
(D) Faucet handles shall be aligned to be perpendicular to the floor when in the closed
position.
Hand Sink ADA (Prep. Area), Eq. F6 (NOT USED):
Hand Sink (Countertop, Coffee and Prep. Areas), Eq. F7 (NOT USED):
10.31 Hand Sink ADA (Prep. Area), Eq. F8:
(A) Provide BK Resources Model # BKHS-ADA-S-P, stainless steel, wall mounted,
hand sink with faucet, wrist handles and strainer. G.C. to prove acrylic side
splashes as required (detailed in drawings)
(B) Alternate: BKHS-ADA-S.
(C) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and
chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted.
(D) Provide chrome plated brass tailpiece and trap. PVC piping shall not be
permitted.
(E) Faucet handles shall be aligned to be perpendicular to the floor when in the
closed position.
15-10
September 23, 2015
10.32
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
Garbage Disposal:
(A) Provide Garbage Disposal when indicated on the Plumbing Drawings and/or as
required by the Local Authority.
(B) Garbage Disposal shall be In-Sink-Erator, model #555ss, 120V-60 HZ, single
phase, % HP motor.
(C) Coordinate electrical requirements and installation with the Electrical Contractor.
Electrical contractor shall provide power outlet and switch.
(D) Provide a cap on the dishwasher connection outlet.
10.33 Water Softener:
(A) Kinetico CP216sOD
11.1 Wall Hydrant, Stucco and Stone Finished Exterior Walls:
_ _ - --- - - -_ -
(A) Provide wall hydrants as located on the Plumbing Drawings.
(B) Wall Hydrants shall �e Jay R. Smith, Figure 5509QT,-SAP-k B (Rough Bronze Box
Face), automatic draining with %" vacuum breaker hose connection.
(C) Cold water supply shall be provided with a backflow preventer as indicated on the
Plumbing Drawings.
Fm sh -d E I A 4; 1
W@jj �Y Rn thP Pl" Il
F-1 --mb
MY
(13)__�Nall HydraRts 1:1-111 qFai!h,__FigW@_W9,. autematm(3 dra*Rm
E-x
_7 e jay R. Smi!_.,RB,_autematiG
MaGullulr� hrp;;kpr- here GOR;eetmen-.
eW--Rte-F- as-R-d-o-Ga-ted OR the
91,2 Wall Hydrant, Gas Canopy:
(A) Provide wall hydrants as located on the Plumbing Drawings,
(B) Wall Hydrants shall, be Jay R. Smith, Figure 5618, automatic draining with
15-11
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15001
PLUMBING
vacuum breaker hose connection.
(C) Cold water supply shall be provided with a backflow preventer as indicated on the
Plumbing Drawings.
11.3 Trap Primers:
(A) Provide trap primers as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings.
(B) Trap primers shall be "Precision Plumbing Products" Prime -Rite Model P-1.
Substitutions shall be permitted if approved by Engineer.
(C) When a single primer serves multiple fixtures, provide trap primer with a distribution
unit.
15001-12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES:
12.1 The Plumbing Engineer will visit the site to perform three (3) Punch List Inspections,
determining the quality and completeness of the plumbing installation. The first and
second punch list visits shall be conducted prior to the "CO" date. During the first and
second punch list visits, the General Contractor shall receive a hand written list of items
requiring attention. The third punch list visit shall be conducted after the store has been
opened, to verify that the items listed in the previous visits have been addressed and
completed. If additional punch list visits are required due to the Contractor's inability to
address and complete all items, the costs associated for the additional visits shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor and will be deducted by Wawa from the Contractor's Final
Payment.
12.2 As -Built Drawing: The Plumbing Contractor shall maintain one (1) set of the latest issued
Plumbing Drawings to reflect the actual piping installations, conditions and connections of
all equipment and devices, and any other changes to the original design documents. All
deviations and/or modifications shall be clearly indicated. As -Built drawings shall be
delivered to the Wawa Project Manager at the end of construction.
12.3 Maintenance Manuals: The Plumbing Contractor shall provide one (1) copy of the
Manufacturer's Maintenance Manuals and Installation Instructions for each piece of
equipment provided, to the Wawa Project Manager at the end of construction.
END SECTION 15001
15-12
September 23, 2015
01.1 CSR system shall be an
accordance with Wawa's
01.2 CSR system shall be
components:
• Model 202 Parallel pre-
• Model E20 pre -filter w/
• High Flow "MC" filters,
• Model SR-X Scale Inhit
• Model EV9336-50 Sui
tubing.
01.3 CSR system shall be
Coordinate equipment
15002-02 CONFIGURATION
02.1 CSR system shall be
upstream of the SR-X
SECTION 15002
EVERPURE WATER TREATMENT (CSR UNIT)
Dual High Flow System. Configured and packaged in
eight (8) cartridge system, consisting of the following
w/ inlet valve and pressure gauge,
0 cartridges,
(remote mount),
tank w/ quick -disconnect hose connection, and shielded
A by Wawa and installed by the Plumbing Contractor.
with the Wawa Project Manager.
ed with two (2) 3/" water outlets. One outlet shall be located
e and one outlet located downstream of the SR-X cartridge.
02.2 Equipment connections fed via a V manifold from the upstream outlet shall include the
iced -tea dispenser frozen carbonated beverage dispenser (FCB), soda carbonator(s),
and soda still -water.
02.3 Equipment connections fed via a W manifold from the downstream outlet shall include
the coffee brewers, roll oven, hot cappuccino makers, smoothie ice and all icemakers.
02.4 Refer to piping details on the Plumbing Drawings for outlet configuration, outlet mounting
heights, backflow preventler requirements, and miscellaneous notes.
13 LOCATION AND MOUNTING
03.1 CSR system shall be located as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. When drawings do
not clearly indicate the location, verify with the Wawa Project Manager.
03.2 A minimum clearance of 3" shall be provided below the bottom of the cartridges to allow
for proper removal.
03.3
The General Contractor shall provide a shelf for the pressure tank. Shelf shall be located
adjacent to the CSR system as shown on drawings.
15002-04 PLUMBING
04.1 Refer to the plumbing
requirements.
04.2 Plumbing Contractor shal
Connection to the domes
water meter and backflc
equipment shall be permit
04.3 Where stores are provid(
specification section for piping materials and installation
provide an "express" 1" cold water supply to the CSR system.
tic cold water main shall be made directly downstream of the
w preventer, as the first take -off. No additional fixtures or
led to be connected to the CSR system water supply.
with a well water service, the CSR express main shall be
15-13
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15002
EVERPURE WATER TREATMENT (CSR UNIT)
connected downstream of the well system pressure tank.
04.4 Plumbing Contractor shall provide the individual equipment connection outlets as
indicated on the drawings, including ball valve shut -offs, and backflow preventers.
04.5 Final equipment termination, including the flexible tubing from the outlet to the equipment,
shall be provided by others.
04.6 Piping, tubing, and fittings located downstream of the backflow preventers serving the
soda carbonators and frozen carbonated beverage dispensers shall be plastic or
stainless steel. No copper or brass components shall be permitted.
15002-05 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
05.1 CSR system shall be monitored by the BAS for water flow and water pressure.
05.2 Lawn Irrigation Water Meter: Provide a 1" water meter, located in the water service room,
on the cold water supply line. Meter shall be configured for 1 pulse per gallon. Meter
shall be, Master Meter, Model MJ09-1CH-AAA-2, with no additional substitutions. Meter
shall be monitored by the BAS system.
05.3 Domestic water Meter: Provide 1-1/2" water meter, located in the water service room, on
the cold water supply line. Meter shall be configured for 1 pulse per 10 gallons. Meter
shall be Master Meter Model MJ10-1CH-AAA-2, with no substitutions. Meter shall be
monitored by the BAS system.
05.4 Provide a'/2' threaded outlet for the connection of a pressure sensor, on the CSR system
outlet piping. Pressure sensor shall be furnished by the BAS Contractor, installed by the
Plumbing Contractor.
05.5 Refer to the water riser diagram for additional information and location requirements.
15002-06 TESTING AND ACTIVATION
06.1 Activation drain tubing supplied with the unit shall be coiled, tied and attached to the filter
assembly, near the drain outlet valve.
06.2 Drain tubing shall only be connected to the outlet when needed for the activation of new
filter cartridges.
06.3 Filter activation procedure shall be in strict accordance with the requirements listed in the
Everpure product specifications, provided with each unit assembly.
END SECTION 15002
15-14
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
01.1 It is the intent of these Specifications to define a total air conditioning system. As such,
these Specifications cover the entire system, including air handling equipment,
refrigeration equipment, heating equipment, air distribution equipment and air diffusion
equipment.
01.2 The work to be done under these Specifications and the Drawings consists of furnishing
all equipment, materials, labor and services, and performing all operations to complete
the mechanical construction work for this project. Any work not specifically covered by
these Specifications or indicated on the Mechanical/Electrical Drawings, but necessary to
complete or perfect any part of this installation in a substantial manner, shall be provided
without extra cost to Wawa.
01.3 The term "furnish" shall mean to obtain and supply to the job site. The term "install" shall
mean to fix in position and connect for use. The term "provide" shall mean to furnish and
install.
01.4 The Drawings indicate diagrammatically the extent, general character and location of the
work included. Offsets or changes in duct shape to avoid structural or other
interferences, and work indicated but having minor details obviously omitted shall be
provided without extra cost.
01.5 Any changes and/or modifications must be reviewed and approved by the Architect or
Engineer and Wawa's Project Manager prior to construction.
01.6 Remove all trash, debris and demolition material from premises at the end of each work
day
01.7 Schedule all work, cutting and building service interruptions with Project Manager prior to
completing work.
01.8 Contractor shall provide all roof openings, roof mounting curbs, flashings, auxiliary steel,
threaded rods, vibration ii olators, turnbuckles, etc., to support his equipment on or from
the structure.
01.9 The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate the electrical characteristics of all mechanical
equipment with the Electrical Contractor.
01.10 Provide temporary filters on return air grilles from time of startup and prior to air
balancing.
01.11 For Remodel Stores OnIly: When reusing existing equipment, ductwork, grilles and
diffusers, Mechanical Contractor shall follow current Wawa Mechanical Specifications
and Drawing Notes. All r i-used equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and sanitized.
01.12 Mechanical Contractor shall ensure that all manufacturer's installation and clearance
recommendations are followed. Verify with the Wawa Project Manager if there is a
discrepancy.
15-.15
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
15003-02 SUMMARY OF WORK
02.1 Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of complete
HVAC and control system as indicated. The work includes but is not necessarily limited
to the following:
(A) Provide complete and operational mechanical systems, equipment, and materials as
indicated on the Drawings.
(B) Provide air distribution systems to include roof top unit, exhaust fans, automatic
temperature controls, sheet metal ductwork, insulation, flexible ductwork, diffusers,
return air grilles, transfer ducts, etc.
(C) Provide systems of temperature control to assure sequences of operation as
specified herein. Include all power, control and interlocking 120 volt wiring where
required. Provide a Registered Electrician to perform all 120 volt wiring as a direct
Subcontractor for this work. Provide new control devices as required and indicated.
For all Remodeled Stores provide pan leak detector and local alarm with light and
buzzer, and associated wiring.
(D) Furnish and install insulation for piping, and ductwork as specified herein.
(E) Provide control system testing and commissioning.
(F) Provide written operating instructions, equipment cut sheets and a detailed
Preventive Maintenance Report explaining which thermostats control which
systems, frequency of changing filters, correct sizes noted, and location of filters.
This Preventive Maintenance Report must be signed upon completion and given to
Project Manager for distribution. This report is also to be signed by the Store
Manager representing his understanding of the basic operations of HVAC systems
in that particular store.
(G) Provide exhaust fans, etc., as indicated on the plans.
(H) Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall provide a certified Air Balance Report
for all diffusers, exhaust fans, controls and equipment. All systems shall be
balanced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Wawa's Project Manager.
Balancing test must be executed within five (5) days of start-up and submitted to the
Wawa Project Manager within ten (10) days.
(1) The maximum flexible duct length permitted is 8'-0". This ductwork shall be installed
without kinks or 90 degree bends. If a 90 degree bend is required, provide rigid
ductwork and a rigid elbow with insulation up through that point. Provide 1", 18 GA,
flat metal support bands mid -span of all flex duct runs.
(J) Coordinate location of ductwork, air devices and equipment with light fixtures,
sprinkler piping, piping, etc. and Architectural features.
15-16
September 23, 2015
02.2 The Contractor shall furr
completion of the work. '
required. Verify with the'
SECTION 15003
HVAC
a schedule indicating time required from receipt of order to
is of the essence, and earliest possible completion time is
va Project Manager if required in Remodel Stores.
02.3 Contractors shall provide' 4 (four) sets (for each A/C unit) of 30% efficient pleated media
replacement filters for the A/C units. All filters shall be in place at startup and then
changed at the air bala Icing stage. The extra 2 (two) sets of filters as noted shall be
delivered to the Wawa P�oject Manager, and shall sign a proof of delivery.
02.4 Remodel Stores Only: The existing mechanical systems are to be inspected prior to
bidding. Recommendations are to be submitted to the Wawa Project Manager prior to
commencing work. Any questions, changes or recommendations to new installations as
per Drawings and Specifications are to be authorized in writing between the Wawa
Project Manager and General Contractor. Architect should be immediately consulted
and advised of the same.)
NA
03.1 It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify field conditions at the site and notify
the Wawa Project Manager of any discrepancies prior to awarding of bid.
03.2 Any changes and/or modifications must be reviewed and approved by the Architect,
'Engineer and Wawa Project Manager prior to bid award.
03.3 DO NOT OPERATE NE1
COOLING DURING N
COMPONENT DAMAGE
OPERATION OF THE H
CONDITIONS FOR TH
DOWN FOR FACTORY
' HVAC EQUIPMENT TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEAT AND
W CONSTRUCTION OR REMODELING. PERMANENT
AND PREMATURE COMPONENT FAILURE CAN RESULT.
AC EQUIPMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION VIOLATES THE
WARRANTY AND CAN BE DETECTED DURING TEAR
04.1 Cutting and patching oI all general building components shall be performed by the
Contractor, utilizing workmen skilled in the particular trades involved, unless otherwise
agreed upon with the General Contractor.
04.2 Coordinate and schedule with the Wawa Project Manager and General Contractor the
cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of
mechanical equipment and materials.
04.3 Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting
and patching.
04.4 Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a
result of mechanical and electrical installations.
I
i
04.5 No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is
necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non -conforming installations.
15-17
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
04.6 Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical and electrical equipment and
materials required or indicated.
04.1 Effectively protect all materials and equipment from dust, dirt and damage until final
acceptance. Close all pipe and. equipment openings during construction with suitable
protective covering for equipment and materials before, during and following installation.
Provide new materials and equipment to replace similar items damaged by Mechanical
Contractor without additional cost to Wawa. All open ductwork must also be covered and
protected against construction dust, etc. Cleaning of all ductwork and equipment shall be
required if ductwork and equipment are not protected during construction.
04.8 Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or
scheduled to be removed.
04.9 Provide sheet metal flashings at all drywall and ceiling penetrations.
15003-05 REFERENCED STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
05.1 Entire installation, including materials, equipment and workmanship. shall ,conform with
all applicable laws, codes and regulations of municipal, state and federal authorities, also
the latest accepted edition of the Florida Building Code, Florida Building Code 51h Edition
(2014) Mechanical. National Electrical Code, ASHRAE, NFPA and SMACNA Standards
and other regulatory bodies having jurisdiction over this class of work. Where applicable,
materials and equipment shall bear stamps or seals of ARI, ASME and. UL and ETL.
05.2 Permits: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, approvals and pay all related
fees.
05.3 Safety: During construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing all his
employees with safe and healthy working conditions as prescribed in the "Safety and
Health Regulations for Construction" of the Occupational Safety 'and Health
Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor.
05.4 Secure and deliver to the Wawa Project Manager all certificates of compliance required
by the local authorities.
15003-06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
06.1 All Mechanical Contractor's materials, equipment and workmanship shall be guaranteed
in writing for one (1) year after final acceptance by the Wawa Project Manager.
06.2 Provide to the Wawa Project Manager the manufacturer's extended five (5) year warranty
on all compressors and ten (10) years on all gas burners, heat exchangers and furnaces.
06.3 Contractor shall unconditionally guarantee, in writing, all equipment and workmanship for
a period of one year from date of acceptance of system by Wawa unless otherwise
specified, and to include all parts and labor, with an additional second through fifth year
warranty on the compressor and logic module to include parts only. Contractor shall
15-18
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
provide free service for all equipment involved in contract during this first year period,
unless deemed otherwise; by the Wawa Project Manager.
06.4 The warranty period for all systems and equipment shall start at the Store "Opening Day".
15003-07 SUBMITTALS
07.1 Shop Drawings: Mechanical Contractor shall submit electronically, all equipment, piping,
and automatic temperature controls to Architect and Engineer. Electronic copies of the
submittals shall be accepted. All submittals shall be properly organized, clean copies,
with model numbers clearly identified.
Maintenance Manuals: Mechanical Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of operating
and maintenance manuals, neatly presented in a 3-ring binder. Information shall be
provided for all equipment and devices, including wiring and control diagrams, cut
sheets, sequence of operations, warranty, etc. In addition, provide copies of the
approved air balance report and Lennox EOC check list.
07.2 During construction, the Contractor will maintain a record set of installation prints. He will
record on these prints all deviations from the contract Drawings in sizes, locations and
details. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall deliver these prints to the.
Wawa Project Manager.
07.3 Contractor shall be responsible for checking of proposed equipment prior to submitting to
Architect and Engineer. The result of any re -designing caused by a substitution or lack
of coordination shall be borne by the Contractor. All substitutions or deviations from the
specified equipment shal� be highlighted in the submittals and indicated as such.
07.4 Engineer shall review a limit of two submittals review periods per equipment or device.
Costs to Engineer for review of additional submittals shall be borne by Contractor. If
equipment is installed that is not approved the Contractor shall bear all costs related to
replace said equipment.
07.5 Mechanical equipment shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Substitutions shall be
prohibited, except as listed below. Where such substitution is allowed, and the
substituted item requires modifications to the system or surrounding spaces, the
Contractor shall pay for all costs involved such as Architect's and Engineer's fees and
any additional construction costs for his own work and that of other divisions. Equipment
shall not be purchased, or work started until Shop Drawings are approved.
(A) Roof Top Unit shaall be: Lennox Hi -Efficiency "ENERGENCE" Series units.
Substitutions shall b'le prohibited. National account pricing shall be verified.
(B) In -Line Cabinet and RoofMoun_t_e_d Exhaust Fans shall be: Penn Ventilator
Company or Greenheck or Cook.
all ducA Fneunted faeteFy installed RTLJ smoke deteGter-s. This fFamed desuFneRt shall be
.` mellnted in the Store Manager' Area.
15-19
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
15003-08 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
08.1 All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions for
the type and capacity of each piece of equipment used, placed in a position for complete
and unobstructed service with * minimum clearance in front of ele_ctri_c_aI access
panels.
08.2 Coordinate the installation of mechanical and electrical equipment and materials with
other building components.
08.3 Coordinate with General Contractor for all chases, slots, and openings in other building
components to allow for mechanical and electrical installations.
08.4 Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices as they are constructed.
08.5 Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment
for efficient flow of the work.
08.6 Dielectric fittings shall be used where dissimilar metals are joined.
08.7 Filters are to be accessible for replacement, for all HVAC equipment. Filters are to be
accessible from within the same room or area in which their respective equipment is
installed.
15003-09 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
09.1 All equipment, piping, and ductwork shall be identified with plastic pipe markers and
plastic duct markers conforming to ANSI A13.1. 'Equipment shall be identified with the
tag number in a neat legible fashion. Pipe and duct markers shall be applied every
fifteen (15) feet of horizontal run or less and every eight (8) feet of vertical rise.
09.2 All mechanical sensors, controls and switches shall be clearly labeled with the equipment
they control or with which they interact. Also include, as part of the label, the area that
the respective equipment serves or affects.
15003-10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
10.1 This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an
integral or separately mounted part of packaged mechanical equipment. These
components include, but are not limited to motors, starters, and disconnect switches,
controls and control wiring furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical
equipment, or separately mounted.
10.2 Unless otherwise noted, all electrically driven equipment provided or furnished by
Mechanical Contractor shall include NEMA motors, combination starters, pushbuttons,
relays, and all other controlling devices required for proper and satisfactory operation of
the equipment.
15-20
September 23, 2015
10.3 Starters for packaged
Deliver loose starters
Contractor will provide
to the motors.
10.4 Mechanical Contractor
voltage) and wiring dev
switches, pressure and
interlock wiring. Provide
sized per NEC codes.
SECTION 15003
HVAC
uipment may be mounted on a common frame at the factory.
Electrical Contractor, who will mount them. The Electrical
wer wiring from power source through the starters and connect
hall provide all control wiring (minimum 18 gauge for low
ces required for control items, such as float switches, wall
vacuum switches, alternators, aquastats, thermostats and
over -current protection for control circuits. All wiring shall be
10.5 Note that for single phase across the line equipment, Electrical Contractor will provide
power wiring from power source to the motor through a motor switch and all intervening
control devices. Control devices shall be furnished and installed by Mechanical
Contractor. Motor switch shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor.
10.6 The Mechanical Contr
indicating lights and rei
shall be factory mounts
The Mechanical Contra
Fire Alarm Contractor
the fire alarm system.
Sensor. Provide a
supply and return air.
11.1 Provide ductwork with fil
ducts exposed to view or
and exhaust ductwork. )
and adhesives shall conl
barrier.
(A) Flame spread
(B) Smoke developed:
for shall provide all , UGt FFIGURted smoke detect rc remote
ite keypads for resetting of smoke detectors. Smoke detectors
_in_ the roof top air conditioning unit by the unit manufacturer.
>r shall also wire all devices indicated above. The Security and
ill tie into the smoke detector alarm contacts and wire them to
The smoke detectors shall be as manufactured by System
9 senseF f^F the return aiF and a photoelectric sensor for the
glass board insulation for air conditioning supply and return
weather. Provide blanket insulation for interior supply, return
duct insulation, including laminated jackets, mastic, sealants
n to ASTM E84. All ductwork insulation shall have a vapor
or less.
or less.
11.2 Fibrous glass insulation shall be:
(A) Board Insulation: Density of 3.0 PCF, ASTM C612, thermal conductivity (K value at
750 F) of 0.26., with a metal foil scrim jacket.
I
(B) Blanket Insulation: Density of 1.5 PCF, ASTM C553, thermal conductivity (K value
at 751 F) of 0.25, with a metal foil scrim jacket.
11.3 Insulate ductwork with fibrous glass insulation, as specified, seal joints in the insulation
vapor barrier to form :a continuous shield as recommended by the insulation
manufacturer. All ductwork insulation shall have a vapor barrier.
15-21
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
(A) All ductwork exposed to the weather shall be insulated with 4" thick rigid board
insulation with vapor barrier. Use multiple layers as required to achieve desired
thickness.
(B) All interior exposed to view ductwork shall be insulated with 1" rigid fiberglass board
with foil and scrim facing.
(C) Install minimum 1-1/2" thick blanket reinforced foil faced type insulation for all
interior concealed ductwork installed below the trusses. For round duct, a fiberglass
insulation sleeve may be used so long as all end seams are sealed as set forth in
paragraph 'G' of this same specification section.
(D) Install a minimum of 3" thick blanket reinforced foil faced type insulation (use
multiple layers as required to achieve the desired thickness) for all ductwork located
in the truss spaces, and all areas within the building, but outside of the building's
insulation envelope.
(E) Provide wire banding to support wrap insulation on 24" centers using vinyl coated
wire or aluminum ceiling suspension wire.
(F) All take -off collars to flexible duct runs shall have their insulation covering properly
marked to denote where the manual damper adjustment lever pokes through along
with permanent hanging tags from the adjustment levers.
(G) Fiberglass duct wrap shall only be applied on tightly sealed, clean, dry sheet metal
duct. Insulation shall be wrapped around duct and a 2" foil face flap shall completely
overlap all adjacent insulation. ,Seams shall..,.,;.,+o%, , GeRteF
(PVY) +Ppq ., gtgh�Rg +tie with d pt ;.,� i�+,..,
_.Adjacent
sections of insulation shall be snugly butted with the circumferential 2" flap
overlapping, stapled and Taped sealed. Seams shall be stapled approximately 6" on
center with outward clinching staples, then sealed with ;
-----.-_ GRtF -
re - -
two coats of vapor retarder mastic
enforced with one layer of 4 wide-open weave glass fabric:
11.4 All exterior ductwork shall be protected by a prefabricated self -adhering, sheet -type
waterproofing membrane as manufactured by Polyguard Products, Inc. or MFM Building
Products Corporation.
(A) The above referenced products shall be Polyguard's "Alumaguard 60" or MFM's
"Flex -Clad 400".
(B) The waterproofing membrane shall only be applied after the ductwork has been
properly sealed and properly insulated. The membrane shall not be used as a
means for affixing the board insulation to the ductwork.
(C) The waterproofing membrane shall be applied on pinned or banded fiberglass board
duct insulation after the insulation surface has been properly cleaned. The insulation
15-22
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
surface shall be dirt free, dry and free of all foreign materials.
(D) The waterproofing membrane shall be installed so that all seams have a minimum
4" overlap. The membrane shall first be applied to the underside of the duct with
enough material to v rap up the sides of the duct a minimum of 4". The membrane
should then be applied to the sides of the duct with enough material to wrap over
the top of the duct a�minimum of 4", as well as covering the bottom piece of lapping
membrane. Finally the top section of membrane shall be applied so that 4"
minimum of membrane shall lap down over each side.
(E) Clean glove shall be used during the waterproofing installation so as to prevent
hand oils from cont Iminating the overlap areas. Waterproofing membrane shall be
applied when insulation surface temperature is above 501 F. When the surface
temperature is below 501 F, use a hot air heat gun to warm the surface of the
adhesive as the membrane is applied.
(F) Coordinate the insulation thickness and the A/C unit locations to provide service
access to the intake hood.
11.5 Refrigerant piping insula
flexible foamed plastic,
Density of 5 to 7 PCF, a
temperature range of —21
accordance with ASTM
protective coating on all i
may be used as a weatl-
and seams.
11.6 Condensate drain pl
"Owen's_ Corning W
envelope. Insulation
rating of 50 or less in
seams.
15003-12 CONDENSATE PIPING
ion shall be "Armstrong Armaflex" or "Owen's Corning Ware",
unicellular elastomeric material conforming to ASTM C534.
thermal conductivity (K value at 751 F) of 0.28 max., operating
i° F to 2000 F, and a self -extinguishing fire resistance rating in
)1692. Provide the manufacturer's recommended ultra violet
isulation exposed to the weather. Flexclad or aluminum guard
er and UV protection coat. Use insulation sealant at all joints
shall be insulated with 3/4" thick "Armstrong_ Armaflex" or
pipe insulation where routed inside the building_ thermal
have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed
dance with ASTM E89. Use insulation sealant at all joints and
12.1 All condensate drain piping shall be type "L" copper with wrought fittings and 95/5 solder.
Schedule 40, PVC piping is acceptable where permitted by the local code official.
12.2 Pitch condensate drain piping %" per 10 feet in direction of flow. Provide a minimum 4"
deep trap at each unit, refer to the equipment manufacturers' recommendations.
12.3 The Contractor shall use eccentric reducers in horizontal piping.
i
15003-13 REFRIGERANT PIPING
13.1 The Contractor shall provide and install the refrigerant piping required by the equipment
that is provided. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed for piping design
and installation. All refrigerant specialties recommended by the condensing unit
i
15-23
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
manufacturer shall be provided. The Contractor shall use copper pipe types K, L and M
hard temper ASTM B88. Solder joints in copper tubing with type of solder recommended
by the manufacturer. Braze joints in refrigerant R-410A refrigerant tubing systems with
the following exceptions: solder joints at valves, controls and other locations where
excessive heat transfer could cause damage, with a recommended soft solder metal.
13.2 Refrigerant piping shall be hard drawn type copper tubing especially prepared for
refrigerant systems with silver solder fittings. Refrigerant piping shall be installed as
follows:
(A) Pitch all horizontal lines in direction of gas flow at least % inch per 10 feet of pipe.
(B) Provide a trap on piping for every 15 feet of lift, refer to equipment manufacturers'
recommendations.
(C) A minimum of 500 microns vacuum, verified with an electronic gauge shall be pulled
on the system and maintained for six hours.
13.3 Pipe sizes shall be verified with the unit manufacturer to assure delivery of capacities.
13.4 The Contractor shall provide and install refrigerant tube dry sealed, soft annealed ASTM
B88 for all underground applications.
15003-14 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING/COOLING UNIT
14.1 General: The following specification applies for all Packaged Electric Rooftop
Heating/Cooling Units. Units shall be dedicated down flow or horizontal airflow as
indicated on the Drawings. Operating range shall be between 1150 F and 0° F cooling as
standard from the factory for all units. Cooling performance shall be rated in accordance
with DOE and/or ARI testing procedures. All units shall be factory assembled, internally
wired, fully charged with R-410-A and 100 percent run -tested before leaving the factory.
Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for simplified identification.
Units shall be UL listed and labeled.
14.2 Units shall be as scheduled on Mechanical Drawings. Packaged Air Handling Units shall
be: Lennox Hi -Efficiency L Series units. Contractor shall coordinate the actual fit and
clearances with the equipment in the equipment pockets on the roof.
14.3 Casing: Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel
with 1" insulation. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with a
weather -resistant baked enamel finish. Unit's surface shall be tested 500 hours in a salt
spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet construction shall allow for all
maintenance on one side of the unit. Service panels shall be provided with hinged, tool -
less access while providing a water and air tight seal. The indoor air section shall be
insulated with fire resistant, permanent, odorless glass fiber material. The downflow
unit's base pan shall have no penetrations within the perimeter of the curb other than the
raised 1-1/8" high supply/return openings to provide an added water integrity precaution,
if the condensate drain backs up. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift
and crane lifting.
15-24
September 23, 2015
14.4 Unit top: The top c
hemmed and gasket
SECTION 15003
HVAC
shall be one piece or where seams exist, it shall be double
d to prevent water leakage.
14.5 Roof Curb: The roof curb shall be designed to mate with a downflow or horizontal flow
unit and provide support and a watertight installation when installed properly. The roof
curb design shall allow field -fabricated rectangular supply/return ductwork to be
connected directly to the curb. Curb design shall comply with NRCA requirements. Curb
shall ship knocked down for field assembly and include wood nailer strips.
14.6 Filters: Two inch, 30%
shall be factory suppli
Owner.
14.7 Compressors: All uni
compressors with cents
Motor shall be suction
minus 10 percent of u
provided on 5 to 7 '/2 tc
sensitive motor overloai
have internal spring isol
noise. Low pressure s%
for cooling operation do%
14.8 Refrigerant Circuits:
expansion devices, se
as standard. An area
14.9 Evaporator and Conden
bonded to configured alu
the factory to ensure pre
leak tested to 200 psig
condenser coil section. f
on condenser coils for all
ocean or and bay and all
ted throw -away filters shall be standard on all units. Filters
One complete extra set of filters shall be furnished to the
shall be direct -drive hermetic, reciprocating or scroll type
gal oil pump providing positive lubrication to moving parts.
s-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or
nameplate voltage. External high pressure cutout shall be
models. Crankcase heater, internal temperature and current -
shall be included for maximum protection. Compressors shall
on and sound muffling to minimize vibration transmission and
hes shall be standard. Units shall have low ambient controls
to 0°F.
;h refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orifice
pressure ports and refrigerant line filter driers factory installed
be provided for replacement suction line driers.
er Coils: Internally finned 3/8" copper tubes mechanically
iinum plate fin shall be standard. Coils shall be leak tested at
sure integrity. The evaporator coil and condenser coil shall be
ind pressure tested to 450 psig. Provide coil guards on the
-ovide factory applied, phenolic coating for corrosion protection
snits located within 5 miles of large bodies of salt water such as
2.5 ton models.
14.10 Heating: Units under 5 tons shall have a single stage heat option. The 6 and 7 '/2 ton
units shall have either single or two stage heating options and the 8 '/2 through 25 ton
units shall have two stage heating.
14.11 Outdoor Fans: The outdoor fans shall be direct -drive, statically and dynamically
balanced, draw through 'sin the vertical discharge position. The fan motor(s) shall be
permanently lubricated and have built-in thermal overload protection.
14.12 Indoor Fans: The 3 to 5 ton units shall have a belt -drive, where available, FC centrifugal
fan. Units over 5 tons shall have belt driven, FC centrifugal fans with adjustable motor
sheaves. Units over 7'/2 tons shall have an adjustable assembly for quick -adjustment to
fan belts and motor sheaves. All motors shall be thermally protected. Oversized motors
shall be available for highs static operations. All blower fans and motors shall be mounted
15-25
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
on a slide out assembly to allow for servicing.
14.13 Controls: Unit shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor
pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Units shall provide an external location
for mounting fused disconnect device. Microprocessor controls shall be provided for all
24 volt control functions. The resident control algorithms shall make all heating, cooling
and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring
indoor and outdoor temperatures. The control algorithm maintains accurate temperature
control, minimizes drift from set point and provides better building comfort. A centralized
microprocessor shall provide anti -short cycle timing and time delay between compressors
to provide a higher level of machine protection.
14.14 Outside Air Intake Hoods: For down flow and horizontal air flow units shall be either field
or factory -installed depending on the unit size. The assembly includes — manual locking
dampers with position setting and bird screen. Refer to the Drawings to determine which
units shall receive these hoods.
14.15 Conventional Thermostat Interface (CTI): This field -installed circuit board shall provide
interface with electro-mechanical thermostats or automation systems.
14.16 Remote wall mounted temperature sensors shall be provided to interface with the unit
control panels.
14.17 Warranty: Units shall have a limited one year warranty on all parts excluding
compressors which will have a five year warranty.
Mechanical Contractor shall hire unit manufacturer (Lennox) and provide an Equipment
Operation Check (EOC) Report. The unit manufacturer shall provide the services of a
qualified HVAC technician to carry out a comprehensive check (EOC) of the HVAC units
and their operation. This comprehensive check shall be conducted once units have been
started up and after a final interior air balance. A representative of the installing
contractor shall be present at the EOC check to correct any deficiencies. A
comprehensive report shall be submitted in duplicate to Engineer and Wawa Project
Manager, by the unit manufacturer. Report information shall include, but not necessarily
limited to the following:
(A) Electrical performance data including amperage and voltage readings for each
compressor, blower motor and electric heating unit.
(B) Compressor performance data including suction and discharge pressure.
(C) Certify correct thermostat installation and operation.
(D) Certification of correct electrical power and control wire connections.
14.18 Smoke detectors shall be facto_ ry mounted in the RTU_ as indicated on the Drawings; and
easily accessible for service.
14.19 Provide disconnect switches on all rooftop packaged units; spring loaded weatherproof
cover, accessible from outside of unit.
14.20 Flexible connectors may be damaged by soap solutions used for leak detection. Make
15-26
September 23, 2015
sure that technicians
that the solutions thoi
SECTION 15003
HVAC
a solution made specifically for this purpose. Also make sure
ily rinsed after the leak check has been completed.
14.21 Electric heat modules shall be installed within the basic unit. Electric heater elements
shall be constructed of helix wound nichrome elements. Staging shall be achieved
through the unit control processor (UCP). Each heater package shall have automatic
reset high limit control operating through heating element contactors. All heaters shall be
individually fused from factory, where required, and meet all NEC and CEC requirements
when properly installed. Power assemblies shall provide single -point connection. Electric
heat modules shall be UL Listed.
15003-15 METAL DUCTWORK
15.1 Comply with NFPA Standards 90A, 90B and 91, except as indicated otherwise.
15.2 Sheet Metal Materials, General: Provide the following materials. Package and mark
sheet metal materials as specified in ASTM A700.
(A) Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality, ASTM A527, coating designation G
90, mill phosphatizeid finish for exposed surfaces of ducts. Connections shall be
made with 'Slip and Drive' connectors.
(B) Flexible Ductwork: Flex -Vent Type KM flexible duct, with 1" fiberglass insulation,
polymer inner liner and fire retardant metalized jacketing. The maximum permitted
installed length of flexible ductwork is 8'-0". Provide 1" wide flat support bands mid -
span.
15.3 Reinforcement Shapes a�d Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel
reinforcing where required on galvanized sheet metal ducts.
15.4 Joint and Seam Sealant: I Provide sealant at all joints and seams. Sealant shall be butyl.
Install prior to insulating. Install on all duct systems including exhaust systems. Joint
and seam sealants shall be sealant tape with butyl adhesive as manufactured by Carlisle
Hardcast Inc., Aluma-Grip Model AFT-701. Tape shall have 2 mil aluminum backing with
33 mil butyl rubber adhesive.
15.5 Rectangular to Round Collar Sealants: Provide butyl or silicon sealant or caulk at all
round duct collar connections and 450 branch take -off collars.
15.6 Fire -Resistant Sealant: (Provide one -part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a
through -penetration fire -stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through
walls, floors and ceilings, having fire -resistance ratings indicated as established by
testing identical assemblies per ASTM E814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
15.7 Rectangular Duct Fabrication: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts
with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards". Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness
15-27
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals. All
ductwork shall be constructed to SMACNA static pressure classification of +2" W.C. and
seal class of "A". Duct sizes shown are inside free area dimensions. Use a minimum of
26 gauge sheet metal for ductwork construction.
15.8 Rectangular Duct Fittings: Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections,
and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct
Construction Standard," latest Edition.
15.9 Install ducts with the fewest possible joints. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in
directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
15.10 Coordinate layout with lighting layouts, piping, sprinkler piping and similar finished work.
Provide access doors or panels on both sides of duct mounted coils and fire dampers.
15.11 If any ductwork, equipment, etc., is going to interfere with proper service, Architect and
Wawa Project Manager are to be notified immediately of the situation.
15003-16 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
16.1 Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards."
Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.
16.2 Provide manual dampers of single blade type or multi -blade type, constructed in
accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" at each branch with the
handle accessible for service. Damper handles shall neatly protrude through the
insulation and be clearly marked. Provide quadrant locks for each damper, quadrant
lock device on one end of shaft, and end bearing plate. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN
ALL 90 DEGREE ELBOWS IN SUPPLY DUCTWORK. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN
RETURN DUCTWORK WHERE SHOWN. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS NEAR
RETURN ELBOWS WITH TURNING VANES AND AT EACH FIRE DAMPER.
16.3 Duct mounted fire dampers shall be UL classified "Fire Resistance Rating 1-1/2 Hours"
and shall be fusible link type B curtain type with dampers out of the airstream. Install
dampers as indicated on the Drawings.
(A) Diffuser mounted fire dampers shall be UL Fire Rated Floor/Ceiling assemblies and
Roof/Ceiling assemblies which require specially tested and classified ceiling
dampers (also called Ceiling Fire Dampers or Radiation Dampers) to provide fire
and heat protection where HVAC components penetrate the ceiling membrane.
Standard 1-1/2 and 3 hour primary fire dampers DO NOT provide the necessary
protection.
(B) For HVAC penetrations of up to 324 sq.in. (2090) through UL rated fire assemblies
with fire resistance ratings of 3 hours or less, provide ceiling/diffuser mounted fire
dampers as manufactured by Ruskin CFD(R)2, CFD(R)3, or approved equal. For
HVAC penetrations larger than 324 sq. in. (2090) and up to 576 sq. in. (3716)
through UL rated fire assemblies with fire resistance rations of 3 hours or less,
t
15-28
September 23, 2015
provide ceiling/diffu.
CFD6, or approved
penetrations are de:
(C) UL Listed Fusible V
with a simple mecl
airflow. A standarc
conditions, the dam
added to the damp
temperature) fusible
16.4 Coordinate with other
ductwork accessories
16.5 Provide elbows or tees
ductwork. Provide brae
take -offs.
SECTION 15003
HVAC
mounted fire dampers as manufactured by Ruskin CFD4,
ual. The quantity and frequency of permissible HVAC ceiling
ibed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
lume Adjustment. The standard, fusible link can be replaced
inism that permits adjustment of damper blades to balance
3/16" (5) hex (Allen) wrench is used for adjustment. In fire
gr closes regardless of volume setting. This feature must be
r at fabrication. It cannot be field added. 1651 F (specify
'olume adjustment options are available.
including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
v with other work.
i turning vanes for all changes in duct direction in supply
duct dampers with locking quadrants for all branches and
16.6 Provide flexible connections at all duct connections to vibrating equipment. These
connections shall be installed in close proximity to such equipment where shown on the
Mechanical Drawings.
16.7 Remodel Stores Only: Provide diffuser boxes of a 'Blind Box Type". Example (12x12x12)
for neck size which equals diffuser 12". All boxes are dictated by diffuser neck size, which
are shown on Mechanical Drawings. These boxes are designed to facilitate flex entry
from either of the four sides or at the top depending on ductwork layout.
F
17.1 Test and rate registers, l grilles, and diffusers in accordance with ADC equipment test
Code 1662, provide certified ratings seal on each unit. Construct and install air outlets
and inlets in Accordance 1with NFPA 90A, and 90B.
17.2 Ceiling Air Diffusers,
provide ceiling air dit
capacity and type it
balancing dampers.
17.3 Ceiling Compatibility: I
that are compatible with
i and . Return Registers: Except as otherwise indicated,
supply and return registers where shown, of size, shape,
. All diffusers and registers shall have opposed blade
diffusers, supply and return registers with border styles
it construction.
17.4 Types: Provide aluminum ceiling diffusers, supply and return registers of type, capacity,
and with accessories and finishes as scheduled on the Drawings. All devices shall be
aluminum, except where required to be steel for installation in fire rated partition.
17.5 Finishes: Semi -gloss white enamel prime finish.
1
17.6 All air outlets and inlets shall be as scheduled on Mechanical Drawings.
15-29
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
17.7 Outdoor Air Dampers and Hoods: Remodel Stores Only: Provide specified OA dampers
and hoods when used in combination with split systems. Use only Lennox #35G24
unless specified otherwise on Mechanical Drawings. Remove the aluminum screen from
hood and insert a wire mesh screen with screws and #40, 30% efficient pleated air filter
to filter the outdoor air.
15003-18 EXHAUST FAN
18.1 Fan casing shall be acoustically. insulated galvanized steel with backdraft damper and
bottom access panel.
18.2 Steel, direct drive, centrifugal fan shall bear AMCA seal and UL label.
18.3 Provide variable speed switch mounted on fan housing.
18.4 Fans shall be as scheduled on Mechanical Drawings.
18.5 In -Line Cabinet Exhaust Fans shall be: Penn Ventilator Company, Greenheck, or Loren
Cook Co.
18.6 All exhaust outlets shall be provided with standard bird screen.
18.7 All exhaust fan wall caps shall be constructed of galvanized steel unless specified
otherwise.
18.8 Provide separate electrical disconnect switch.
15003-19 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
19.1 All indoor HVAC equipment should be supported by three sections of "shallow unistrut"
material suspended by six 3/8" all thread rods. Two supports should be under the
heating unit, evenly distributed for weight. Proper clearance for service of unit shall be
maintained at all times. A single support should be located under the split remote coil,
also leaving the proper clearance of piping and servicing. When installing a heat pump
system, only two supports are necessary if blower and coil sections are integral.
19.2 New Stores Only and Remodel Stores Requiring Roof Work: Provide prefabricated
equipment supports for all rooftop HVAC equipment. Prefabricated equipment supports
shall be 18 Ga. galvanized steel, utilized construction with integral base plate, continuous
welded corner seams, pressure treated wood nailer, counter flashing with lag screws.
Internally reinforced to conform to equipment load bearing factors. Prefabricated
equipment supports shall be a minimum height of 12".
19.3 Remodel Stores Only: If the scope of work for an existing structure does not include roof
work, then, at the discretion of the Architect and the Wawa Project Manager, provide a
double layer of 6 x 6 pressure treated lumber framing located on 1/2" thick rubber tread
pads between the lumber and the roofing and also between the lumber and the
equipment. This method of support may only be used for roof -mounted condensing
units and condensing units on grade.
15-30
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
20.1 Mechanical Contractor s�all hire a certified, independent, Air Balancing Contractor to
balance all of the HVAC system, as outlined below.
(A) Test and Balance ngineer's Qualifications: The Air Balancing Contractor and its
Employees associated with this project shall be certified by either the "AABC" or
?'NEBB", registered in the state where installed, and having at least three years of
successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on Projects with testing and
balancing requirements similar to those required for this Project:
(B) "AABC" or "NEBB° Certification Documentation shall be provided_ for all persons
associated with this project as part of the Air Balance Report.
(C) Certified Air Balance Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports
bearing the seal and signature of the test and balance agency. The reports shall be
certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in
accordance with the referenced standards, are an accurate representation of how
the systems have been installed, are a true representation of how the systems are
operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, and
Pre an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normaloperating
Values of the systems.
(D) The Air Balancing Report shall indicate and state the A/C unit components (controls,
O/A intake hoods, etc.) _are_ operational and were operational during the air
__- _ _ _ _
,balancing,
i
t€TVer"ff9pefatytie .GAtFGi.s ,stem spefa 9R-.
(F=)__Replase-all filters with ther30 peFGeare#;s:ear-pleated-fitter§-�„ ioeq _ oy l;e
�i
15-31
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
20.2 , Test,- Adjust, and Balance the following . mechanical -- systems:
(A) All measurements and adjustments shall be completed in accordance with "A_ ABC'
or "NEBB" standards.
(B)_ Supply and Return Air Systems: balance entire system and adjust fan speeds as
rpguinecl..
(C)Exhaust air systems; balance entire system and adjust fan speeds as, required,
Outside Air Measurement Methods:
,1. Outside Air Intake Hood.
.2. Supply Air and Return Air Traverse Differential Readings.
3. Summation of the return air devices subtracted from the summation of the supply
'air devices shall not be permitted as an acceptable method.
(E)_ _Verify temperature control system operation, including sensor calibration.
(F),__ Replace all air filters with 2"', 30 percent efficient pleated filters, prior, to system
balancing. Filters shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor.
(G)_ Jest smoke detectors. for proper oporation,and confirm shutdown _procedure,
(H) Contractor shall utilize ductwork branch dampers, for coarse, airflow adjustment and
'diffuser opposed blade dampers for fine airflow adiustment as applicable.
20.3 Codes and Standards.
(A)_NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing,, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental -S stems."
OR —
(B)_ AABC: "National Standards for Total System_ Balan.ce".
qf
15-32
September 23, 2015
SECTION 15003
HVAC
quantities FneasuFe
- - -- .
20.4 Systems Operation_ Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures.
Tcct�ndBnl'r,. a Enoinncr'a-n��rf���t'o;,s' !� Sertlfied Testing and Buia�siQ2RGj
a -Ag
20.5 Testing & Balancing shall take place no later than five (5) days afters stem start-up and
balancing report shall be submitted no later than ten (10) days later.
EQQ „prnnea„orel, Standards fsr Te�t;nQ, !ldjdsting, and Balansin of
Cnvirnnrr,ent -I Qvc teHgG u
6F
20.6 _Upon completion of HV C system balancing and with airflows within 10% of design
values, air balancer shall fasten main and branch ductwork quadrant damper handles to
the adjacent ductwork with a sheet metal screw thru the end of the damper handle.
- shall _ J. ---- - ----- -- - r -- - - - - -- .r-e-r- ,ti....-1 .--`t h ---- ---- ,
----t-f„-hi -
20.7 Air Balancer shall measure pressure inside and outside of building to establish that air
pressure is positive inside building.
T c•tinn Q. Balancinn shall to ke plane ne later than five (5) days a# 4 st ri d
20.8 Southern Island Express Case (C3): Airflow values in the immediate area surrounding the
Express Case shall be verified and adjusted to meet the following criteria;
(A) Air Measurement Locations:_ 4'-0" AFF, directly adjacent to the equipment, on all 4
- ,sides. - - - -
B Maicimum Air Flow: 75 CFM.
(C) Provide documentation of air flow measurements, identifying_ any measures taken to
reduce air flow from surrounding diffusers.
1
erlin w ent d„nfi.,nrL ith ., oheet r..etel ,• rethr, the .t f th ..1 h .Ji '-- - -rReas
w at the Seut
that it dees net
-- -
avneerl 7�= fm
I
15-33
September 23, 2015
I
SECTION 15003
HVAC
- - -._-_. __- __-_ _____-.--.-.---
15003-21 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) SYSTEMS
21.1 Provide electronic automatic temperature controls as indicated through sections "Control
Systems" and "Sequence of Operations", and as shown on the drawings
21.2 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary controls, operators, sensors,
relays, time clocks dampers, contactors, etc. for a complete and operational system.
ATC wiring shall be minimum 18 ga. central wiring.
21.3 All control wiring shall be plenum rated or installed in metallic conduit.
21.4 Upon completion of work, the entire ATC system shall be tested for proper operation.
21.5 Provide controls and interlocking wiring for the motor operated dampers, roof top units,
fans, etc., as indicated on the Drawings.
21.6 Provide factory mounted photoelectric type smoke detectors for supply and return air
duetwe* for each unit. Interlock smoke detectors with respective fan motors in A/C units
for shutdown. Smoke detector reset key pads, mounted on Manager's Area wall, shall be
labeled in accordance with the area served and air conveyed; e.g. "RETAIL S/A", "FOOD
SERVICE S/A", etc. Smoke detectors are to be properly cleaned and calibrated before
store is turned over to Wawa. Wawa's alarm company will wire from each smoke
detector to alarm panel.
21.7 Label all control devices with device designation, area served, and temperature settings
for heating and cooling.
21.8 Submit Shop Drawings of each system including schematic diagrams showing all devices
and equipment. Submittals shall be provided for all thermostats and controls. Indicate
factory and field wiring. Indicate control panels with internal and external wiring clearly
shown. Include written sequence of operation. Include Shop Drawings in each
Maintenance Manual.
21.9 Temperature control for the spaces shall be controlled by the BAS system.
21.10 Contractor shall verify the calibration of the wall mounted remote space temperature
sensors. For conditions where the calibration varies in excess of +/- 1 OF, Contractor shall
adjust the sensor offset at the thermostat.
15003-22 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
22.1 The A/C unit fan shall operate continuously. The unit shall switch between cooling and
heating functions as required to maintain the desired space conditions.
15-34
September 23, 2015
22.2 The unit shall be controll
sensor as indicated on 1
compressors as directe
temperature settings.
22.3 All exhaust fans shall
SECTION 15003
HVAC
through the space _ _ ____ _ _ _ __ temperature
Drawings. The unit shall operate, cycle, load and unload
by its built-in controls, to maintain the desired space
continuously unless specified otherwise on the Drawings.
22.5 All air conditioning unit thermostat settings shall be set by BAS for cooling and for heating
unless specified otherwise on the Drawings.
23.1 The Contractor shall provide, to the Wawa Project Manager, a set of As -Built documents
and Drawings indicating the complete and accurate installation of the systems, as they
were completed for the project.
23.2 The HVAC Engineer willlvisit the site and perform thfee two (3 2) site visit Punch List
inspections to determine he quality of the installations. If a feeFth third or f+#t# fourth site
visit is required due to ithe Contractor's inability to complete all installations per the
Drawings and specifications and the Punch List inspections, the costs for those additional
visits will be the responsibility of that Contractor and will be deducted from the
Contractor's Final Payment, by Wawa.
23.3 The Mechanical Contractor shall be on site during all inspections by HVAC Engineer and
Wawa Project Manager and provide a ladder to gain access to the roof.
END SECTION 15003
I
15-35
September 23, 2015
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL
16001-01 SCOPE
01.1 Electrical Contractor is responsible for all building wiring. Electrical Contractor to furnish
all materials, labor, and supervision to store, handle, and install equipment and systems
as shown on Drawings and described in Specifications.
01.2 The Electrical Contractor shall apply in writing for any information required as part of this
scope of Work prior to actual needing of this information for execution of Work. No
changes of equipment locations, conduit routings, material types or quantities, or details
of mounting shall be permitted unless approved in writing by the Architect. Samples and
literature of materials shall be provided upon request by Architect, Engineer or Wawa
Project Manager.
01.3 Existing system shall be inspected prior to bidding. Recommendations to be submitted to
Wawa Project Manager prior to commencing work.
01.4 Any notes and/or specifications on the Electrical Drawings shall be considered as part of
this specification.
01.5 Any changes and/or modifications must be reviewed and approved by the Architect or
Engineer and Wawa's Project Manager prior to construction.
01.6 Remove all trash, debris and demolition material from premises at the end of each work
day.
01.7 Schedule all work, cutting and building service interruptions with building owner and
construction manager prior to commencing work.
01.8 Contractor shall provide all hangers, supports, fittings, connectors, auxiliary steel,
threaded rods, and any other miscellaneous materials required for complete installation
of the electrical system.
01.9 The Electrical Contracto shall coordinate the electrical characteristics of all mechanical
and refrigeration equipment with the Mechanical and Refrigeration Contractors.
16001-02 COORDINATION
02.1 The Electrical Contracto r shall verify that certain refrigeration and storage equipment will
be supplied prewired. IThe Equipment Contractor is responsible for installing circuit
feeder to Junction Box at that equipment.
02.2 Water Heaters shall be supplied and installed by Plumbing Contractor. Wiring of same
shall be by Electrical Contractor. Coordinate all Work.
02.3 All Electrical Work shall be coordinated with Wawa's Representative and latest copies of
Architectural, Mechanical, Structural, and Electrical Drawings. All locations, dimensions
and conditions shall be checked to verify roughing in locations and final connection
locations prior to commencing work.
02.4 Electrical Contractor shall notify the representative of any utility, code or site conditions
that dictate altering the service as specified on the Electrical Drawings.
02.5 Materials furnished by others shall be installed complete.
�,— 02.6 Electrical Contractor is responsible for wiring the Ice Maker, Rethermalizer, and Hot Food
Table. Electrical Contractor is not responsible for wiring Coffee Brewers.
16001-1
September 9, 2015
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL
02.7 Electrical Contractor is responsible for wiring from MDP to roof mounted refrigeration
equipment. For individual pieces of refrigeration equipment, the Electrical Contractor shall
provide the wiring from the electrical panels to the equipment, coordinate exact location
with Refrigeration Contractor. Leave 15' of extra coiled wiring. The Refrigeration
Contractor is responsible for final termination. Electrical Contractor to coordinate circuit
breaker sizes with Refrigeration Contractor. Control wiring from the roof mounted
equipment to the individual pieces of refrigeration equipment shall be provided by the
Refrigeration Contractor.
02.8 Electrical Contractor is responsible for wiring from MDP to roof mounted HVAC Units.
HVAC Contractor is responsible for wiring from roof mounted equipment to any HVAC
equipment within store. Electrical Contractor to coordinate circuit breaker size with
HVAC Contractor
16001-03 REGULATIONS, PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES
03.1 All Electrical Work shall conform to local codes and regulations. All work shall be in
accordance with the latest adopted edition of the National Electrical Code, NFPA-70.
03.2 The Electrical Contractor shall obtain at his expense all necessary permits and
certificates as required.
03.3 The Electrical Contractor shall have all installations inspected at completion of work by
Middle Department or other recognized inspection agency at his expense. Certificate of
Inspection shall be transferred to Wawa.
16001-04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
04.1 Cutting and patching of all general building components shall be performed by the
Contractor, utilizing workmen skilled in the particular trades involved, unless otherwise
agreed upon with the General Contractor.
04.2 Coordinate and schedule with the Wawa Project Manager and General Contractor the
cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical
equipment and materials.
04.3 Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting
and patching.
04.4 Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result
of mechanical and electrical installations.
04.5 No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is
necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non -conforming installations.
04.6 Perform cutting, fitting and patching of mechanical and electrical equipment and materials
required or indicated.
04.7 Effectively protect all materials and equipment from dust, dirt and damage until final
acceptance. Close all conduit and equipment openings during construction with suitable
protective covering for equipment and materials before, during and following installation.
Provide new materials and equipment to replace similar items damaged by Electrical
Contractor without additional cost to Wawa.
04.8 Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or
scheduled to be removed.
16001-2
September 9, 2015
16001-05 GUARANTEE
05.1 The Electrical Contractor
a period of one year frog
this period shall be cc
replacement of lamps sha
16001-06 TESTING
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL
shall guarantee all material and labor to be free from defects for
i the time of Wawa acceptance. Any defects occurring during
rrected by the Electrical Contractor. Normal usage and
II not be included in this guarantee.
06.1 All installations shall be Itested at completion of work to be free of grounds and short
circuit conditions. All interlock circuits shall be tested to verify correct operation of each
device. All rotating equipment shall be energized to verify correct rotation.
7 AS-BUILTS, INSTRUCTION MANUALS. & SUBMITTALS
07.1 During construction, the Electrical Contractor will maintain a record set of installation
prints. He will record on these prints all deviations from the contract Drawings in sizes,
locations and details. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall deliver these
prints to the Wawa Project Manager.
07.2 Shop Drawings: Electrical Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of Shop Drawings, of all
equipment. Electronic copies of the submittals shall be accepted. All submittals shall be
properly organized, clean' i copies, with model numbers clearly identified.
07.3 Maintenance Manuals: Mechanical Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of operating
and maintenance manuals, neatly presented in a 3-ring binder. Information shall be
provided for all equipment and devices, including wiring and control diagrams, cut sheets,
sequence of operations, warranty, etc.
07.4 Contractor shall be responsible for checking of proposed equipment prior to submitting to
Architect and Engineer. he result of any re -designing caused by a substitution or lack of
coordination shall be borne by the Contractor. All substitutions or deviations from the
specified equipment shall be highlighted in the submittals as indicated as such.
07.5 New Stores Only: Engineer shall review a limit of two (2) submittals per equipment or
device. Costs to Engineer for review of additional submittals shall be borne by the
Contractor. If equipment is installed that is not approved, the Contractor shall bear all
costs related to replace said equipment.
07.6 Remodel Stores Only: No substitution of material or equipment specified will be allowed
where new equipment is an extension or modification of an existing system, in which
case it shall be the same as existing manufacturer.
08.1 The Electrical Contractor shall submit service and meter applications for this site to
include the connected loads of each panel, see Electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall
insure that all panels and circuit breakers be sized of adequate interrupting capacity to
coordinate with short circuit availability from incoming electrical service. All panels shall
be fully rated.
08.2 The electrical service is ultimately sized for incorporation of general and electrical
heating/ air conditioning. Individual equipment loads must be determined and verified
prior to sizing of actual service. Service conductors shall be sized for a maximum voltage
drop of 2%.
16001-3
September 9, 2015
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL
08.3 Provide exterior weather proof CT Cabinet and meters at location of transformer, where
and when permitted by local code, utility company, and authorities. Grounding of CT
cabinet to building electrical system shall be provided unless CT cabinet is grounded by
electrical utility at transformer. See electrical plans.
16001-09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
09.1 All materials shall be new and bear the label or listing of a nationally recognized
independent testing laboratory.
09.2 The Electrical Contractor shall verify quantities prior to ordering materials. All Lighting
fixtures and lamps to be provided by Wawa. Electrical Contractor shall install lighting
fixtures and lamps furnished by Wawa.
09.3 Wiring shall be copper conductor, minimum size #12 awg, 600 volt insulation.
Conductors #8 awg and larger shall be copper, 75 degrees C insulation. No aluminum
permitted.
09.4 Security Buzzer/Pushbutton (BY OTHERS) — provide system to signal from Checkout
Counter and from Food Service Counters to Associates Area, Manager's Area, Walk -In
Refrigerator, Trash Room and any isolated areas. Provide ash RGeM delivery door bell
to Backroom, Manager's Area and Food Service Area. Key Release — Provide system to
signal from vendor delivery door to check out counter and office. Release at check out
and office.
09.5 Provided by Others: Key Release — Provide system to signal from vendor delivery door
to Check-out Counter and Manager's Area. Release at Check-out and Manager's Area.
09.6 Provide for 3rd Shift Buzzer System (BY OTHERS). Locate contactors at exterior
vestibule or entry doors. Switch at Manager's Area to be located "away" from doors.
Consisting of:
(A) Two (2) normally open door contacts (Edwards #1062)
(B) Three (3) Piezo Chimes (Food Service, Backroom, W.I.B.)
(C) Magnetic switch spacers
(D) Hallow wall box for switch
(E) Switch (labeled & to be at Manager's Area)
(F) 18 Gauge, 2 conductor bell wire
(G) 1 9v. Battery Eliminator
09.7 All Equipment shall be provided with a separate grounding conductor.
09.8 No shared neutral between circuits shall be permitted.
09.9 All panelboards to be General Electric Company type AQ with copper bus bars and fully
rated for 22 KAIC SC with "BOLT ON" circuit breakers. Provide type written panel
schedules within all electrical panels to label all circuits.
Remodel Stores: "BOLT ON" breakers shall be provided for all stores where the existing
16001-4
September 9, 2015
panels have been pro,
be provided for stores
breakers.
(A) Main distribution
panelboard type
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL
with "BOLT ON" breakers. "PUSH ON" breakers shall only
e the existing panels have been provided with "PUSH ON"
el (MDP) shall be General Electric Company Spectra Series
, fully rated for 42 KAIC SC unless otherwise noted.
(B) Main distribution pianel (MDP) main circuit breaker shall be General Electric
Company digital Solid State Spectra RMS type SKHA 12 for 1200A electrical
services and SKHH8 (100% U.L. rated) for 800A electrical services.
(C) Main distribution panel (MDP) feeder circuit breakers rated at less than 100 ampere
trip shall be General Electric Company digital, Solid State Spectra RMS type SEHA.
(D) Main distribution panel (MDP) feeder circuit breakers rated at 100 ampere or greater
trip shall be General, Electric Company digital, Solid State Spectra RMS type SFHA.
(E) Main distribution panel (MDP) feeder circuit breakers for HVAC equipment or
refrigeration equipment shall be U.L. listed as HACR type.
09.10 All outlet, junction and switch boxes to be pressed steel. No plastic boxes.
09.11 In Food Service Area, Food Prep, and Food Serving including drink serving areas the
receptacles are to be White and the cover plates are to be stainless steel. In all other
areas the receptacles (except isolated ground receptacles), switches, and stainless steel
painted cover plates are to be Almond, matching the color of the FRP. See Electrical
Drawings for proper color of isolated ground receptacles. Plastic cover plates are not
acceptable, including Backroom.
09.12 Floor Receptacles to be Hubbell #13-2527 formed steel round dual level box, deep, with
S-3925 Terrazzo brass round cover.
09.13 All duplex receptacles to be 20 AMP type. Receptacles adjacent to any sinks, and all
Food Service to be G.F.I!. type.
09.14 Telephone jacks to be "wall hung" type.
09.15 Underslab conduits shall! be a minimum %" PVC or galvanized rigid steel conduit with 90
degree galvanized steel elbows at each end.
09.16 Outdoor receptacles shall be either Ground Fault Interrupt type or protected by Ground
Fault Interrupt Breakers.
09.17 Exterior waterproof duplex receptacles to have Intermatic metal weatherproof covers.
Coordinate with Wawa Project Manager.
09.18 Electrical Contractor to wire Post Mix Condensing Unit. (Soda Condenser). Also, wire
between Split System HVAC units where required.
1
09.19 All Power -Pole to be ' Wiremold, #SMDTP-4, including 2 grounding type duplex
receptacles, 20A/125V, color white or Ivory.
I
09.20 Contractor is responsible for underground conduits and wiring from the panel box area to
pole signs, directional signs and site lighting. This includes the conduit from the price
changers in the managers office to the price signs. Contractor is also responsible for
obtaining electrical permit for this work.
I
�- 09.21 Provide In -Use Weatherproof covers at trash compactor receptacle. Carlon Electric
16001-5
September 9, 2015
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL
Products part # E9UVC. Clear cover, base color gray.
09.22 Provide one -hour timed switch (Intermatic #FF60M) within weatherproof enclosure for
operation of Roof Pocket lighting fixtures.
09.23 Provide labeling on receptacle in accordance with the detail on the drawings.
09.24 Interior Vestibule receptacle should be Ground Fault Interrupt type with weatherproof
cover.
09.25 Provide seal -off fittings for close turn radius with minimum vertical height. Basis of
Design: Appleton EYS type.
16001-10 TELEPHONE
10.1 The Electrical Contractor shall rough -in conduits for incoming service and Individual
telephone outlets as required to meet Wawa and Telephone Company requirements.
Verify locations prior to installing conduits.
10.2 Phone jack at Manager's desk to be RJ41-S set at 34" above finished floor.
10.3 Telephone Company to provide a 50 pair cable with interface on interior back wall.
10.4 Electrical Contractor shall run conduit complete with pull strings for all telephones
including as shown in the Drawings. Wawa will provide telephones for installation by
Wawa's Contractor. Verify locations prior to installation. Wawa's communication
company will pull and install all wiring.
16001-11 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
11.1 All Panels shall be adequately identified with permanent laminated plastic tags. Wiring
shall be identified as to phasing and conductor identification. All panels shall be
balanced as evenly as possible across phases. All panels shall have permanent
Directories. Other electrical devices such as receptacles shall be identified using plastic
labels to indicate intended function or panel and circuit number as directed by the Wawa
Project Manager. Devices to be labeled shall include but not be limited to : V shift chime
control switch, Building Master lighting control switch, switches which are used to open
delivery door, and the Price Changer receptacle located in the Manager's Area. All
markings shall be made to provide clear and distinct legible type.
11.2 All openings shall be sealed upon completion of installation to prevent spread of smoke
and fire through openings. All openings shall be coordinated with other crafts to prevent
interference and obstruction.
11.3 Electrical conduits and plumbing pipes are to be kept as high as possible above the floor
to provide adequate space for cleaning. Piping, conduit, and similar construction, located
outside a wall, must be installed so that there is a minimum of 3/4" space between it and
the wall.
11.4 U.L. approved sealing material should be installed in both ends of all conduits traversing
between gasoline dispensing islands and the Electrical Room located within the building
in accordance with NEC article 501-5.
11.5 All spare/unused/empty conduits traversing between gasoline dispensing islands and the
Electrical Room located within the building, should be sealed using duct seal, and conduit
caps or plugs as appropriate for the configuration of the installation in accordance with
NEC article 504-70. —
16001-6
September 9, 2015
11.6
11.7
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL
Provide a minimum of 30lfoot candles of lighting in all food preparation, serving, and food
storage areas. Lights to be shielded against shattering over exposed food and utensils.
For underground conduits with seal -off fittings entering the electrical panels enclosure
keep the vertical height of the stub -up to a minimum.
12.1 Alarms will be provided and installed by Wawa under a separate contract and are not part
of this Electrical Work. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the General
Contractor the installation of the Alarm System during construction to avoid surface wiring
and to conceal alarm wirng.
12.2 If flow and tamper switches are required for sprinkler system, the Alarm Co. will be
responsible for wiring them to the Alarm System, but Plumbing Contractor to provide the
switches.
3 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
13.1 The Contractor shall prof ide and remove at the conclusion of the project, all temporary
Power and Lighting. The main-servicefor temporary power shall be 200 amp. 208 volt, 3
phase, unless otherwise given by the Wawa Project Manager. Verify with the Wawa
Project Manager prior to bidding, the specific requirements for the distribution of
temporary power and lighting to the building, the site, the construction trailer and any
other equipment. 'Install all temporary_ power and lighting per the latest adopted version of
the NEC and other local codes.
13.2 Provide Temporary Power for Refrigerated Trailer(s) as required. Verify with the Wawa
Project Manager prior to bidding which type or types are required. Provide the following:
Refrigerated and Freezer Refrigeration Unit
Specifications: 208 - 2401volt, 3 Phase, 10 Horsepower, 50 Running Amps
Electrical Power Line: M;nimum voltage, 208 Volts to a maximum of 240 Volts, 3 Phase,
using a separate 60 Amp circuit breaker protected power line.
13.3 Local Electrical Code Will Dictate the Size of the Power Line Required. Normally a
number 6 Gauge, 5 wire power line is adequate when the distance from the building
electrical distribution pa ,' el to the electrical connection box located on the front of the
trailer / container is less than 100 feet. Distances greater than 100 ft. Will require a
number 4 gauge, 5 wire power line. When calculating power line distance, remember to
take trailer length into consideration.
i
5 wire system: 3 = power legs, 1 = neutral, 1 = equipment ground
For One Temperature Trailer - Either Refrigerated or Freezer
I
Refrigeration Unit Specifications: 208 - 240 volt, 3 Phase, 10 Horsepower,
40 Running Amps
Electrical Power Line: Minimum voltage, 208 Volts to a maximum of 240 Volts, 3 Phase,
using a separate 50 Amp circuit breaker protected power line.
13.4 Local Electrical Code Will Dictate the Size of the Power Line Required. Normally a
number 8 Gauge, 4 wire power line is adequate when the distance from the building
16001-7
September 9, 2015
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL
electrical distribution panel to the electrical connection box located on the front of the
trailer / container is less than 100 feet. Distances greater than 100 ft. Will require a
number 6 gauge, 4 wire power line. When calculating power line distance, remember to
take trailer length into consideration.
4 wire system: 3 = power legs, 1 = equipment ground
16001-14 ATM (Automatic Teller Machine)
14.1 Provide one 10 AMP, 120V, duplex receptacle, and one 10 AMP, 120V, duplex isolated
ground receptacle in quad box, 48" above floor. Provide "lock out" on circuit breaker and
label "ATM".
14.2 For telecommunications, provide 1" O.D. flex conduit located away from electrical power
sources or ceiling lights.
14.3 Provide and install conduit and pull string from Electrical Room to ATM for a 2 pair 24
awg bell round cable with the color code of red, green, yellow and black. At both ends of
the bell cable, provide about 20 feet of slack and label both ends of the cable "ATM".
Cable must be pulled to telecommunication (termination jacks) in Backroom from the
ATM location. Slack can be left in ceiling until Phone Company completes their
installation.
16001-15 POWER WASH (HOTSY UNIT)
15.1 Provide 30 amp breakers for this unit. -
16001-16 EMERGENCY LIGHTS AND EXIT SIGNS
16.1 Finish color of all units "white". Fixtures to be provided by Wawa.
16.2 Electrical Contractor responsible for installation and wiring.
16001-17 WALK-IN REF AND FREEZER CONDUITS
17.1.1 Run all conduits for the light fixtures above the box.
16001-18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
18.1 The Contractor shall provide, to the Wawa Project Manager, a set of As -Built documents
and Drawings indicating the complete and accurate installation of the systems, as they
were completed for the project.
18.2 The Engineer will visit the site and perform 3 (three) site visit Punch List inspections to
determine the quality of the installations. If a fourth or fifth site visit is required due to the
Contractor's inability to complete all installations per the plans and specifications and the
Punch List inspections, the costs of those additional visits will be the responsibility of that
Contractor and will be deducted from the Contractor's Final Payment, by Wawa.
END SECTION 16001
16001-8
September 9, 2015
16500-01 LIGHTING
FIXTURE TYPE''AL11
Mounting:
Housing:
Reflector / Lens:
Trim / Finish:
Lamp:
Control'Gear:
Volts:
Manufacturer:
Catalog #:
Location:
FIXTURE TYPE'DL1'
Mounting:
Housing:
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
12' Linear Wet Location Surface Mounted Adjustable High Output
#Rea# LED. -
Surface - Ceiling
LOW copper content extruded aluminum housing with stainless steel
hardware _ __. _. _ - --.__ _ _----.___-- _
Clear tempered glass lens
Smooth_ White
5 Im, > 78CRI / 4000K, Max Wattage 96
Integral Power Supply
120
Lun
LOG-HCi-120-12-40K-30X60-WAM6-SI-NO
Self -Serve Walk-in Beer Cooler Beer Cave
6" Apert re WetRecessed LED Downlight
ecessed in �wal Gypsum Board and Acoustic Ceiling Tile -
Coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type.
Steel ,
Reflector/Lens: Satin -dear Parabolic Spun Alzak Aluminum Self Flanged 'R
Cone - __�_.
Trim / Finish: Safin Clear Ftnish
_-------..'--^-
Lamp: 1700 Im, > 90CRI'/ 3500K. ' 0 ✓afts.
- - -- - ------ --- _. -- - -------------- - -- --- --- - - -
Control Gear: Integral Power Supply €lestrenis-newer SUPpl��Per oir-nFnab4e
Volts: 120
Manufacturer: Cree
Catalog #: Reflector: KR6T-SSGC-FF / Housing_ KR6-20L-35K-120
Location: Entry Vestibules, Restrooms
16500-1
January 1, 2017
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
FIXTURE TYPE 'DL2' 4`' Aperture Recessed Adjustable LED Downlight.
Mounting: Recessed into Arched_ Bulkhead extepie gs - Aim S_ traight
Down - Coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type.
Housing: €asated-e# 20 ga. T . ;~ Galvanized Steel Housing
and Extruded Aluminum Heat Sink
Reflector/Lens: Die Cast Aluminum Reflector wi## and Solite Lens
Trim / Finish: White g
Lamp: 1250 Irn; > 86CRI 13566k,-16w LED Array;Light
€Rgine 3600K LED-889 Ka ' mf^ mrAp At 70 1 ,,mpn
Control Gear: Integral Power Supply ;ver Di"m_ ^b'^ ^�'^^�'-^and
Sheri. Sire it—PFotestedand -T#er ;ly Regb!!@ied�Tevent
Volts: 120
Manufacturer: USA ILLUMINATIONS
Catalog #: 3231-W-81-8-16-LRTA4-8416-C3-36kg-26-NC-120V
Location: Arched Entry
FIXTURE TYPE 'DL3'
Mounting:
Housing:
Reflector/Lens:
Trim / Finish:
Lamp:
Control Gear:
Volts:
Manufacturer:
4" Aperture Recessed LED Downlight
Recessed into Gypsum Board eiln - coordinate mounting
requirements with ceiling type.
a4tu Aiic� Steel Mqt: ^ g CF^me ^^a Rr;;rk^tc; Woth ni,...,O.,"M ue^+
S�IF
Sai+a-Gleaf Parabolic Spun Alzak Aluminum RefleGte Selfa Flanged
;Cone
Satin- Clear Finish
--- - -- - - - ----------------
Integral-
Power Supply €tes* weF Sp iver lei
120
CREE
16500-2
January 1, 2017
Catalog #:
Location:
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Reflecto :-KR4T-SSGC-FF /Housing: KR4-20L-35K-120V
Women's and Men's restrooms over the lavatory.
t Location keceiiedl LED Downli ht with Goof Rin
iverhangGag_ structure —coordinate mounting
Steel -and 13FaGkets with Aluminum.- H
eflector/Lens:atin_ -a.F Parabolic Spun_Alzak Aluminum €�eflester Self. Flanged
Cone - --
rim / Finish: Satin Clear finish-P@#
I iciu ivwuuic,
iLumen 100 000 Hour Lifetir
_ arranty,, 9:1 6G�
Integral Power Supply. Elet
Overlo d nd Short Circuit
revent Overheating.. Sound
watts, > 85CRI (3500K LED, 1
at 80% Lumen Maintenance, 10
ronic Power Supply/Driver — Dimmat
Protected and Thermally Regulated
Rating A. 100,000 hour rated life,10 Y
i olts: 120
anufacturer: Cree
Catalog #: Reflectors KR6T-SSGC-FF / Housing_ KR6-20L-35K-120V-GR8. (8"
Adapter Ring)
, .vaaiwn:
:xtenor uvernang, txtenor 5eatinq
FIXTURE TYPE 'ELV
Wet Location String of LED Modules with Remote Power Supply
- - ---
Mounting:
Surface IVlounted with Screws Behind Exterior Fascia.
Housing:
-- r --widish ------- -----*----- ---- Rao-6-6po Cnnv.;
ABS. body flied -with_ epoxy resin IP65 Rated.
Reflector/Lens:
140 Degree Wide BeamWhite hite P!astiG RefleeteF and GleaF Lens
Trim / Finish:
White
Lamp:
------- ----�----------- - - ---------- ----- --- ----------------
0.5w / Module LED, 38 Im, 85 CRI, 3500K, 1.5 Watts per foot. White
,_ __
- - --- -- - -- — -- - -- -- - - - -
Control Gear:
#et r RN ,
Electronic � Remote Power Supply provides constant voltage output to
provide consistent light output of LED fixtures
Volts:
12%120
16500-3
January 1, 2017
I
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Manufacturer: GVA LIGHTING / QTRAN (Alt: SEMPER FI POWER SUPPLIES)
Catalog #: Approx. (9) (8) Bags of 49 32 Module Strings of IP-SF-33500K aAAAF €
with (4) LED40W-12 �2) „utdoe 'power
supplies (one -power supply per side).
Location: Tower Soffit
Remarks: GC is responsible for voltage drop calculations and final lengths.
Provide feeds and- mounting hardware as required. Confirm power
supply locations with architect.
FIXTURE TYPE 'EL2' Wet Location LED Asymmetric Wall Grazer with Remote in_9g9I Power
Supply - — - --
Mounting: Surface Mounted with Adjustable Arm.
Housing: Anodized Aluminum, Fastener Free . _ _ _ . _fpri fnr _ __. I
Reflector/Lens: Clear Tempered Flat Glass, Fastener Free, Flush Mounted Glass and
End Caps Matching Extrusion Shape for Guarantee Water Run-off.
Trim / Finish: Clear Matte Aluminum
Lam 6 '1VV" o 600 Im,.83CR1, 35001<,.7.5w per FT
Control Gear: Remote 1n,t Power Supply, 5 year warranty. Locate Power Supply
Inside Store:
Volts: 24/120
Manufacturer: GVA LIGHTING
Catalog #: STRb-add-CM-l.5W-3500K-10x60-ELV-A-154
Location: On Top of Building Overhangs
Remarks: Alf fixtures to be installed facing straight up and then- a__im_ed 5. degrees
towards the building_ GVA-CLG-100-24 as needed.
FIXTURE TYPE 'ELT Wet Location LED asymmetric floodwith remote power supply
---- ----------------------- -
Mou-ntin , - - Surface Mounted with adjustable arm,
Housing; .. _ :. _ - _ An Aluminum; Fastener Free
Reflector_/Len_s:_ -_ Clear Tem ered F I -a' f, Glass, Fastener Free, FI'us-h Mounted Glass and
End Caps Matching Extrusion Shape for -Guarantee Water Run-off.
Trim / Finish: Clear Matte Aluminum
Lamp: _ - - _ - 600 Im,.83CRI / 350 7,5w per FT
----- — - ---- - -----------------------,--------- ------ - - - - - - -----
ControCGear Remote Power Supply-,_5yearwarranty. Locate Power Supply Inside
16500-4
January 1, 2017
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Store.
Volts: - _ . _ ._...
_ - _-- 24/120
Manufacturer:
GVA LIGHTING
Catalog #
STR9-300-CM-7.5W-3500K-30X60-ELV-A154
Location:--
On Top
o_f Building pyprhangs
Remarks:
All fxtures
towards
to be installed facing straight up and then aimed 15 degrees
the- building_GVA-CLG-100-24 as needed.
FIXTURE TYPE 'FD' Wet Location
LED Gas Canopy Mounted LED Area Light
Mounting: Direct Mount
Housing: Aluminum
Reflector/Lens: Acrylic Lens
Trim / Finish: White wish
Lamp: 60 LED
Control Gear: Integral
10 year warranty on finish
6000k 11,828 Lumens, 5 year warranty
river, Power Factor >90% and THD 20% at full load, 5 year
warranty
Volts: 120
Manufacturer: BETA LED
Catalog #: PKG 301 PS DM 06 D UL WH 700 (Reference Beta's Site Lighting
Specifications for accessories)
Location: See Site Plan provided by Beta for more information
�sed LED Troffer + Aeeest+sa le
Acoustical Tile Ceilin Gri
Housing:
Cold Rolled Steef
Reflector 7 Lens:
Frosted White Gleaf A. c y
t1rrim / Finish:
i
White
i
)Lamp:
37 w LED Array, 3338 Im, > 83 80,CRI / 3500
IControl Gear:
I
Driver: lnteg_r_al_Electronic
I
Volts:
120
Manufacturer:
FINELITE
16500-5
January 1, 2017
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Catalog #: H0R-LED-A2X2-DCO-S-835-120-SC.C1
ocation: Customer Area
IXTURE TYPE 'GL3' 2' X 4' Recessed LED Troffer ^ ^^, -c+'^ Tile
Mounting: Recessed in Acoustical Tile Ceiling Gnct and Gypsum Board
Housing: -- Cold Rolled Steel
Reflector /Lens: €fasted #12 Pattern Prismatic c li Lena
Vim,/ Finish: White
- - ---- - -- -
am : 35 48 w LED Array, 3800 - . Im, > 85CRI
Control _Gear: Integral Power Supply
Volts: _ 120,
anufacturer: METALUX Duii -ire n YR—RIT
Catalog #: 24GR-LD4-38-F1-UNV-L835-CD-1
2'x4' Drywall Frame Kit, DF-24-W, at gypsum board ceiling locations.
2T-G 431 Qnn n cc n��_i inni
Location:- _ _ Offices, Stockroom, Back of House
FIXTURE TYPE 'GL5' LED Surface Mount with Acrylic Lens
Mounting: Surface Mounted. _af Gypsum Board Ceiling
ousin Stee
eflector / Lens: -, Froste „aar►t2 Ac lic
rim l Finish: 1Nht
am 44 w LED Array, 4000 Im, 100,000 Hour Lifetime at 80% Lume
aintenance, 10 ear Warrant , 90+ CRI CCT, 3500 +
Control Gear: Integral Power-Suppl
Volts: 12Q
,Manufacturer: Cree
, atalog #`. LS4-40L-35K-1;QU
;Location:
Stockroom, Back of House,
16500-6
January 1, 2017
FIXTURE TYPE HU
Mounting:
Housing:
Reflector / Lens:
Trim / Finish:
Lamp:
Control Gear:
Volts:
Manufacturer:
Catalog #:
Location:
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Surface)Mount LLD Vaportight with,Die Cast Guard `a^^r
Surface Mounted to Gypsum Board Ceiling _or Stainless Steel
Pie -cast Aluminum Nominal Dimension: 11.25" Length x_6" Diameter
Heavy Frosted White Glass, Globe with Aluminum Guard
2M ED Array, 1.735 Lurneris _,�^ 4000K, 82CRI
120
VXLED261VDG -
-
FIXTURE TYPE `LL1' - 4"x 4' Recessed Linear LED Wallwasher �••'+" "^^•"^' �^^
ountin :<
Recessed
in acoustic tile ceiling
Housing:
Clear A
Steel
licam. ...
ryCst. -.+ ...hi+o .,...,.ai.. L,n^ ..,.,++o h G+•, .,.,....o....,..+
d
eflector/Lens:
-- -
-- - - - --- - - - - -
White
Trim/Finish:
. _ --
38 mattLED'arra 3Ob6 -Cu mens, >- -0-
0CR1-/ 3500K,
am
10 y-ears, 100.,000hrs L90
Inte ra Power Supply- driver, assessible f em below
Control Gear:
Volts: 120
I
Manufacturer: Finelite j
-4'-FR-V-9-35-120V-SC-C 1
)Location: Perimeter Wall Wash
16500-7
January 1, 2017
SECTION 16500
C__,IVTI I RE TVRC'P1'
LIGHTING
McGeFative ReRoap+ 14" high .. 4/1"-die with mprim, wn hoop seeke+ and
I E—D RAI7 lame -
f'tldrTiIFl�JFA
Ce'., All I..,i.,11.,,
/'`eneer me+el
/1\ f Cllnr..e4inn 1 CI, RAR4/\C 75 1WD IC
. ---
Re#lest;,r-r-6ens•
tam t0 ght
n el
WA WtA
120
R A C C I ITC
-..., 9 ST54/40za4",�T€M)
Ggffee Rer, Deli r. URte.
24" dia. Decorative�,,.,,.,-,+ Cllleroor en+ Pendant with
__.. _ _-.. -- ___
Mtaivivv�er:
Gataleg.*
I_e .,
FIXTURE TYPE'P2'
Fabric Shade
Mounting:
Pendant
Housing:
Steel €fame
Reflector / Lens:
White Acrylic
Trim / Finish:
Red Fabric
Lamp:
(3) 4 Watt GU24 CFL Twist Lock Socket 3500K
Control Gear: N/A
Volts:
120
Manufacturer:
Stonegate kin i- ir�uTW
Catalog #:
012874 24°`Gisfea:
Location:
Sales Floor
FIXTURE TYPE 'P3' 48" diadant l�++. Decorative Penwith _Fabric_Shade
CTTQpTCppI.T+TDTI�
nf
Mounting: Pendant
Housing: Steel
Reflector / Lens: V1/h'ite Acrylic
16500-8
January 1, 2017
Trim / Finish: Red Fa
Lamp: (3) 26 0
(4)_f_7F
Control Gear: N/A
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
c
t'd0z4_&L_Twist Lock Socket '350_0K
I.A.1.1=41D125-Sylvagla GFN1?DA35_eF eq
Volts: 120
Manufacturer: Stonegate
BID LIGHT-ING
Catalog #: 012874 48
G u- 's- 19- F n-
Location: Sales Floor
FIXTURE TYPE OLl'
5, bla-m6ter
- 0 e*n-da n- - t with __ -White - A- crylic-Diffus-er and -Scew_)n LED
Lamp.
Mounting:
Pendant
Aluminum
minurn
Reflector j Lens:
W - hite .- Acr
ylic
Trim /Finish:
White
Lamp:
Phi - lips 120V
A21 E26 1 . 8W 220OK-2700K D
Control dep-r-i
NA
volts:---
120
Manufacturer:
WAC'Lightin
g
RL-b-F4---4Lw_r__6N
Location:
Coffee
PIXTURETWIE "REL
Wet -60-catio'nItp
A ma Light
lulo"u-n-tin-gi
_Surface Mount on Para petWalls
- ousi.ng.:,.—
DieCastAl I urninurn
Lens:
Hea_v_17'ro-sIted- White_ --Glass G__1 o__b_ _ew_ -ith Au --- rn, i-nu-m- Guard
bof
--Natural-Aluminum
-27w.,- LED, 11735 _In 82 CRI, 4000K
Integral power supply
120
16500-9
January 1, 2017
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Manufacturer:_R A_B_
Catalog#: VXBRLED26NDG
'Location-,: Roof, Tower Interior, and' b e t a- dh_ e d fra-s h- Compound Interior
FIXTURE TYPE'SH' 4' U-n"ear Vapbrtig hilE6 with Acrylic -Lens
Mounting:
Surface mounted to ceiling
Housing:
One piece fiberglass reinforced polyester housing with closed cell
neoprene gasketing bonded to housing.
Lens:
(16--ar Acrylic lens
Trim:
White i44
Lamp:
Lpme'ns-. IV _3.500K, 80CRf 150,000 hrs rated life to L70, 4000
'14346
warra
hyear " n
Ballast:
Integral_ power supply
Voltage:
120
Manufacturer:
HILIPS
Catalog#:
P-W-A-E-43L-835-4-UNV-TB
Location:
Refrigerated Areas
FIXTURE TYPE'SLfl
4' Linear Wet Location LED Surface Mount
Mounting:
Surface — Clip mounting hardware
Housing:
'Eifwded Aluminum W'&-
Reflector / Lens:
'120 beDistribution-with grpe earn Frosted 0.125" DR Acrylic Lens
Trim / Finish:
Smooth 6tli Wh-itP-,
Mg.. -- -
Lamp:
Kom-fin-al 30_0_0__Im,(1) #.55 v?!.kEl?_ 49pfo, -4.000k,,-95-80CRI
Control Gear:
Integral power supply
Volts:
120
Manufacturer:
Catalog #:
%1RAPI-4-24-4) M%v
Location:
Self-service walk-in beer cooler
16500-10
January 1, 2017
FIXTURE TYPE 'WC1'
Mounting:
Housing:
Reflector / Lens:
Trim / Finish:
Lamp:
Control Gear:
Volts:
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
€eFleF Decorative LED_Wall Sconce
Surface -Wall Mounted
Extruded Aluminium Nominal Dimension: 5'/" Deep A- 9".Width x 20"
High. RAM-
White Powder Coated Reflector
Brushed Stainless Steel
23w LED, 3100 Im, 3000K, 85CRI -
Integral ower Supply
120
Manufacturer:
SCOTT ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING
Catalog #:
S9131-L(F3-30K-BS
C012� 7/'`7�C QC 4711\/
Location:
Entry Facade
FIXTURE TYPE V'
Wet location LED cutoff wall mounted area light with glare shields
Mounting:
Surface - Wall Mounted
Housing:
Aluminum
Reflector / Lens:
Clear Tetnpered Glass- with GlaFe Shield - a _d i LED's
Trim / Finish:
White with 10 year warranty on finish
Lamp:
See Site. Lighting Specifications. Will Vary Depending_onSite Specific
Conditions. 60991146€E�6ight Bars -gyp
Control Gear:
Integral ower Supply D;4ypr Ppwpr-__PaGtOF >902A—_ _ and THD 20% at full
lea-4 6
,
Volts:
- -- - -- -
120
Manufacturer:
Cree ---
Catalog #:
EDGE Wall Pack (reference Beta's Site Lighting Plan for specifications)
Location:
See Site Plan provided by Beta
Meantin
---------- g-
*► Hed irig - - ----
Wall RA . �. ;d
Sarfase,�,-1t
- - AlumiRUR4
Reflerter! I_ene'-
•i'{l rl
Slear - - -- - --- --- -- - -
I-J'-- •J.-
Shields
__-_._-- ---_�
------
-_-__._ --_ -----rl"11-
16500-11
January 1, 2017
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Tii.;,--.Tir.lsl'•1: \ 0Jt4E .., t 19 . e eq+y OR f;nlri,
- - - 6A89K4EP Wght B -arp, 5 ye?r Waffaaty
Clent-Am'' - - i +egral Il . - D • C- + of _ of
...,.. n„er e,.,er
wn�,--Q�,. _. _- . .,;1���r,.�T � as�er _99�o and THB �9�e at frill 1ead,_5�ear
wady
"per: Q CT A
------ �
EDGED.�nL (refer enrek. Re+�'o Ci+e I inL,+inn Dlon fer cnenifine+innc\ .,lia. ++• -_--
16500.02 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
;FIXTURE TYPE 'AL1e' 112" Linear Wet location Surface Mounted Adjustable High Output LED
With rep, ate L agkun .,,;,.re i9ve0er Emer enc Back Up.
Mounting: Surface ceilin
ousing: Low Copper Content Extruded luminu Housing -with Stainless -Steel
Hardware
Reflector / Lens: Clear Tempered Glass Len
rim / Finish: =8mooth White aI�,Miq M gfey
tamp:- +%- 965 Im,> 78CRI / 4000K, LED 1 d 25 ---
ontrol Gear: Integral Power Supply,
Volts: 120,
Manufacturer: Lumenpulse(Bodine)
Catalog #`. LOG-HO-120-12-40K-30X60-WAM6-WH-NO (BODINE ELI-S-20)
ocation: Self-service walk-in be Goole
FIXTURE TYPE 'DL1e' 61 Aperture Rece_ ss_ e_d_ L_ED 4^ ^^w- F-I! ^_0+with Emergency
_Battery Backup
Mounting: Recessed in d Gypsum. Board and Acoustic -Ceiling -Tile —
Coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type.
Housing: led Steel ^n +' Cr aand Qr ek"e's .i+h _ I a at
Reflector/Lens: Satin Clear Parabolic Spun Alzak Aluminum Self Flanged t efleeteF
Cone
16500-12
January 1, 2017
Trim / Finish:
Lamp:
Control Gear:
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Satin Clear Finish .�e'f
-- -.
30w LED Array, 1700 Im, > 90CRI / 3500K Pie'a R-e^lace- hle- need-„ lei
39 watts,. 3599K 6€D 1700-Lumen 100,000 HeurL e-t'„mee�*c-at 80%
Lumen-I�"airter�a„s�10ea one rol rrT
Integral Power Supply €leeire i ii6 u Sapp "der mi-a61e
ll,.erl...,r! enr! ChnrF C-irr-muit PFeteGted e..rl The.....+lly Regulated to
Prevent ^verhe ling_ oeund Rating!!. 199,999.heuFFabed life,', -yea,
Volts: 120
Manufacturer: Cree
Catalog #: Reflector:
KR6 2011
KR6T-SSGC-FF / Housing: KR6-20L--35K-120-EB7
39K K €€� - -- -- - "
Location: Entry Vestibule,
Restrooms
Wet
ht
13ackup and Goof Ring
Recessed in ,overhan6-6 structure - coordinate mou_nting
ounting: _
requ_irempnts
with ceiling type
Galvanozed
Steel nne„".,fin., Fr@F,e-and QraGket --. th -Alumin-um Heat
Housing:
Cle
r Acrylic A!�p�'- "-^, oefle^*^:^^e
effector/Lens:
IWhite with
l 8" Adapter Ring celfeQ
Trim / Finish:
am :
Field Replaceable Module, 30 watts, 3500K LED 1700 Lumen 100,000
our Lifetime at 80% Lumen Maintenance. 10 vear Warrantv. 90+ CRI
ntrol Gear: Electronic Power Supply/Driver - Dimmable, Overlo-cCircuit Protected and Thermally Regulated to Prevent
Sound Rating A. 100,000hour rated life. 10 Year Warr,
olts: 120
Manufacturer: Cree.
I
Catalog #: Reflector: KR6T-SSGC-FF /Housing_ KR6-20L-35K-120V-10V-EB7-
--- - - - ---- - - - -
GR8 (8" Adapter Ring)
IlDt; ')nl QGl! KR fiT CCP`P' FF CQ7 GR8
FIXTURE TYPE 'EM1' Exit sign
Mounting: Surface
16500-13
January 1, 2017
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Housing: Injection molded polycarbonate
Lamp: LED
Manufacturer: Lightolier
Catalog LLNURW
FIXTURE TYPE "GL1 e' 2' X 2' Recessed LED with Emergency Battery Ra_c_k_up,-
wu6ti6g.
Recessed in Acoustical Tile_Ceilinq Buff m'*R
Housing:
=tplq RolledP ($jjR
9effector 1 Lens:
rros-ted white qeaPWc---r-,-'
Trim/ Finish:
White
)Lamp:
37 w LED Array, 3338 Im,_>,9380
�Controll Gear:
Ver Supply D . Fiver; Inte gFai EleGt . FONG
=Integral Power
Volts:
12
Manufacturer:
FINELIT
Catalog #:
ocation: Customer Area
�FIXTURE TYPE'GL3e' 2' X 4" lRecessed ELED ] roff6Emergency_ Battery Backup;
Mounting; _A66u__s_t_ic_a_IT_i1_e'_-P_! _suT
Board.
ousing:'Cold - Rolled Stee
)Reflector I Lens: 2-154tf-er-n-, -Prismatic "-A-c-r-y-l-i-c--L-e- n'sGfea�_��'
is
�rim i Finish:_—_-- White
�am p: 35w LED Array, 3800 Im, > 85CRI 3500K
40 V LPPAffay,
Pontroll Gear: Integral Power Supply DFiyeF;_ 19tegm! _F=1_eGtF9_n'_G
AN
Manufacturer: M-6fifuk BRITE
16500-14
January 1, 2017
log #:
u
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
%-F9-UNV-EL7VV-L 835-CD-1
I Frame Kit, DF-24-W, at gypsum board ceiling locations.
ED Surface Mount with Acrylic Lens , ith Emergenc
Housing: _ Stee
)Reflector / Lens: Froste W#±te,�A_yr lic o
rim I Finish: White
w LED Array, 4000 Im, 100,000 Hour Lifetime at
ntenance, 10 year Warranty, 90+ CRI CCT, 350*F
Control Gear: Integral
Power Supply
Volts: 120,
Manufacturer: Cree
Catalog #: LS4-40L-35K-10V-EB1
ocation: Stockroom,
Back of House
FIXTURE -TYPE 'SHe'
Mounting:
Housing:
Lens:
Trim:
Lamp:
Ballast:
Voltage:
Manufacturer:
Catalog#:
Location:
4` Linear Vaportight LED with Acrylic Lens with Emergency Back Up
Surface mounted to ceiling
One piece fiberglass reinforced polyester housing with closed cell
neoprene gasketing bonded to housing.
Clear Acrylic
White t
346 Lumens % 3500K, 80CRI, 50,000 hrs rated life to 1-70, 4000
5 year warrant
Integral _ wer Supply
120 i
I
HILIPS j
W-A-E-43L-835-4-UNV-TB K-EM LED€R�€R&
Refrigerated Areas
16500-15
January 1, 2017
FIXTURE TYPE 'REM2'
Mounting:
Housing:
Reflector / Lens:
Trim / Finish:
Lamp:
Control Gear:
Volts:
Manufacturer:
Catalog #:
Location:
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
Wet Location Wall Mounted Emergency Light with Remote Battery
Pack
Surface — Wall Mounted to 4" recessed outlet box
Thermoplastic
Clear Acrylic with Glare Shield
l_
White
(2) 9 aft 12 volt par 36 sealed incandescent
N/A r�o.n.ote e _ b@ApF.. p_aGk /I G. htelior r;;tg I 0124 1
120
Lightalarms
EF11 Di ZF-VVT
OP12Q1-M
Surface mount, exterior wall at exit doors
16500-17
January 1, 2017